JP7603758B2 - Cooking equipment - Google Patents

Description

This disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot, placed on a top plate.

Cooking appliances are broadly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "free-standing type" which is placed in a specific position on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small and portable "tabletop type" which is placed in a desired position on a dining table, etc.

Many "built-in" cooking appliances are equipped with multiple heat sources and are popular for their ability to handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to match the standards of general kitchen furniture, meaning there is much less freedom in design compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, and it is difficult to turn them into practical products.

A typical built-in cooking device has an induction heating unit located on the top plate at the top of the main body to expand the range of cooking options, and a heating chamber (also called a "grill chamber," but hereafter referred to as the "heating chamber") inside the main body that is heated by a heating element, and cooks food placed in the heating chamber (for example, Patent Document 1).

Similarly, to expand the range of cooking possibilities, there are cookers that have an induction heating section on the top plate at the top of the main body, and a heating chamber inside the main body that is heated by microwaves and a heat source, and that heat and cook food placed in the heating chamber (for example, Patent Document 2).
Cookers equipped with a plurality of heat sources with different heating principles, such as those described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, are called composite cookers.

JP 2018-67413 A (page 7, FIG. 4) JP 2020-87506 A (page 20, FIG. 18)

As proposed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 above, when using heat sources in multiple locations, measures must be taken to prevent unintended heat sources from operating or stopping even if the user issues an incorrect operation command. If these measures are not sufficient, it may cause confusion for the user and may result in cooking failure. In other words, difficult technical problems must be overcome, such as coordinating multiple heat sources and informing or displaying the user of the coordination status of the heat sources in a timely manner.

In particular, when performing cooking in which the food to be cooked is moved between above the top plate portion and the heating chamber and heated two or more times during the process of completing a single dish (hereinafter referred to as "coordinated cooking"), it is conceivable that the user may become confused about how to operate the device when starting and stopping the heating operations of a cooking process using one heat source (including a process of preheating the heated food, such as a pan) and cooking process 2 using another heat source. For example, this may occur when an emergency stop is required because the cooking liquid is about to overflow from the heated food (such as a metal pan), or when a user receives an emergency earthquake alert and hastily stops cooking.

In response to these issues, the above-mentioned Patent Document 1 proposes that the heating of only a specific heating source be stopped by operating a main power switch, but this does not take into account situations in which multiple cooking sources are used simultaneously, and there is room for improvement. The same can be said about the above-mentioned Patent Document 2.

A first object of the present disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by improving operability for the user.
A second object of the present disclosure is to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of heating cooking methods by having the device take appropriate action if an abnormality occurs during heating operation, thereby improving peace of mind and reliability.

A cooking device according to one aspect relating to the first object includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
A control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, and the notification unit;
An input operation unit for giving a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are integrated,
The cooperative cooking mode is a mode in which a cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means,
The control unit is
(1) receiving an input from the common operation unit and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended in response to a command from the individual operation unit,
(3) During the cooking process 1, a part or all of the input functions for the second heating means in the common operation unit are disabled;
(4) when the cooking process 1 is completed, an input function for the second heating means in the common operation unit is restored;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are performed according to instructions from the common operation unit.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to another aspect related to the first object includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
A control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, and the notification unit;
An input operation unit for giving a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the first heating means,
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are integrated,
The cooperative cooking mode is a mode in which a cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means,
The control unit is
(1) receiving an input from the common operation unit and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended in response to an instruction from the common operation unit,
(3) Disabling a part or all of the input functions of the individual operation units during the cooking process 1;
(4) when the cooking process 1 is completed, an input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit is restored;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are performed according to instructions from the individual operation unit.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to another aspect related to the first object includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
A control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, and the notification unit;
An input operation unit for giving a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are integrated,
The cooperative cooking mode includes at least two cooking steps: a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2;
a first coordinated cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 1 and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 2, and a second coordinated cooking mode in which the second heating means is used in the cooking step 1 and the first heating means is used in the cooking step 2,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooperative preheating cooking mode in which a preheating process by either the first heating means or the second heating means is executed in addition to the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2,
The control unit is
(1) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected, a first specific screen is displayed on the notification unit;
(2) displaying a plurality of cooking menu options on the first selection screen;
(3) When one of the cooking menu candidates is selected, automatically determining either the first cooperative cooking mode or the second cooperative cooking mode;
(4) requesting input of control conditions to be applied to the selected cooking menu from the common operation unit;
(5) restricting input functions of the individual operation unit and the shared operation unit during the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to another aspect related to the first object includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
A control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, and the notification unit;
An input operation unit for giving a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has an operation program for an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode has a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2, and includes a first cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is used for the cooking process 1, and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the second heating means is used for the cooking process 1,
In either the first coordinated cooking mode or the second coordinated cooking mode,
(1) selecting the cooperative cooking mode and deciding to start the cooking process 1 on the common operation unit;
(2) The end of the cooking process 2 is performed by the individual operation unit when the cooking process 2 is performed by the first heating means, and is performed by the shared operation unit when the cooking process 2 is performed by the second heating means.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the first disclosure regarding the second object is:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the first heating means and a cooking step 2 using the second heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1;
(2) Stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until a stop condition A is satisfied.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to a second disclosure relating to a second object is as follows:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the first heating means and a cooking step 2 using the second heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 2, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 2;
(2) Stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped,
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until a stop condition B is satisfied.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the third disclosure relating to the second object is:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the second heating means and a cooking step 2 using the first heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1;
(2) Stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped,
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until a stop condition B is satisfied.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to the fourth disclosure relating to the second object is as follows:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the second heating means and a cooking step 2 using the first heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 2, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 2;
(2) Stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until a stop condition A is satisfied.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to another aspect related to the first object includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means HM2 for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information;
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
An input operation unit for giving a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit dedicated to the first heating means and a common operation unit for the second heating means and the first heating means,
The control unit has an operation program for a coordinated preheat cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order,
The linked preheating cooking mode includes a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by the second heating means, a cooking step 1 of heating and cooking the object by the second heating means following the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of moving the object to be heated used in the cooking step 1 onto a heating portion of the first heating means and further heating the object to be cooked after the cooking step 1 is completed.
The linked preheat cooking mode includes:
(1) selecting the cooperative preheating cooking mode and deciding to start the preheating step and the cooking step 1 in the common operation unit;
(2) The end of the preheating process and the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the common operation unit,
(3) The cooking process 1 is started and ended by the common operation unit 40M.
(4) The start and end of cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation unit.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by linking multiple heating means.

1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system between one house and the outside according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 1. 1 is a perspective view showing an entire kitchen furniture in which a built-in type combination heating cooker according to a first embodiment is installed. FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state of kitchen furniture before the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 is installed. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of installing the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 in kitchen furniture. FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the cooking appliance in FIG. 5 . 9 is an enlarged schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing a front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 . 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 11. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 11, showing the flow of cooling air. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along the line W-W of FIG. 12. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line YY of FIG. 11. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line VV of FIG. 12. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line XX of FIG. 12. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a right-side essential part of the cooking device of FIG. 5 when installed in kitchen furniture. FIG. 6 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a plan view of the front portion of the cooking device of FIG. 5 for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units. FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit and an integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is an enlarged plan view of a right operating section and a right display section of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is an enlarged plan view of a left operation unit and a left display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5. FIG. 25 is a simplified schematic diagram of the main components shown in FIG. 24. 25 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. 24. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25. 4 is a simplified perspective view illustrating a positional relationship between the cooling air from the air outlet of the first cooling fan and an inverter circuit board. FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a block diagram 3 showing main control-related parts of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a main cooling air passage of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a table showing the correspondence between the main (range grill) control menus and the display areas in the integrated display unit of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between a storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and a central operation unit. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. 6 is a table showing explanations of cooking menus in a combined cooking mode and an induction heating only cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 1 for explaining a control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in time series. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in time series. 6 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fans of the cooking device in FIG. 5 and the types of cooking. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process in the case of detecting an abnormality in the cooking appliance of FIG. 5 . 6 is a time chart showing the timings of starting and stopping operation of first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a time chart 2 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when coordinated cooking is performed in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a time chart 3 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when both the induction heating source and the oven heating source are driven simultaneously in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a control operation when deep-fry cooking (automatic), which is a type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the operation of the left operating part of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the operation of the left operating unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 7 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during coordinated cooking in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing input operations and steps when implementing a coordinated cooking mode, a combined cooking mode, and a single cooking mode. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between cooking steps in a coordinated cooking mode and a single cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode and the independent cooking mode. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys in an input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection of an integrated cooking mode to transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing, in time series, the relationship between input operations and displays until a transition between a composite cooking mode and an associated cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in an integrated cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the combined cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 1 showing a notification operation of a cooking process in a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of notifying the user of a cooking process in the combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing cooking steps in a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing cooking steps in a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 3 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 4 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 5 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when a combined cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a plan view 1 showing the control operations of the input operation unit and the display unit (integrated display unit and left display unit) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7A and 7B are plan and explanatory views showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooking menus in the coordinated cooking mode when the coordinated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 13 is a table showing the display contents of a first specific screen on the integrated display unit when the collaborative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when an integrated cooking mode is selected; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "fried chicken" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between a refrigerator and a cooker during cooking in a coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 112 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between a refrigerator, a home gateway, and a cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 110. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "fried chicken" in the collaborative cooking mode in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 110. 111 is a flowchart showing the operation of a home gateway in the example shown in FIG. 110. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation of the integrated control device illustrating an example of using refrigerator inventory information. FIG. 116 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 115. 116 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of a built-in type combined heating cooker according to a second embodiment. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from the selection to the transition of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 122. 13 is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in a cooking device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection to transition of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 124. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys in an input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection to transition of an integrated cooking mode in a heating cooker according to a fourth embodiment. FIG.

(Definition)
"Home appliance" 400 refers to an electric appliance designed mainly for use at home. Home appliance 400 includes induction heating cooker 1, described later, refrigerator 401, television receiver 402, air conditioner 403, air purifier 404, ventilator 405, electric rice cooker (including electric rice cooker) 406, microwave oven 408, lighting equipment 409, and air purifier 410. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "refrigerator" includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The "device identification information" of home appliance 400 is unique information for identifying home appliance 400. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, manufacturer name, type name (model name), model number, and serial number of home appliance 400.

The "home gateway" 411 refers to an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participates in coordinated operations. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of issuing an operation command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called "data") from one home appliance 400.

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function to manage the total power usage of a household for all or some of the home appliances 400, in which case it may be called a "power control device" or "integrated management device", etc.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current state of the home appliance 400, such as whether the home appliance 400 is in operation, stopped, or in standby mode, from the home appliance 400 via a wired or wireless signal.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 400 using the appliance identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or "power command device" for one home appliance 400 (e.g., induction heating cooker 1), if it does not limit the power consumption of other home appliances (e.g., lighting fixture 409), it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, it does not have the function of regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 409 itself so that the total power consumption, including the power consumption of the other home appliances 400, does not exceed the upper limit of the specified total power consumption. Therefore, from the perspective of the lighting fixture 409, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to either an integrated management device or a power command device.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 121 disclose a first embodiment. In this first embodiment, a built-in type combined (induction) heating cooker 1 is disclosed. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it will be simply called a "heating cooker."
In each drawing, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, LE indicates the left direction, FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this embodiment 1, the "first heating means" HM1 refers to a means for heating the object N, which contains the food to be cooked, on the top plate 15, such as an induction heating source 9 or a gas burner (burner) (not shown) described below. The object N is, for example, a metal pot or frying pan.

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object N placed on the top plate," it means that it includes both cases where the heated object N, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 15 described below and heated, and cases where the heated object N is placed on a support member, such as a trivet, arranged above the top plate, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In this embodiment 1, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food to be cooked contained inside the heating chamber 113, which will be described later.

In the first embodiment, multiple heating sources with different heating principles are provided. The heating sources may be any of microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188, or a gas burner (burner) (not shown). In addition to microwave heating source 189, multiple heating sources that exert a heating effect by other heating principles may be provided. Furthermore, the second heating means may be a steam generator (boiler) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

In this embodiment 1, the term "induction heating cooker" refers to a cooker having a heating section that inductively heats the object to be heated N. When there are multiple heating sections, some of the heating sections may be heated using a method other than induction heating, such as a radiant electric heat source (sheath heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.).

In this embodiment 1, a "combined cooking device" refers to a device that has multiple heating sources with different heating principles, such as a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 made up of an electric heater or the like, and can cook in one heating chamber 113 using these two types of heating sources. The heating chamber 113 may also be heated by both an oven heating source 188 made up of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Furthermore, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113.

In this embodiment 1, the “heating means (hereinafter referred to as the “oven heating source”)” of the heating chamber 113 may be either a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, or a heating source installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 113.
Alternatively, a heat generating member that becomes hot by induction heating may be disposed and used to heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, or to heat the air inside the heating chamber 113.

For example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-74305 proposes a cooking device that is arranged in a heating chamber (grill chamber) and has a second heating body (induction heating coil) that heats a cooking tray on which food to be cooked is placed from below, and a third heating body (induction heating coil) that heats the food to be cooked from the side.

Furthermore, JP 2016-85996 A proposes a configuration in which an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and a cooking plate placed on the IH heating coil is induction heated. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be induction heated. For example, iron, stainless steel, carbon material with a carbon content of 90% or more, ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material, etc. are used.

As a representative example of an induction heating method using a heat-generating component that becomes hot, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses a method in which a high-frequency current is supplied to an IH coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil, and the high-frequency magnetic flux is linked to a heater disposed in the heating chamber, causing an induced current to flow through the heater, and the food in the heating chamber is heated and cooked by Joule heat generated by the electrical resistance of the heater itself.

Furthermore, JP 2013-247048 A proposes arranging an electrically closed circuit heater inside the heating chamber, linking this heater with high-frequency magnetic flux generated from an induction coil arranged outside the heating chamber, heating the heater to a high temperature and dissipating heat into the heating chamber. Note that the heater referred to here forms an electrically closed circuit, and is made by bending a round bar or pipe made of stainless steel, high-nickel alloy, etc. into a specified shape and joining both ends together by welding, brazing, etc. to form an endless shape.

A typical example of the "IH coil" referred to in this embodiment 1 is one made by bundling about 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together and winding them into a spiral (for example, Japanese patent publication JP 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also one made by winding about 1,000 to 1,500 pieces of wire of about 0.05 mm.

Another patent document, JP 2018-32551 A, proposes an induction heating cooker that uses a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to the “IH coil” which is the main part of the induction heating source 9 .

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The "coordinated cooking" mentioned above refers to the use of multiple heating sources with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single dish, after microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, and then heated by the IH coil 17L (described below) at the new location to complete the dish, this is a type of "coordinated cooking" as referred to here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 113 with a gas burner (burner), and then move the food onto the top plate 15 and heat it with the gas burner (burner) or induction heating source 9 to improve the cooking quality.

Coordinated cooking has been proposed in the form of a built-in cooking device in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and home appliance operation management system)
First, the operation management system for the home appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA indicates one house.
Although not actually shown, the inside of the house HA is divided into a number of living spaces by walls and doors, and one of these living spaces, the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), is provided with home appliances 400 such as a refrigerator 401, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406, as well as kitchen furniture 2. The living space may also include other rooms such as a "living room" and a "bathroom" as well as a room with a toilet, although these are not shown in FIG. 1. The living space may include other rooms.

All living spaces are supplied with electricity, for example 200V, from a commercial power source EP provided by an electric power company outside the house. This electricity is drawn into the house HA via a watt-hour meter 414.

415 is a power line (main line) connected to a commercial power source EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. A television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, a home gateway 411, a wireless router 419, and an environment detection unit 413 are each connected to this power line 415.

The home gateway 410, the environment detection unit 413, the TV receiver 402, the air conditioner 403, the cooking appliance 1, the refrigerator 401, and the lighting fixture 409 are always connected to the power line 415 via a specified power cord. Note that there is more than one lighting fixture 409, but the others are not shown in the figure.

FIG. 1 will now be described.
416 is a wide area communications network (sometimes called a "communications network" or the "Internet").
This wide area communication network 416 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a wireless router 419 .

417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the information and communication terminal device 418. For example, it may be a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider in a specific region or an electric power company, or it may be a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. This external server may be a distributed processing type server known as a "cloud server." It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that uses cloud servers: "IaaS," "PaaS," and "SaaS."

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from the external server 417. This content includes recipe information (text and images) for various cooking methods.

Although not shown, the environmental sensor of the above-mentioned environmental detection unit 413 may be provided with additional temperature and humidity sensors that detect the temperature and humidity outside the house.

The external server 417 also functions as an information providing means for the home appliance 400. In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as the manufacturer, distributor, repairer, or information service provider of the home appliance 400, either alone or in collaboration with two or more organizations, and provides various services related to the home appliance 400 to users via the wide area communication network 416.

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as a "Web server"). A Web server refers to a service program that provides display information of HTML and objects (images, etc.) to a Web browser of software on the information processing device (client) side that is the "information receiver" such as various information and communication terminal devices 418 and home gateway 410, in accordance with HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between Web browsers and Web browsers), and a server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and remembers control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location. The remote control can be achieved by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) the control application software from an information and communication terminal device 418, which will be described in detail later, such as a device called a smartphone.

The information and communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by the user to communicate calls and data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or anywhere on the go. It is a device that can download information from outdoor information sites via the wide area communication network 416, send and receive e-mail, and transmit remote control signals, but it can also be a device that cannot make calls, and such portable communication devices are collectively called information and communication terminal device 418. A small portable personal computer is also a type of information and communication terminal device 418.

The information communication terminal device 418 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals through short-range communication while being located within a few centimeters of (or may be in contact with) the input/output unit of each home appliance 400. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 400 including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .
On the other hand, it is also possible for the information communication terminal device 418 to send control data (also called a "control command") to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400, and control the home appliance 400 in accordance with the control command.

In this embodiment 1, the information communication terminal device 418 is not able to directly remotely control the home appliances 400. Some of the home appliances 400, such as the cooking appliance 1, generate high heat, so remote control via the Internet, which is used by many people outside the house 413, is not adopted. Instead, it is possible to operate all the home appliances 400 via the home gateway 411 as an integrated information processing device.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 in this embodiment 1 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 and allows them to operate in cooperation with each other. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called data) from one home appliance 400.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, the kitchen KT in the house HA is equipped with a range hood 422 (described below) and a ceiling-mounted air purifier 404.

413A is a sensor section of the environment detection section 413 of the home gateway 411. Although not shown in FIG. 1, this sensor section 413A has an environment sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a human presence sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (by infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). The environment detection section 413 will be described in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information of the atmosphere in the space (kitchen KT) where the cooker 1 and refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light intensity information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

Examples of "use of environmental information" include the following:
(1) When the temperature is high, the keep-warm function of the electric rice cooker 406 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process ends. Also, the target refrigeration temperature and the target freezing temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode", or the ventilation device 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (such as the target room temperature) are changed.
(3) If fine dust particles are dispersed in the air, the air cleaner 404 is operated, or the ventilation device 405 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen dispersed is large, the air purifier 404 starts operating.
(5) When the amount of light (amount of visible light) is low, the lighting device 409 is turned on.

A "resident" refers to a person who resides in one of the houses HA shown in FIG. 1. Residents include blood relatives such as parents and children, brothers, and sisters. When using home appliance 400, the person is called a "user" regardless of whether they are a resident or not.

"Home" means a single dwelling HA managed by a specific manager, and may also include an apartment building with multiple rooms and occupied by multiple families. In other words, such an apartment building is considered a home here if, like a single dwelling HA, the commercial power limit is centrally managed by a single power cut-off device (such as a single breaker BK or multiple power cut-off devices).

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information on some signal related to power consumption that the home appliance 400 receives from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information including information on transmission commands such as the power reduction request signal AS1 and power reduction command signal AS2 described below. This information includes information indicating the time when the signal was received (year, month, and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, information such as "Transmission time: 17:00 on July 29, 2020, reduce the instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" regarding the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time for the cooking appliance 1.

In the case of the cooking appliance 1, for example, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, and is not erased even when the main power switch 98 is turned ON or OFF. Turning the main power switch 98 ON and OFF is considered to be one cooking session, and at least several cooking sessions are stored and held. Anything beyond that is automatically erased in sequence.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
2 shows an example of a hardware configuration to which the cooking device 1 and the home appliance operation management system of the present embodiment 1 are applied. The following description will be given taking the kitchen KT as an example of one living space.

In the kitchen KT to which the present embodiment 1 is applied, an air purifier 404 is installed on the ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a refrigerator 401 with multiple freezer compartments 401A with different freezing temperatures and a refrigerator compartment 401B, a microwave oven 408, a built-in (induction) heating cooker 1 installed in the kitchen furniture 2, a range hood (a type of ventilation device 405) 422 installed directly above the heating cooker 1, and a home gateway 411 are installed. Note that the electric rice cooker 406, air conditioner 403, and lighting fixtures 409 described in FIG. 1 are not shown.

The refrigerator 401 has multiple freezer compartments 401A, allowing the user to select a freezer compartment with a suitable freezing temperature (temperature range) for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh ingredients (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C±2°C, -10°C, or -2°C.

In addition, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range also affect the maturation of fresh food ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time, so even in the same freezer, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range can be changed as appropriate depending on the type of food ingredient.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outdoors is connected to this exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 denotes a hood whose entire underside is open as an intake port 425A, and inside this hood is installed an electric exhaust fan 426. The range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but a detailed description of the configuration will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 422 is sent to the central control unit 447 (described in detail later) of the home gateway 411 at any time. For this reason, the range hood 422 is provided with a transmitting unit (not shown) and a receiving unit (not shown) inside to transmit various operating information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of exhaust operation and the strength of operation (exhaust capacity). For example, the transmitting unit and receiving unit are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication unit 427. This communication unit 427 sends and receives information with the home gateway 411 via wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is rotated, it draws in air from the intake port 425A of the range hood 422, and also sucks in cooking odors and smoke, and exhausts the air outside the house HA through the duct 424. The range hood 422 receives an operation signal, such as an infrared signal, from the cooking appliance 1 and starts exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, arrow FF1 indicates the airflow rising from cooking device 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust airflow from duct 424. FF3 indicates the airflow moving sideways near ceiling surface 420. FF4 indicates the airflow blown out from air purifier 404.

A heat sensor (thermoelectromotive element) may be placed in the range hood 422 facing the cooking appliance 1. With this configuration, the range hood 422 itself detects when the cooking appliance 1 starts operating and controls the operation of the electric fan 426.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 is installed by embedding it in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped body 428 of the air purifier 404, a blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided.

431 is an air guide plate that covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 404. 432 is an intake port formed by the air guide plate 431 at one end (the side closer to the range hood 422). 433 is an air outlet formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite the intake port 432.

The blower fan 429 draws in dirty air from the kitchen through the intake port 432, passes the purified air through the filter 430, and exhausts it from the exhaust port 433 toward the bottom of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the air in the room is purified.

434 is an odor sensor for the air purifier 404, and is positioned facing the entrance of the suction port 432. This detects odors in the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of air pollution. The odor sensor 434 can be positioned anywhere in the air duct on the suction port 432 side, and in front of the filter 430, without any significant difference in effectiveness.

The odor sensor 434 detects the odor and the odor intensity is determined by an odor sensing unit (not shown) disposed inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404, and the result is sent to the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411 as needed. For this reason, the air purifier 404 is provided with a transmitter (not shown) and a receiver (not shown) for transmitting various information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of air purifying operation and the odor intensity determination results. For example, the transmitter and receiver are integrated in hardware as a communication unit 435. The communication unit 435 transmits and receives information between the home gateway 411 and the air purifier 404 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

Air purifier 421 can detect odors when air purifier 404 is operating and an odor generated somewhere in kitchen KT reaches air purifier 404 from that location.

This air purifier 404 is generally configured to include one or more (multiple layers) filters 430 with fine air passages to capture dust particles, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 filters oily smoke generated during cooking with edible oil (for example, "fried foods" or "tempura"), the oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430 and combine to form an oil film.
This oil film reduces the filtering performance of the filter 430. In other words, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 decreases, leading to a situation in which the air purification ability of the air purifier 404 decreases. Therefore, an idea has already been proposed to avoid operating the air purifier 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oily smoke generated by cooking with oil (for example, Patent Document JP 2016-95126 A).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is depicted as being installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a location different from that shown in FIG. 2. Also, multiple refrigerators 401 may be used, rather than just one.

412 is a main body case that forms the outer shell of the home gateway 411. This main body case 412 is fixed to a vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to check input operations and displays.

445 is an alarm device fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, which will be described in detail later. 2D is a water supply inlet 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking appliance 1 and the range hood 422.
In Fig. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking appliance 1. In this embodiment 1, this temperature monitoring device is configured as one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 in terms of hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection unit 441 and a communication unit 442. The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal imaging camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443.

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is a hardware component of the range hood 422, but is always powered regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 is constantly monitoring the temperature even when the range hood 422 is not in exhaust operation.

The temperature detection unit 441 divides the entire area of the top plate 15 (described later) into at least 64 areas (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as "detection areas") and detects the temperature of each area.

The detection area includes an induction heating section 17H of the cooking appliance 1, which will be described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area at predetermined time intervals not only while the range hood 421 is in operation but also while it is not in operation.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration in which the information is transmitted directly to the cooking appliance 1 may be adopted. In addition, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining the temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (e.g., every 5 seconds), but is shortened in areas where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving unit 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmitting unit 48 of the cooking appliance 1, the range hood 421 starts operating. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the cooking appliance 1 when the range hood 421 starts operating.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating the end of operation of the cooking appliance 1. It continues acquiring temperature information at a specified time interval until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 15 falls below a predetermined temperature (e.g., 40°C). Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the interval of the temperature measurement operation becomes slower. Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the above-mentioned monitoring operation may be temporarily terminated, but the temperature monitoring operation is started again at least at the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1.

The cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the cooking device 1, and 114 is a door that can be opened and closed to cover the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

The cooking device 1 has a top plate 15 that covers the top surface, on which an object to be heated N, such as a pot or frying pan made of magnetic metal, is placed, and is induction heated by an IH coil 17. 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two spaces, an upper space and a lower space.

CK is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 16S, in which the IH coil 17 is housed.

Next, Fig. 4 will be described. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home appliances 400, and the temperature monitoring device 440. Among the home appliances 400, the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408 are subjected to power amount control from the home gateway 411.
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also functions as a power command device for the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408, but this has been explained above and will not be explained in detail here. Although not shown in Fig. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also a home appliance 400 subject to power amount control.

The power control unit 448 constantly obtains information on the amount of power used by the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408) and has the function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliances 400 so as not to exceed a preset total amount of power, and is already known as a HEMS (home energy management system).

When the power consumption control unit 448 receives information indicating a power reduction request or power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, it performs an operation to reduce the power consumption of the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1, the microwave oven 408, and the air conditioner 403) according to a predetermined priority order.

In this case, the information (command signal) received by the cooking device 1 is the power reduction request signal AS1, the power reduction command signal AS2, etc.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection unit 413 that incorporates a human detection unit 413H that receives the detection output of a human detection sensor 452. The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown) and a sensor that detects the temperature and humidity in the kitchen in the form of data in a specified format. 453 is an environment sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen KT.

The human presence sensor 452 detects the presence of people in the kitchen KT, particularly in the area in front of the cooking appliance 1 and in front of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. One or more human presence sensors 452 are installed inside the kitchen KT.

For example, if the distance between the front of the cooking device 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is short, the human detection sensor 452 is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, facing the space between the front of the cooking device 1 and the refrigerator 401.

In addition, if there is a small distance between the front of the cooking appliance 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401, one human detection sensor 452 is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, etc., facing the space near the front of the cooking appliance 1. The other human detection sensor 453 should be installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, etc., facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401.

A human detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect the presence of a user in front of the cooking appliance 1 .
As described above, the locations for installing the human detection sensors 452, 453 may be appropriately determined taking into consideration the relative positions of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1 and the detection capabilities of the human detection sensors.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one of the sensors of the environment detection unit 413, but it may also function as one of the sensors of a home presence detection device (not shown) for detecting the presence of a human inside the house HA, i.e., in the kitchen KT, etc. In that case, information from an unlocking sensor that detects that the front door (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used by the home presence detection device. This can improve the accuracy of the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

The input unit 449 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. One of the functions is to specify the home appliance 400 for which an upper limit on power consumption is to be set, and then to set the upper limit on power consumption and the time period during which the appliance can be used. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the cooking appliance 1 as, for example, 4800W or 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function for inputting information by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen, as well as a function for inputting information by voice, and various desired functions can be input by the resident directing their voice into a microphone unit (not shown).

445 is an alarm device that issues an alarm to the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440, and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445. Note that since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the power consumption control unit 448, power is not restricted or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 400.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further includes a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 446 , a central control unit 447 , and a storage device 450 .
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication with the home electric appliances 400 such as the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 individually.

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 is a device that records a relatively large amount of information, such as the operation history information of the home gateway 411, the daily power control history information of the home appliance 400, and further the daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories or HDDs.

The central control unit 447 contains a microcomputer that is the core of information processing, as well as ROM and RAM, and stores computer programs that regulate various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a wide area communication network (Internet) that performs wireless communication via a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wireless router 419.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 is shown with only one communication unit 446, but a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) for the home appliance 400 and a communication unit for the wireless router 419 may be provided separately. Also, a separate NFC communication unit may be provided to enable direct information exchange via wireless communication between the NFC (near field communication) provided in the information communication terminal 418.

451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least one month (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In this embodiment 1, the input unit 449 can be used to register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (e.g., shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

When event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451, a notification is issued from the schedule management unit 451 at the stored date and time. The notification may be displayed on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449 or be notified by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a notification may be sent to the information and communication terminal device 418 carried by the resident.

When a home appliance 400 such as a cooking appliance 1 is activated, a notification may be sent based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 451.

(Overview of cooking appliances)
Next, the cooking device 1 according to the present embodiment 1 will be described with reference to Figs.
5, cooking appliance 1 is a built-in cooking appliance that is incorporated in kitchen furniture 2. Reference numeral 2A denotes an installation port formed in kitchen furniture 2. Cooking appliance 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99, as described below.

As shown in Figs. 5 and 19, the cooking device 1 has two heating sections 17L and 17R on the left and right.
In FIG. 19, CL1 indicates a center line passing through the center point of the left and right sides of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates the range of the top plate 15 exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating section (corresponding to the "first heating section") provided in the range to the right of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this.
17HL is a left heating section (corresponding to the "second heating section") provided in the range to the left of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. In this way, this cooking device 1 is a cooking device provided with two (two) "heating ports" (heating sections) on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

Alternatively, a third induction heating section may be provided between the right heating section (first heating section) 17HR and the left heating section (second heating section) 17HL so as to straddle the lateral center line CL1, making the cooking device into a three-burner (induction) cooking device. Alternatively, one of the IH coils 17L, 17R (described in detail later) constituting the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, when referring to the "induction heating unit," the reference symbol 17H is used.

As shown in Figures 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate the desired position for placing an object to be heated N (see Figure 3), such as a metal pan or plate (grill). The position marks 17LS and 17RS are printed on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the cooking device 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating sections 17H, one on the left and one on the right. The user can also recognize that there are two induction heating sections, one on the left and one on the right, by the voice guidance of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later.

Directly below the position marks 17LS and 17RS are installed IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not need to be circular, and may be marked, for example, with a figure, a symbol such as "+", or letters that indicate only the center point of the desired position for placing the object to be heated N.

The position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks that indicate approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, and are therefore drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

In this embodiment 1, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as IH coils, the reference symbol 17 is used. Therefore, when referring to an "IH coil" 17, it can refer to both the left IH coil 17L and the right IH coil 17R, or it can refer to either one of them.

In this embodiment 1, unless otherwise specified, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L described below.

(Basics of Heat Source and Control Menu)
The cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is provided with three types of heating means with different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (third heating source).

The three heat sources described above can be used as follows.
(1) The induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of one another, so that cooking can be performed using each heating source alone. This type of operation pattern is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) By using the induction heating source 9 in combination with at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, one cooking can be performed using two or more different locations. This type of operating pattern is the "linked cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) The oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together to perform a single cooking operation. This operating pattern is the "combined cooking mode" KM2. Note that the "operating pattern" referred to here includes cases in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in series, simultaneously, or with a time lag.

(4) The induction heating source 9 has dedicated input operation units. Specifically, it is a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. By operating the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to start the induction heating operation, set the heating conditions (heat power, etc.), and stop the induction heating operation.
(5) The oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have their own input operation units. They share the central operation unit 40M. For this reason, the central operation unit 40M may be called a "shared operation unit."

(6) There is no superiority or inferiority between the single cooking mode KM1, which uses any one of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189, and the linked cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2. The rule is that the cooking with the heating source that was started first takes priority. For this reason, for example, even if you try to select a linked cooking mode that uses the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating section 17HR is already performing a single heating operation for another cooking, the right heating section 17HR cannot be used in the linked cooking mode. As a result, the heating sources are partially restricted in the linked cooking mode KM3.

(7) With regard to input operations, there is no superiority or inferiority between single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 and the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode. Therefore, for example, if you try to set the linked cooking mode KM3 and leave it halfway without switching to the linked cooking mode KM3 (for example, if you do not enter anything for 30 seconds), the input up to that point will be automatically canceled. Also, if you enter an input for the single cooking mode KM1 from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9 during this left-alone state, you can proceed to induction heating cooking.

(8) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "first cooperative cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1), and a "second cooperative cooking mode" in which at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1). This will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

(9) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating process. Note that the case in which the preheating process is performed in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2 is also one form of the "cooperative preheating cooking mode", but this form is not described in detail in the first embodiment.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in Figures 5 to 8, the cooking appliance 1 is supported on the upper surface 2P of the rim of the installation opening 2A. In this embodiment 1, the kitchen furniture 2 is provided with a water tank 2CP that can temporarily store water coming out of a water supply opening 2D, as shown in Figure 6. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. This front opening 2B is for exposing the front components (a door 114 and a front cover 112, which will be described later) of the cooking appliance 1 to the front when the cooking appliance 1 is installed.

If the size of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 is standard, they are almost always pre-formed to standard dimensions, as standardization is being promoted by the industry. This will be explained in more detail later.

A typical method for installing the cooking appliance 1 in the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the installation work in the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in Figure 7, the cooking appliance 1 is placed into the installation opening 2A while tilting it so that its front side (the side facing you) is facing down, and then the rear side of the cooking appliance 1 is lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, so that the cooking appliance 1 is placed on the peripheral portion of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

Then, tighten the screws to move (rotate) the fixing bracket (not shown) installed on the rear edge of the lower unit 100 (described later) so that the fixing bracket is pressed firmly against the kitchen furniture 2, completing the installation. Note that this type of installation method is already widely used, so a detailed explanation of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the cooking appliance 1 is integrated by stacking the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 one above the other, and is shipped from the manufacturer in this integrated form. Therefore, in the assembly work shown in FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is fixed (directly) to the kitchen furniture 2 with the above-mentioned screws. By removing the fixing brackets (not shown), the entire cooking appliance 1 can be removed from the kitchen furniture 2. This allows subsequent inspection and repair to be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2. Note that when only the upper unit 100 is referred to as the "main body", the reference number 10 is added to distinguish it.

In this embodiment 1, the "main body case" HC is a collective term for the upper case 16 that constitutes the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the lower unit 200. The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in Fig. 6. However, the four corners are arc-shaped.
The installation opening 2A has a width W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm and a front-rear dimension D1 of 460 mm to 464 mm.

5 and 6, reference numerals 3 and 4 denote surface materials constituting the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Reference numerals 5 and 6 denote surface materials adjacent to both the left and right sides of the cooking appliance 1 when the cooking appliance 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2.
When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front faces of these surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front face of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, when the cooking appliance 1 is installed, the user can be presented with a design sense that the surface materials 3 to 6 and the cooking appliance 1 form a unified flat surface.

In Figure 7, 8 is a wall that divides the interior of the kitchen furniture 2 into multiple rooms vertically, and the lower part of this wall is often used, for example, as a storage room for kitchen utensils, food, etc. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in Figure 6. Also, the wall 8 may be installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 so that it is removable.

When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 with the above-described configuration, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents a substantially flat surface. When a user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, the front surface is designed so that it can be recognized as having a clean, unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer; kitchen furniture is often manufactured and sold by kitchen furniture or housing equipment manufacturers, while cooking appliance 1 is often manufactured and sold by home appliance manufacturers.

In Figures 5 and 6, 7 is a border printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. Note that a thin, shiny metallic decorative plate or tape may be attached to indicate the presence of the border 7 and create a sense of luxury. Conversely, the border 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Furthermore, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors or drawers. For example, they may always be fixed on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and not move at all.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6, when unified in terms of the color and surface form (pattern, gloss, unevenness, etc.) of their front surfaces, enhance the sense of unified design of the kitchen furniture 2. For example, if the entire front surface of surface material 4 is unified in a single color or wood grain pattern, the front surface of surface material 3 can also be unified in the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, we will explain Figures 8 and 9. Figure 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking appliance 1 in Figure 1. Figure 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the front of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in Figure 8.

In Japan, the standardization (commonization) of housing parts and materials for kitchen furniture 2, etc. is being promoted by the Japan Industrial Standards (JIS) as well as the Council for the Promotion of Standardization of Long-Term Use Housing Materials (abbreviated as Long-Term Use Housing Materials).

According to the "Long-term Use Component Standards for Built-in IH Cooking Heaters" established by the Nagajukyo, the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) on which the IH cooking heater is to be installed must meet are as follows:
(1) The dimensions of the installation opening 2A are: width dimension W1 is 560 mm to 564 mm, and front-to-rear dimension D1 is 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front downward portion 2F is 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D3 of the front downward slope portion 2F is 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D2 of the front downward section 2F is 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the "Long-Term Use Component Standards," the external dimensions of built-in IH cooking heaters (induction heating cookers) are specified as follows:
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom end of the top plate to the bottom end of the front panel is 215 mm to 223 mm.

The cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is designed to satisfy the various constraints described above. In FIG. 8, A1 is the dimension in the front-rear direction of the top plate 15 described below, which is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost part of the main body 110, which is 498 mm. A3 is the dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, which is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. The front cover 112 is formed symmetrically, and has several protruding mounting legs 112P formed on the rear side where it is attached (see Figure 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into multiple elongated fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and are slid slightly downward so that the mounting legs 112P engage with the fitting holes. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a fixing device (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upwards, and the front cover 112 is attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 8, 113 is a heating chamber formed entirely from a thin metal plate, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200. An opening 113A (see FIG. 15) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 113, through which a cooking utensil such as a frying pan (food to be heated N) or food to be cooked can be inserted and removed. The opening 113A is covered by a door 114, which can be opened and closed freely.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 is supported rotatably relative to the main body 110 by two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two arms 116 (not shown) arranged on the left and right so that its front surface is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front of the cooking appliance 1 by a professional such as a retailer or installer after the cooking appliance 1 has been installed in the kitchen furniture 2. The door 114 is attached when the cooking appliance 1 is shipped from the factory, and cannot be removed later by anyone other than a professional, i.e., a household user. This prevents microwaves from leaking from inside the heating chamber 113 due to poor sealing of the door 114 after installation.

In FIG. 8, H1 is the maximum height of the cooking device 1. In other words, it is the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200, which is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is the height dimension from the bottom end of the top plate 15 to the bottom end of the front cover 112, which is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the top to the bottom end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, which is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15, which is 11 mm. By setting these dimensional relationships, when the cooking appliance 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is ensured below the bottom surface of the door 114 and the bottom surface of the front cover 112.

Next, we will explain Figure 10. Figure 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in Figures 1 and 2. In this Figure 10, 2G is a step formed at both the left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This step is the part that faces closely to the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200 described later. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is approximately 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figs.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Z-Z line in FIG. 11. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Z-Z line in FIG. 11, showing the flow of cooling air. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the W-W line in FIG. 12. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Y-Y line in FIG. 11. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the V-V line in FIG. 12. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the X-X line in FIG. 12. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the right main part of the cooking device 1 when it is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1. Fig. 20 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit 40 and various display units in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation unit 40R and the right display unit 31R of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the cooking appliance 1.

(Characteristic overall configuration and functions of the cooking device)
Before going into a detailed description of the first embodiment, an overview of the cooking device 1 described in the first embodiment will be described below.

(1) A top plate 15 is placed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 can be induction heated by the induction heating source 9, which is one of the first heating means HM1.

(2) Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening can be freely opened and closed by a door 114.

(3) In order to heat the food placed inside the heating chamber 113, at least one or both of a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188, which are one of the second heating means HM2, are provided.

(4) The main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, the upper space 300A is provided with an upper air passage AH, and the lower space 300B is provided with a lower air passage UH.

(5) Upper cooling fans 60, 61 are arranged in the upper air passage AH. Outside air is introduced into the upper air passage AH by the upper cooling fans 60, 61 without passing through the lower space 300B.

(6) Lower cooling fans 128, 129 are arranged in the lower air passage UH. Outside air is introduced into the lower air passage UH by lower cooling fans 60, 61 without passing through the upper space 300A.

(7) The induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan are integrated and controlled by an integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC centrally controls individual control devices such as the IH control device 90, the microwave heating control device 130, and the heating chamber control device 159.

(8) Power is supplied to the integrated control device MC via a single main power operation unit (main power switch) 98 that is operated by the user.

(9) It has an input operation unit 40 that receives commands from the user, and the input operation unit 40 has a function of giving commands to the integrated control device MC to start and stop the heating and cooking operation.

(10) There are three types of cooking modes that the integrated control device MC executes: a single cooking mode KM1, a combined cooking mode KM2, and a coordinated cooking mode KM3.

(11) In the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, at least two things are defined: the multiple heating sources to be driven and the order in which the heating sources are driven.

(12) When one of the three cooking modes is selected, a specific screen is displayed to inform the user of the cooking mode and control conditions before the heating operation (operation) begins. The linked cooking mode KM3 is the first specific screen 30SP, the combined cooking mode KM2 is the second specific screen, and the single cooking mode KM1 is the third specific screen 30ST.

(13) Since the induction heating source 9 has a dedicated operation unit (individual operation unit), the user can first select a "control menu" (e.g., "boiling water") based on the heating source.

(14) The third specific screen ST is displayed only when the induction heating source 9 is selected. This is because the selection of the single cooking mode KM1 is possible only for the induction heating source 9 by the dedicated individual operation units 40L and 40R.

(15) Microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 do not have dedicated operation units (individual operation units) and use shared operation unit 40M, so it is not possible to initially select a control menu based on the heating source. In other words, microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 cannot initially select single cooking mode KM1.

(16) The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 share the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2. Therefore, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected on the shared operation unit 40M, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, and as a result of selecting a specific control menu (e.g., "Microwave manual" or "Warm") displayed on the second specific screen 30SC, the single cooking mode KM1 can ultimately be selected. Due to this configuration, the third specific screen 30ST is exceptionally not displayed.

(17) The integrated control device MC has a function to detect abnormalities while the cooking device 1 is operating. There are several types of abnormalities that can be detected, but the main one is overheating of the upper space 300A that contains the induction heating source 9.

(18) During cooking operation, if the main power is shut off by the main power operation unit (main power switch) 98, all cooking operations and cooking processes in the cooking mode will stop, but if any upper cooling fans 60, 61 or lower cooling fans 128, 129 are operating, they will continue to operate for a limited time or depending on the temperature environment.

(19) The coordinated cooking mode KM3 is a cooking method in which one food item is heated in at least two different locations, the internal space of the heating chamber 113 and the space above the top plate 15, and the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 may be operated at different times or at the same time.

(20) Whether they are operated with a time difference or during the same time period, the control unit MC can execute a preheating process of preheating the object to be heated N with the induction heating source 9, or a preheating process of preheating the heating chamber 113 with the oven heating source 188 (this is called the "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in the cooperative cooking mode KM3).

(21) When executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, at least two cooking processes (cooking process 1 and cooking process 2) are performed, and the start of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 can be determined by the input operation unit 40. In addition, the cooking process 1 or cooking process 2 that has started can also be terminated midway by the input operation unit 40.

(22) When the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, it is possible to deselect (cancel) the collaborative cooking mode before execution begins.

(23) When the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed, the order of the preheating process, cooking process 1, and cooking process 2 is determined by the control program of the control unit MC before the execution of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is started.

(24) The preheating process can be terminated at any time by the input operation unit 40. The termination does not cancel the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3.

(25) The linked cooking mode KM3 can be stopped midway after the cooking process 1 has started. When cooking process 1 has ended (including when the user ends it at any time), the reservation (occupancy) relationship for the heating source (heating unit in the case of an induction heating source) used in cooking process 1 can be automatically released. Therefore, if the heating source used in cooking process 1 was the first heating means HM1 (e.g., the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9), the first heating means HM1 (the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9) can be used for another heating cooking.

(26) The upper air passage AH formed inside the upper space 300A by the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower air passage UH formed in the lower space 300B by the lower cooling fans 128, 129 have their respective outside air intakes located in different positions, so that outside air is introduced into the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B separately from outside the main body case HC, and then discharged to the outside separately.

(27) The lower cooling fans 128, 129 are operated in response to the operation of the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189, and cool the parts of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 that are to be cooled.

(28) When the integrated control device MC detects an abnormality in the range of the top plate 15 or the upper space 300A, etc., during execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and automatically stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1, if the second heating means HM2 has started a cooking process in the lower space 300B, the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 is also stopped. Then, the setting of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is canceled.

(29) There is a notification unit AN that notifies the operating status of the cooking device 1. The notification unit is provided with a display unit (integrated display unit 30) that displays an initial standby screen 30D that displays information immediately after the main power is turned on by the main power operation unit (main power switch) 98, and a first specific screen 30SP that displays information when the linked cooking mode KM3 is being executed.

(30) A case in which the food N is moved between (at least) two (left and right) heating sections set on the top plate 15 and heated two or more times to complete cooking is not a coordinated cooking (mode). However, a form in which the food is moved to the heating chamber 113 midway through cooking to continue cooking (additional heating) is coordinated cooking.

(31) The input operation unit 40, through which the user gives commands to the integrated control device MC, may be either a form equipped with input keys that the user can touch from above the main body case HC, or a voice input form in which some input is performed by voice.

(32) The input operation unit 40, which the user directly touches to perform input operations, has specific input keys arranged thereon for selecting each of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM3.

(33) The input key 43MS for determining the selection of the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS for determining the selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key 43MS. However, the input keys (43L1, 43R1) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 are present only on the individual operation units 40L, 40R of the induction heating source 9.

(34) The input key 43MS that determines the start of the cooking process using the second heating means in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS that determines the start of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key.

(35) The input key 43MT that determines the end of the cooking process using the second heating means in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MT that determines the end of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key.

(36) The input key 43MT for deciding the end of the cooking process (end section) has a function of canceling the entire operation (i.e., all cooking processes) of the cooking mode being executed (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, the single cooking mode) when it is operated once or twice consecutively during the cooking process.
For example, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, if cooking step 1 is "microwave heating" and cooking step 2 is "induction heating," then in cooking step 1 (in the case of microwave heating), the input key 43MT is also used to stop heating. Therefore, in order to distinguish between stopping heating and canceling the entire cooking mode (all cooking steps), the input key 43MT is pressed to stop heating, and the input key 43MT is pressed once more to cancel.
In contrast, when cooking step 2 becomes "induction heating", stopping heating is input key 43L1 (or 43R1), so stopping heating can be distinguished from canceling the entire cooking mode (all cooking steps). Therefore, stopping heating is 43L1 (43R1), and canceling the cooking mode is 43MT (it is not necessary to press 43MT twice, but pressing it has no effect).
When cooking process 2 is "microwave heating", common operation unit 40M is used, so pressing input key 43MT once stops heating, and pressing it once more cancels the cooking mode (cancels everything).

(Upper unit 100)
In this embodiment 1, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking appliance 1. For this reason, a commercial (AC) power source 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100. However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for directly connecting to the commercial power source 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is drawn from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking appliance 1.

The upper unit 100 is composed of a box-shaped upper case (upper housing) 16 that forms the outer shell of the main body 10, a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 (see FIG. 12) fixed to the top of the upper case, and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass that is attached to the top surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover almost the entire upper surface except for the rear portion. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 is equipped with the upper case 16 and top plate 15 that form the outer shell.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates together by spot welding, screws, or the like, into a box shape.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is made by bending the peripheral portion of a single sheet of metal vertically, as described later, to integrally form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, and (left and right) side vertical walls 16L and 16R. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall", as described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in a different form. For example, a single metal plate is pressed to form a "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F. Separately, two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are formed separately. These two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are then attached to the ends of the "body" by screws, spot welding, or the like, to finally form a box shape with an open top surface.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape with a generally uniform overall thickness, and its entire underside is covered with a painted surface that is opaque to visible light. This means that the functional components below the top plate 15, such as the induction coil 17, cannot be seen from above the top plate 15.

The IH coil 17R on the right has a donut-shaped planar shape. The maximum heat output of this IH coil 17R is 3200 W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

The left IH coil 17L also has a doughnut shape. The maximum heating power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168mm. Note that the diameter may be enlarged to approximately 180mm so that it can accommodate heated objects N such as large pots and frying pans. Figure 11 shows a case where the diameter of the left IH coil 17L is larger than that of the right IH coil 17R.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a long opening formed horizontally at the rear of the upper case 16, 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has shutters or multiple through holes to allow ventilation. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

In Figures 12 and 14, 22 is a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the upper rear end of the upper case 16, as described above. This reinforcing plate 22 has a length equal to the width of the rear edge of the upper case 16.

21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the top surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame protrudes to the rear of the upper case 16 and is longer than the width of the upper case 16. In other words, when viewed from above, it appears to surround the rear and both left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 (see Figure 11).

In Figures 11, 12 and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. This decorative frame 25 is installed to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from external impacts.

26 is a ring-shaped cushioning material made of a highly elastic material, such as silicone rubber, which is attached to the entire underside of the decorative frames 21, 25. This allows the upper unit 100 to be placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via this cushioning material 26. Note that a single decorative frame 25 may be designed to surround three portions (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15, or four portions (four surrounding sides) including the rear end face.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L, 30R)
11 and 19, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit. The integrated display unit 30 is disposed in the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the center portion on the left and right.
The left and right display sections 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right sides of the front portion of the top plate 15, respectively.

The right-side display unit 31R is a display unit corresponding to the right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R, and therefore may be referred to as the "first individual display unit."
Similarly, the left display unit 31L is a display unit corresponding to the left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L, and therefore may be referred to as a "second individual display unit."

The integrated display unit 30 is a display means used in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 described below. In other words, it is used during microwave cooking and oven cooking.

In this integrated display section 30, the first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 60) used in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 55) and the third specific screen 30ST (see FIG. 54) used in the combined cooking mode KM2 are alternatively displayed. The initial standby screen (see FIG. 52) is also displayed. The initial standby screen (see FIG. 52) and the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, 30ST are not displayed simultaneously.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of liquid crystal display screens (not shown), and the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are installed on a horizontal operation board 41 that is installed long in the left-right direction.

The bottom surface of the top plate 15 does not have a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above, corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R can be seen from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display unit 30 displays common information and warnings for the cooking appliance 1. For example, it displays the selection result of the three types of heating sources for the cooking appliance 1, and caution and warning information showing the operating status of those heating sources. That is, the integrated display unit 30 is called the integrated display unit 30 because it may display information related to the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189.

The integrated display unit 30 also has the function of displaying the names of various cooking methods corresponding to the linked cooking mode KM3 described below, as well as their control conditions, etc.

Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 also has the function of displaying "inventory information" for the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display section 31R/left side display section 31L)
The left display unit 31L displays information related to the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as described below, when setting timer cooking, the time can be set in one-minute increments and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time since the start of heating and the "remaining time" until the timer setting ends. Furthermore, when preheat cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default The display will show the temperature, current temperature, etc. Note that the "remaining time" will be displayed as 9 minutes 59 seconds when there are less than 10 minutes remaining, and the remaining time will be displayed in 1-second increments. .

Similarly, the right display unit 31R displays information related to the operation of the right-side IH coil 17R. This right display unit 31R basically displays information related to various control conditions such as the timer setting time, preheating temperature, and elapsed time for the right-side IH coil 17R, just like the left display unit 31L.

(Input Operation Unit 40)
19, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section. This input operation section 40 is disposed in a horizontally long strip shape along the front edge of the top plate 15.
The input operation unit 40 is disposed on the upper surface of an operation board 41 which is elongated horizontally and disposed in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation properties. Behind the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100 is a central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50. The integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32.

A flat auxiliary support plate (not shown) is installed below the operation board 41, facing the operation board 41 with a gap between them. In other words, it has a two-layer (two sheets) structure with a gap between them, allowing as many electrical components and circuits as possible to be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air flows from the second cooling fan 61 described later, and is formed by the space between the cover 70 described later and the front vertical wall 16F located in front of the upper case 16 (see Figures 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. The lower case 101 and the upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated at multiple locations by screws 51.

As is clear from Figure 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing parts are fastened and fixed by the screws 51. In addition to the screws 51, screws 51F (not shown) are also provided to fasten the facing parts of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are joined at multiple points.

16BX is a horizontal bend formed by bending the upper end of the rear vertical wall 16B further rearward BK. This horizontal bend 16BX and the flange 16A (see Figure 14) described below are positioned on the same horizontal line.

Because of the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bend 16BX may work together to function as a part that firmly supports such loads. In other words, the flange 16A, which is made by bending a metal plate in a series to increase its mechanical strength, and the horizontal bend 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, a structure is realized in which the lower case 101 is also reliably supported. Note that in this embodiment 1, the horizontal bend 16BX does not directly contact the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2, as shown in FIG. 12.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity that is large in both depth and area. This cavity 104 is the space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical direction) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, this embodiment 1 has a flat upper case 16 (forming the outer shell of the main body 10) whose upper opening is closed by the top plate 15. When this upper case 16 is placed on the lower case 101 (described below), the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104 , a waveguide 123 constituting a part of a microwave heating device 120 (described later) is disposed long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113 .
Further, behind the waveguide 123, a case C154 for accommodating a power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted is disposed elongated in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 stored inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in this embodiment 1 they are integrated to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. This front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

198 is a connecting support bracket made of a metal plate and has a horizontal part 198H and a vertical part 198V. The horizontal part 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped and made of thin metal plates, and by fastening the screws 51, 51F (not shown), the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 become a single, sturdy box-shaped structure.

In this embodiment 1, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are fitted together in a tight fit as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the top opening of the lower case 101 are designed to be the same as the maximum width dimension D5 (not shown) in the front-rear direction and the maximum width dimension W4 (not shown) in the left-right direction of the upper case 16. Alternatively, they are only 0.2 mm larger (at most) than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the top opening of the lower case 101.

When a small force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L, 101R or the rear wall (rear vertical wall) 101B, the top opening of the lower case 101 widens slightly, allowing the upper case 16 to fit tightly (snugly) inside it.

In this embodiment 1, "fitting" does not necessarily mean a tight fit as in the above embodiment 1. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 that is inserted inside may differ by up to about 1 mm from the inner dimensions (front-to-back and left-to-right directions) of the lower case 101 that is the outside, and they do not have to be tightly attached as a whole. Even if there is such a slight difference in dimensions, it is possible to fix them with screws 51, etc., to create a strong main body case HC.

The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a single, sturdy box-shaped structure, which allows for a sturdy support structure for the door 114 (described below), which is beneficial in preventing microwave leakage between the door 114 and the periphery of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In particular, the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported on the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and bears the entire load of the lower unit 200, so it is important that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are constructed so that they do not warp or deform as a whole. Note that since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire bottom surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually comes into contact with the top surface of the lower kitchen unit 2.

In FIG. 12 , reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board, which is disposed horizontally in the center of the upper case 16 .
The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape that is long in the left-right direction. The inverter circuit board 80 has a length W16 of 316 mm and a length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction of 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40 and the range of the integrated display unit 30, right display unit 31R, and left display unit 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the underside of the holder 50 so as to overlap it with a small gap.

(Inverter circuit board cooling structure)
Next, reference will be made to FIG. 25 to FIG.
Fig. 25 is a simplified horizontal cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in Fig. 24. Fig. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in Fig. 25. Fig. 28 is a simplified perspective view explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the air outlet of the first cooling fan 60 and the inverter circuit board 80.

When creating a circuit with various electronic components, this type of inverter circuit board 80 is formed by fixing components such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors to an insulating substrate, and wiring between these components with copper foil. Because this is a complex and detailed process, it is currently mass-produced by mounting using automatic loading machines. For this reason, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the board, and even when used in this type of heating cooker, the basic shape of the circuit board is square or rectangular. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space inside the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise a way to avoid interference and overlap with surrounding components. Furthermore, if the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board 80 inevitably becomes larger.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 is composed of an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L, and an inverter circuit 81R that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. These will be described later with reference to Figures 29, 30, and 33.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (heat dissipation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sinks 82 are as shown in Figures 12, 15, and 26. That is, the heat sinks 82 are arranged in two rows with two heat dissipation fins 82FN facing each other, and are installed close to each other by a few mm to about 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed when the heat dissipation fins 82FN of two heat sinks 82 face each other. The size (front-to-back width) of this gap GP2 is the same across the entire left-to-right direction of the two front-to-rear rows of heat sinks 82. For example, it is 8 mm. To distinguish it from the (second) gap GP12 described below, this gap GP2 may be called the "first gap."

As can be seen from Figures 12 and 26, the heat sink (heat dissipation sink) 82 has power control switching elements 83 that form part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R attached to the inclined surfaces on the opposing sides. Therefore, the heat generated during operation of the switching elements 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 that passes around the heat dissipation fins 82FN.

The power control switching elements 83 are, for example, IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors). The power control switching elements 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side are attached to the rear side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two rows, front and rear.
The power control switching elements 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side are attached to the front side of the heat sink 82 which has two rows, front and rear. It is to be noted that they may be attached to the opposite side.

In Figures 12 and 26, 70 is a cover that is integrally formed from a thin metal plate or plastic material and covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. Both left and right ends of this cover 70 are open, and as shown in Figure 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 forms the inlet FI for the cooling airs RF1 and RF2 described below, and the right end surface of the cover 70 forms the outlet FO for the cooling airs RF1 and RF2.

The cover 70 is positioned so that a certain gap GP11 is maintained between it and the underside of the coil base 17C that supports the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). The gap GP11 is approximately 1 mm to a maximum of several mm in linear distance.

In this embodiment 1, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. This ensures a space of at least 5 mm between the bottom surfaces of the IH coils 17L, 17R and the top surface of the cover 70. This space reduces the magnetic effect of the IH coils 17L, 17R on the cover 70, and also has the effect of making it easier for cooling air to flow between the cover 70 and the bottom surfaces of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

The cover 70 is sized to ensure a certain gap GP12 with the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In this embodiment 1, GP12 is 20 mm.
To distinguish it from the (first) gap GP2, this gap GP12 may be referred to as a "second gap."

In Fig. 26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 based on the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16, and is 28 mm. H7 is the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, and is 31 mm. Note that 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shielding sheet (such as a thin aluminum plate) may be placed between the upper surface of this support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is the linear distance from the bottom surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In this embodiment 1, this height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described in Figures 16 and 17 is 40 mm. This height dimension H10 does not match the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A, etc.

Since the cover 70 is located directly below the IH coil 17L and is in close proximity to it, if you want the cover 70 to have a magnetic shielding effect, it is best to make the cover 70 out of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. If the cover 70 is made of iron or magnetic stainless steel, there is a concern that the cover 70 will heat up due to leakage magnetic flux and rise in temperature. Therefore, in this case, it is best to cover the top surface of the cover 70 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, you can use measures such as stacking aluminum sheets or attaching aluminum tape.

If the cover 70 is made of metal, it is even better to electrically connect it to the upper case 16. For example, the metal screws (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 can reach directly into the screw holes in the cover 70.

The upper case 16 is connected to the lower case 101 (described later) with metal screws or the like, and is also electrically connected to an earth terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, so that noise is absorbed by the earth. In this way, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for the various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

In addition, if the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. This has the advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can also be adjusted. For example, a ribbed air direction plate or the like can be integrally formed on the underside of the cover 70 so that more cooling air RF1 flows toward a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all the heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
A gap GP12 of about 20 mm is secured between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70, and the height of this gap GP12 also becomes the height of the first air passage F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is approximately 13 mm. A continuous hanging wall 70B is formed downward from both the front and rear edges of the cover 70.

The distance between the pair of hanging walls 70B at the front and rear, i.e., the dimension W9 of the space in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 26), is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B abuts against the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a small gap between the two, it does not interfere with the cooling air guiding effect.

In FIG. 26, GP16 is a gap formed between the top surface of the heat dissipation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. This gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12, GP16 formed inside the cover 70 and the heat dissipation fins 82FN.
26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm, and W9 is the distance between the opposing hanging walls 70B (the dimension of the space in the front-rear direction), which is 205 mm.

Next, referring back to FIG.
W10 indicates the distance from the right end face of the cover 70, i.e., the end face on the outlet side, to the lateral vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is disposed in this space.

25, 70A is a front cutout formed on the left edge, i.e., the inlet end, of the cover 70. This front cutout 70A is for guiding a part of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside just before the cover 70.
A plurality of front cutout portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP14 indicates the gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end face of the cover 70. This gap GP14 is approximately 40 mm. Note that a gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end face of the cover 70. In FIG. 25, this gap GP15 is very small, so it is not shown.

In Figures 25 and 27, XB indicates the point where the "blowout line" FL1 (see Figure 27), which passes through the center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 60A, intersects with the partition wall 11.

The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is inclined at a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. Note that the air outlet 60A may be inclined with respect to a straight line that crosses the partition wall 11 (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27) instead of the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction.

XF indicates the point (intersection) where the "blowout line" FL2, which passes through the center point of the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 61A, intersects with the partition wall 11. These intersections XB and XF will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27. Note that the blowout line FL1 and the blowout line FL2 are imaginary straight lines provided for the convenience of explaining this embodiment 1, and the cooling air does not actually flow along these blowout lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined at a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation distance W14 between the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

27, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are spaced apart by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is approximately 110 mm.
The air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are spaced apart by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2, which is approximately 100 mm.

With the above-described configuration, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is directed toward the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B from behind the straight line (reference line) BL that passes through the center of the gap GP2.
The air outlet 60A is inclined (at an angle θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

Conversely, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined (at an angle θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction across the straight line (reference line) BL.
The magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is "θ1>θ2", but they may be equal.

As can be seen in FIG. 27, in this embodiment 1, the two intersections XB and XF are not in the same position. They change depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and the direction of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sinks 82 include 82F1 and 82F2 as heat sinks 82F on the front FR side. The heat sinks 82B include 82B1 and 82B2 as heat sinks 82B on the rear BK side. When viewed from the front side of the cooking appliance 1, of the two rows of heat sinks 82, the one on the front left side is sometimes called the "first front heat sink" 82F1, and the one installed a little further away on the front right side is sometimes called the "second front heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, of the two rows of heat sinks 82, the one on the rear left side is sometimes called the "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the one installed a short distance away on the rear right side is sometimes called the "rear second heat sink" 82B2.

Returning to the explanation of FIG.
Reference numeral 11 denotes a partition wall that is integrally formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. When the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, it can be formed integrally as described above, but a plate-like member separate from the cover 70 may also be used, in which case it will be referred to as the partition member 11. Hereinafter, for ease of explanation, it will be referred to as the "partition wall" 11 collectively.

The front and back surfaces (rear surface) of this partition wall 11 are flat over its entire length from the right end to the left end. This is to minimize the airflow resistance of the cooling airflows RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first airflow path F1. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.0 mm.

It is desirable to form the partition wall 11 from a material with high electrical insulation properties (e.g., a plastic material). Note that the partition wall 11 is not shown in Figures 12, 13, and 15.

24 and 25, D6 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between a partition plate 52 (described later) and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction behind the partition plate 52 .

In Figures 24 and 25, D7 is the distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52 (described later), and is the dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see Figures 13 and 24). W8 is the maximum left-right dimension (width) that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17R are supported from below by a part called the coil base 17C (see Figure 12), which is made of heat-resistant plastic. The coil base 17C may be provided for each of the two IH coils 17L and 17R, or may be formed as a single structure common to both IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C is placed directly on the top surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with fasteners such as screws. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the coil base 17C and the top surface of the cover 70, and the coil base 17C is supported in a manner that it is constantly pushed up toward the top plate 15. A detailed explanation of these support structures is omitted. In any case, the distance (opposition) between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the rear surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change over a long period of time. The coil base 17C has multiple large communication holes (not shown) formed in it to allow air to easily pass through in the vertical direction throughout the coil base.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L, 17R does not change during induction heating cooking. As a result, it is possible to suppress changes in the high-frequency voltage and high-frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L, 81R that supply high-frequency current to the IH coils 17L, 17R, and it is possible to stabilize the induction heating performance.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above a horizontal plane (hereinafter referred to as the "first horizontal plane HP1") that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, they exist on a second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is positioned below the IH coils 17L and 17R and is not in contact with either the coil base 17C or the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 that is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. A first air passage F1 that is long in the left-right direction is defined and formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in Figures 24 and 25. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material, such as heat-resistant plastic.

In Figures 12 and 15, 102 is a metallic exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. The outlet end 102E of this exhaust duct 102 passes through a gap GP1 formed between a partition plate 52 (described later) and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see Figure 13). In other words, the exhaust duct 102 passes vertically through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 15, TS10 is a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor, which measures the temperature of the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 and the ambient temperature around it.
The temperature sensor TS10 is installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat-sensing portion is exposed to the inside of the exhaust duct 102.
The temperature sensor TS10 is preferably installed near the rear surface of the heating chamber 113, and is therefore located near a communication port 174 formed at the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113.

The temperature sensor TS10 constantly measures the temperature not only when cooking with the oven heating source 188 driven, but also when cooking with the microwave heating source 189 (e.g., thawing frozen food) (in the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later). The temperature detection data of this temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control unit 159 (see FIG. 30).

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 16A denotes a horizontal flange formed by bending the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L, 16R of the upper case 16 outward at a right angle in a continuous manner.
Reference numeral 101A denotes a horizontal flange formed by bending outward at a right angle continuously from the upper end portions of side vertical walls 101L and 101R of a lower case 101, which will be described later.

The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are arranged such that the flange 16A overlaps the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall of the upper case 16 and the side wall of the lower case 101 are fixed with the screws 51 (see FIG. 12) described above. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed into a strong integrated structure by the fixation with the screws 51 and the tight fixation of the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is supported by the top surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed from thin metal plates, they can be made into a box-shaped structure with sufficient mechanical strength when integrated.

The means for fixing the flanges 16A and 101A in an overlapping state may not be the screws 51, but may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts. The flanges 16A and 101A do not come into contact with the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2. These flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), so there is a concern that they may damage the kitchen furniture 2. Furthermore, if the flanges 16A and 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushioning material 26 cannot be installed in a compressed state. If the cushioning material 26 is not in a tight contact state, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the intrusion of water, etc. will be lost.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the cooking appliance 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, reference numeral 311 denotes a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm.

In FIG. 14, 301R denotes a right gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
Reference numeral 301L denotes a left gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

In Figures 13 and 15, 302 is a front gap formed between the bottom surface of the door 114 or the bottom surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed, and is approximately 10 mm in size. Note that the position of the bottom surface of the front cover 112 is also aligned with the position of the bottom surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, so that a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is also secured below the front cover 112.

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is open or closed, but as shown in FIG. 12, it is sufficient that the size (e.g., about 5 mm to 10 mm) is ensured so that outside air can be sucked in when the door 114 is closed. Note that in the explanation of the cooking device 1, "outside air" refers to the air that is present outside the cooking device 1, and does not refer to the air outdoors of the house HA shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in Figures 12 to 15 and Figure 18, the lower gap 311, right gap 301R, left gap 301L, and front gap 302 are interconnected. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 starts operating and outside air is drawn in from the front gap 302, the drawn outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, right gap 301R, and left gap 301L. Note that the gap 303 described in Figure 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311, right gap 301R, left gap 301L, and front gap 302.

Next, referring back to FIG.
W3 is the maximum width dimension at the front portion of the cooking appliance 1. This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm.

303 is a gap formed between the inner surface (right side surface) of the right wall material on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This gap is provided to prevent the cooking appliance 1 from colliding with the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed. The size of the gap may be about 1 to 2 mm.

The left front cover 112 also has a gap similar to the gap 303 between it and the inner surface (left side surface) of the left wall material that exists on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. Note that the size of the gap 303 on the left and right may differ slightly depending on the installation of the cooking appliance 1. Also, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, an elastic sealing material (cushion material) may be placed on the step portion 2G (see Figure 10), and the kitchen furniture 2 may be installed in a state where the gap 303 is almost completely blocked, but even in such a state, there is no problem with the internal cooling function of the cooking appliance 1.

The front cover 112 extends outward beyond the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L as shown in FIG. 18. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 is installed, the front sides of the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are covered by the two front covers 112 on the left and right.

Since the front sides of the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user does not get the impression that there is a large gap between the cooking appliance 1 and the kitchen furniture 2.

When the cooking appliance 1 is installed, the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are secured, so that outside air can be reliably introduced into the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

In Figure 18, WS is the width dimension of the door 114 facing the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary to prevent microwave leakage by tightly fitting the door 114 and the lower case 101, and also to form choke chambers 194 (described later) at the front, rear, left and right positions of the opening 113A (see Figure 11).

(First cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61)
24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the side vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16. Rotating shafts 60T (not shown) at the centers of the rotors (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extend in the vertical (perpendicular) direction, and the rotors rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are centrifugal fans (blowers). This is because it takes into consideration the high static pressure and the large ventilation resistance in a space with a high mounting density. Generally, there are centrifugal fans of the type that have a single intake port and blow (discharge) in the full radial direction. However, the fan in this embodiment 1 is a type that blows in only one direction.

In FIG. 24, 60A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool the IH coil installation space CK inside the upper space 300A described below. Therefore, these two cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as the "upper cooling fans."

The air outlets 60A, 61A are directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the two air outlets 60A, 61A are both located above a common first horizontal plane (HP1) and directed to the right. Note that the "first horizontal plane" HP1 in this embodiment 1 refers to a plane that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, as described above.

The first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 have exactly the same structure, shape, and "rated specifications," and are assumed to operate at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. However, in this embodiment 1, the IH control unit 90 varies the rotation speed to change the amount of air blown. For example, the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R may be increased to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than normal, the rotation speed may be increased to increase the amount of air blown in order to improve the cooling effect. In addition, the first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds as a measure against "whining noise" to be described later.

The rated specifications are, for example, rated voltage, operating voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, etc. By changing the applied voltage or the voltage application time (ON DUTY time) within the operating voltage range, the rotation speed can be changed.
In contrast to this, the present embodiment 1 employs a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control method, which changes the duty cycle of the pulse width (ratio of H and L pulse widths) according to the magnitude of the input signal (DC level) to control the motor of the first cooling fan 60. This PWM control is also employed for the second cooling fan 61.

The first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 are configured with fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotors (not shown), and a circular intake port (not shown) is provided on the underside of the fan case.

Directly below the intake ports (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, there is a vent hole 64 (see Figures 14 and 16) consisting of multiple round or elliptical holes. This vent hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. This vent hole 64 is connected to a vent hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from outside the lower case 101 through the vent hole 164.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (intake duct) that is provided to directly connect the vent 64 to the vent 164 of the lower case 101. This recess 165 is recessed from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. This dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, the vertical center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the vertical center point of the electrical component 85 mounted on the top surface of the power supply circuit board 55 (described later) are all located on a single horizontal line HL1. In other words, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is positioned so that it reaches the heat sink 82 and the electrical component 85 when it travels straight to the right. The horizontal plane determined by this horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from a commercial AC power source 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54, which will be described later. Then, AC is converted to DC in this power supply circuit board 55. For this reason, electrical components 85 such as a diode for converting AC to DC and a transformer 57 (not shown) are mounted on the power supply circuit board 55.

If the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction heating cooking reduces the amount of heat from the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time by the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see Figure 24), such as thermistors, fixed in close contact with the surface of the heat sink 82.

If the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are made to have exactly the same structure, shape, and rated specifications, procurement costs during manufacturing can be reduced.
When cooling fans of the same specifications are arranged in parallel and operated, there is a high possibility that a humming noise will occur. For this reason, in this embodiment 1, as a measure against the humming noise, the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to be different values within a range where the humming noise is likely to occur. In other words, they are not always operated at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, 52 is a metal partition plate that is installed horizontally at the rear of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16. This partition plate 52 is a vertically extending wall that divides the internal space of the upper case 16 into front and rear. Note that "dividing" does not mean a strict shielding that completely blocks air flow. It is sufficient to be able to prevent the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 from flowing rearward beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52 to some extent.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, is the air passage within the upper unit 100, extending from the vent hole 64 to the partition plate 52. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH, but is structured to be substantially connected to the outside of the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 52A denotes an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, and 52B denotes an exhaust window formed in the right half of the partition plate 52.
Reference numeral 53L denotes an exhaust port plate (on the left side) that is installed to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and has a number of through holes 53L1 formed therein to allow cooling air to pass through toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52.

53R is an exhaust port plate (on the right side) that is installed to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52B, and has a number of through holes 53R1 formed therein, allowing cooling air to pass through toward the exhaust window 52B of the partition plate 52. The cooling air that passes through these exhaust windows 52A and 52B is released into the space outside the cooking appliance 1 via the exhaust cover 19.

In Fig. 24, LF is an exhaust port dimension indicating the range (width dimension) to the left of the partition plate 12 described later for exhaust gas exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R. This exhaust port dimension is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53L1 and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53L1 (the form shown in Fig. 24), the exhaust range LF (on the left side) is determined by the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A.
The width dimension of the right exhaust window 52B and the range in which the through hole 53R1 is formed are equal to each other.

In FIG. 24, 54 is a filter circuit board located in the right corner of the rear of the upper case 16. This filter circuit board removes noise from the power supply from the commercial power source 99 and supplies it to the output terminal side, and conversely prevents noise from flowing (backflowing) to the commercial (AC) power supply at the input terminal side, and is equipped with electrical components (not shown) such as resistors, inductors (choke coils), line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of the power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to this filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 across the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the power supply circuit board 55 is located to the right of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, and is therefore cooled by the cooling air immediately after it leaves the first air passage F1.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction. CL2 is a center line that passes through the rotation centers of the rotor blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from Fig. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned in a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 indicates the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown out from the second cooling fan 61.

RF3 indicates the cooling air after it leaves the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. RF4 indicates the cooling air after it passes through the second air passage F2. Note that the cooling air RF3 after it leaves the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after it passes through the second air passage F2 partially merge along the way. In other words, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 merge before they reach the through holes 53L1 and 53R1 of the exhaust port plates 53L and 53R.

In FIG. 24, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of this gap GP1 in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 30 mm to 50 mm.

In Figures 24 and 25, 12 is a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. 13 is also a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52.

The partition plate 12 divides the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 into two spaces, left and right. On the left side of this partition plate 12, an exhaust duct 102 is vertically positioned from below. Also, on the right side of this partition plate 13, the terminal end (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) that exhausts air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be located. However, in this embodiment 1, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not located.

In Figures 24 and 25, 14 is a vertically installed plate-like or rib-shaped (protruding) partition wall. This partition wall 14 is formed integrally with or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) that is installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown) is made of an electrically insulating plastic material like the support plate 71 .
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it contacts the lower surface of the top plate 15. In other words, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely divided into two, left and right, by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 25, a portion of the cooling air RF4 that is guided mainly through the first air passage F1 to the right side of the cover 70 is divided by the partition wall 14 into two cooling air flows RF4L and RF4L, and is guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, a portion of the cooling air RF4 that is guided mainly via the first air passage F1 to the right side of the cover 70 can be divided into two cooling air flows RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14 and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling airflows RF4L, RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R through the exhaust windows 52A, 52B.
24 and 25, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two cooling airs are to be collectively referred to, the reference symbol RF4 is used in the following description.

(Detailed configuration of input operation unit 40)
19 and 20, the main parts of the input operation unit 40 will be described.
In Figures 19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, in which various input keys (touch-type keys) that enable input by utilizing a change in electrostatic capacitance when the user lightly touches the keys with a finger or the like, as described below, are arranged in a horizontal line.

The input operation unit 40 includes three parts: a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M, and a left operation unit 40L. 98 is an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 that can supply and cut off the commercial power supply 99 described below. This operation button or operation key 98 is located adjacent to the right end of the right operation unit 40R. The following explanation will be given on the assumption that this operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

As described above, the right operation unit 40R is sometimes called an "individual operation unit" because it performs input operations only for the induction heating source 9. Similarly, the left operation unit 40L is sometimes called an "individual operation unit."
In contrast, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "shared operation unit" because it is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperative operation unit" 40M for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later. These will be described in detail in FIG. 21.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in Figures 24 and 25. The commercial power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power supply circuit section of the lower unit 200 (not shown in Figure 25).

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, a total of five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4, and 44R are arranged on the right operation unit 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, and 44R are assigned one or more input functions, as described below.

43R1 is an input key that selects heating with the right heating unit 17HR. It can also stop the operation of the right-side IH coil 17R that has started the heating operation. Therefore, when pressed once the first time, it performs the function of selecting the right heating unit 17HR, and when pressed once again, it has the function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, each time this input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, automatically switches.

The input key 43R1 may be referred to as a third selection means. That is, the left input key 43L1 and the right input key 43R1, which will be described later, are means for selecting a "single (heating) cooking" mode that uses either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and for issuing a command to start the heating operation.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys for designating the heating power (power consumption) during induction heating.
Of the two input keys 43R2, when the left input key 43R2 is touched, the heat is reduced by one level each time it is operated. For example, when the heat is 3200 W (rated maximum heat: heat level 9), touching this input key 43R2 once reduces the heat to 2500 W (heat level: 8).

When the right input key 42R3 is touched, the heat level is increased by one step each time. For example, if the heat level is 2500W (heat level 8), touching this input key 42R3 once selects 3200W (maximum rated heat level: heat level 9).

43R4 is an input key for selecting the timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method in which the user sets the cooking time and induction heating operation is performed only for the set time. For example, if 10 minutes is specified and timer cooking is started, a specified display will be displayed on the right display unit 31R when 10 minutes have elapsed, and the voice synthesizer 95, described later, will also automatically notify the user by voice that cooking is complete. Induction heating will automatically stop when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time has elapsed.

In this embodiment 1, the display units such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R, and the voice synthesis device 95 may be collectively referred to as the "alert unit" AN.

44R is a touch-type input key for selecting the "control menu" of induction heating cooking, and each time it is touched, one of multiple control menus can be selected. In this induction heating cooking, a "control menu" is a control mode of the induction heating source 9, in other words, a type of control, such as "boiling water," "boiling," "deep-frying (automatic cooking)," etc., as shown in FIG. 38. In other words, "boiling water," "stewing," "deep-frying," etc. are individual control menus. In addition, control conditions related to one control menu include, for example, the drive time (of the IH coil 17R) and the heat value. Even if the control menu is the same, the control conditions are not necessarily the same.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the names of the final food items or ingredients obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger steak" and "tempura" are names of food items and are not "control menus" as used here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a general expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc., until the cooking is completed.
The control menu for the induction heating source 9 may be referred to as an "IH control menu" to distinguish it from control menus for other heating sources.

Next, the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to Figures 20 and 23. The left operation unit 40L has a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. After the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L has started, the operation can be stopped at any time. In other words, when the key is pressed once at the beginning, the function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL is exhibited, and when the key is pressed once again after induction heating has started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.
The input key 43L1 may be called a third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys that specify the heating power (power consumption) of the left heating unit 17HL, similar to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R. As with the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time they are touched, a specific heating power level one step higher or one step lower can be selected from the data table of specified heating power values.

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. This input key 43L4 can specify the induction heating cooking time, similar to the input key 43R4 on the right operation unit 40R. Furthermore, when timer cooking ends, the end of timer cooking is displayed on the left display unit 31L, similar to the input key 43R4, and is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. As with the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R, one control menu can be selected from multiple "control menus." Note that the control menu that can be selected with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the right input key 44R.

The five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L arranged on the left operation section 40L are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction, as is clear from Figures 20 and 23.

20 and 21, a total of ten touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation section 40M, and one or more input functions are assigned to these input keys.
The ten touch input keys will be described below.

The input key 43KP on the far left allows the user to set the various operations and displays of the entire cooking device 1 as desired.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, switches to a "function mode" and displays a "function setting menu" such as the one shown below on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Setting the ventilation fan interlocking mode (3) Setting the cleaning guide (setting the automatic notification function for when to clean the heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption can be selected from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W)
(5) Audio settings for audio guidance (6) Volume settings for audio guidance (7) Settings to prevent forgetting to remove food, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (whether or not an alarm is required on the voice synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limiting function of the home power control device)
(9) Setting the time unit for timer cooking (changing the 1-minute setting to 5-minute or 30-minute units); (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (experienced) mode; (11) Setting the type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 401; (12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu, identification information 330 to be displayed as the default) of each cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3; (13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as the default) of each control menu (e.g., "range grill", "pre-boil leafy vegetables") in the composite cooking mode KM2; (14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON (display priority between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2, etc.).

The beginner mode is an optional function for people (users) who are not familiar with using the cooking appliance 1. When the beginner mode is set, the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer 95 becomes more detailed and clear. In addition, the number of voice guidance regarding input operations in the input operation unit 40 increases, and the amount of display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the amount of reference information (including additional information 331, described later) displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases in cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, or the content of the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer 95 increases. This enhances the function of supporting the user's input operations.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the cooking mode that is automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is set to either the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2. Since both the linked cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2 use the same integrated display unit 30, the user can set the display of either one to take priority. This will be explained in more detail later.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened.
This function assumes that the user will be cooking using the heating chamber 113, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 30SP for the linked cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30.
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B: FIG. 46) described later is displayed.

After the "Function Setting Menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, by "long pressing" (hereinafter referred to as "long press") one specific input key other than the input key 43KP on the central operation unit 40M, one setting menu from the "Function Setting Menu" can be selected, and the desired setting contents can be subsequently changed.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are pressed and held simultaneously, one of the setting menus in the "function setting menu" described above can be called up and the desired setting can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The integrated control device MC judges whether or not the state is a "long press" by comparing the timing of the touch input in the input operation unit 40 with a reference value. That is, the timing when the input keys (e.g., 43M1 and 43M2) in the central operation unit 40M are pressed simultaneously can be determined by the ON (when touched)-OFF (when not touched) signal transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC measures the time from the ON signal to the point when it changes to the OFF signal to judge whether or not it is a "long press."

The type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 401 may be, for example, limited to only frozen foods or to only food ingredients that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189.

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode," and then operating the touch-type input keys 43M1 to 43M3 (described later) located on the central operation unit 40M, the 14 individual functions defined in the "function setting menu" of the cooking appliance 1 can be individually changed.

When the control mode or control conditions (temperature, heat, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 or oven heating source 188 are being selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input function of the input key 43KP is disabled so that the function mode is not switched. Therefore, the light-emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting of the control mode or control conditions (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking appliance 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the user's home. In this way, the functions of the cooking appliance 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes and the usage environment (power situation of the home where it is installed). When such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72, and is used to determine whether or not to allow the use of the linked cooking mode KM3 when the user selects the linked cooking mode KM3, as described below.

As shown in Fig. 21, the range of the central operation unit 40M includes a range called a shared operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 that is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by a dashed line in Fig. 21.
On the other hand, the area of the central operation section 40M excluding the input keys 43KP is a cooperative operation section 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later.

In the following description, the "RG operation unit" 40M2 may be referred to as the "second operation unit" 40M2 because it also serves as the input operation unit for the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means).

Reference numeral 43MC denotes an input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is disposed at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and is made up of a touch key.
This input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light-emitting diode (LED) or the like, so that the user can easily see the words "cooperative cooking" and the figure that indicates it. However, the input key 43MC is only illuminated and visible during the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, after all cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops emitting light, indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not active.
The input key 43MC may be called a "first input key."

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. A combined cooking mode KM2 that uses both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. In other words, this input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "combined cooking mode" KM2. Note that when input key 43M1 is operated, cooking can also be performed using only microwave heating or oven heating by executing the "combined cooking mode" KM2, as described below.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This will be described later with reference to Figures 55 to 59.

When the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. In other words, the display screen is switched to a configuration that displays the first specific screen 30SP. This will be described later with reference to Figs. 60 and 81 to 108.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single LCD display screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in Figure 21, it is divided into a maximum of three display areas 30L, 30M, and 30R by the display unit drive circuit 63.

Of the three display areas, display area 30L located on the left side will hereafter be referred to as the "first area." Display area 30M located in the center will hereafter be referred to as the "second area." Display area 30R located on the right side will hereafter be referred to as the "third area." Note that methods of dividing a single display screen into multiple areas in this way have been proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-172940, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

43M1 is a pair of input keys on the left and right for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display unit drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, we will explain the state in which the input key 43M1 is operated and individual names indicating "combined cooking mode" KM2 and "single cooking mode" KM1 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side, when the left input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward and the display screen switches to an image in which the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center front to back. In other words, when the left input key 43M1 is operated once, one piece of desired display information (for example, a name that identifies "range grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) can be selected from a group of display information such as "control menu" (in the case of combined cooking mode KM2) and identification information of the food to be cooked (in the case of linked cooking mode KM3) stored in the integrated control device MC. Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, it only appears to move forward visually.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backwards, and the display screen switches so that different information is instead displayed in the center of the front and rear of the first display area. In other words, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information group" defined in the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information is reversed.

In this way, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the center of the first area 30L by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1.

43M2 is a pair of input keys that switch the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of these input keys 43M2, the display information in the second area 30M can be switched one by one in sequence, similar to the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys that switch the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of these input keys 43M3, the display information in the third area 30R can be switched one by one in sequence, similar to the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for assisting the user in inputting information for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When this input key 43M3 is touched in a specific situation, such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when guidance information 30P described below is displayed, "guidance information" 30P that serves as a reference for the user's operation is displayed in the third area 30R (see FIG. 55).

The display of the guidance information 30P will automatically disappear after a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the display screen will return to its previous state. Details of this operation will be explained later with reference to Figures 79 and 80.

43MS is a "start unit" that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is specifically a touch-type input key. It also doubles as an input key that can command a transition to combined cooking mode KM3. This input key 43MS may be called the "start input key" when specifically distinguishing it from other input keys.

Conversely, 43MT is an "end section" that can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations, and is specifically a touch-type input key. It also doubles as an input key that can issue a command to cancel the transition to the combined cooking mode KM3. This input key 43MT may be called the "end input key" when specifically distinguishing it from other input keys.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R do not always need to function as inputs.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L do not always need to have an input function. The same is true for the central operation unit 40M. To avoid unnecessary input, such as when the user touches an input key without realizing it, the integrated control device MC temporarily disables the input functions of the other input keys immediately after starting up the cooking device 1, and does not accept input, except for input keys that require input depending on the cooking condition input process and the progress of cooking.

To indicate that the input functions of the above-mentioned input keys are valid, light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided for each of the three operation units 40R, 40L, and 40M, as shown in Figures 20 to 23.

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, in the right operation unit 40R, the individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 are located immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. The input keys 43R2 and 43R3 form a pair, and therefore share one individual light-emitting unit 27R2.

The individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 each have one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R, and the display unit drive circuit 63 controls the individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 to turn on and off, or to change the color of the light they emit.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 immediately adjacent to and behind the input key 43R1 emits blue light. This indicates that the unit is in a state where it can accept operational input.

When a user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to indicate to the user that an operation has been accepted. This display control is performed by the display unit drive circuit 63 based on commands from the integrated control device MC. Note that instead of emitting light in one color, the light color may be changed, for example from blue to red, to indicate to the user that an operation has been accepted. This also applies to the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

Note that the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 adjacent to and immediately behind the input key 43R1 may not be illuminated before the input key 43R1 is operated, but may start illuminating when the operation is accepted and continue illuminating. Alternatively, the system may be such that only the fact that operational input is possible is indicated by illumination in advance (before operation) and that the operational input has been accepted is not indicated by illumination. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light flashes when operational input is possible and waiting for input, and changes to continuous illumination when operational input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in Figures 20 and 23, in the left operation unit 40L, individual light-emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 form a pair, they share one individual light-emitting unit 27L4.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, in the central operation unit 40M, individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch-type input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating begins, the input keys (43M1, 43M2, etc.) on the central operation unit 40M will no longer be able to input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT will remain valid.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu or the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started (in the heating chamber 113), pressing this input key (end section) 43MT once stops the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 corresponding to the heating chamber 113. Pressing it once again cancels the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at that point, and as described later, the occupied state of the left heating section 17HL used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is immediately released.
Therefore, after this release, input of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking can be started.

When cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode is being performed using the induction heating source 9, pressing the input key (end) 43MT twice in succession cancels the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3. In other words, cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 ends at that point, and the reservation for the next cooking step 2 is cancelled. Therefore, as described below, the state in which the microwave heating source 189 in the heating chamber 113 was occupied is immediately cancelled.

When the input key 43M1 or input key 43MC is operated to display the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the cooking process starts, all previous input settings are cancelled. Therefore, if you want to display the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3, you need to operate the input key 43MC again.

The individual light-emitting units 27M1-27M6 each have one or more light-emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M, and the individual light-emitting units 27M1-27M6 are controlled by the display unit drive circuit 63 (see FIG. 30) to light up or turn off in a unified light color. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light blinks when operation input is possible and waiting for input, and changes to continuous light when operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, a pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light-emitting unit 27M3. The two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 also share one individual light-emitting unit 27M4 and one individual light-emitting unit 27M5, since they also form a pair. In the following explanation, the reference symbol 27M is used to collectively refer to the individual light-emitting units in the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 22, an individual light-emitting unit 27R5 is also located directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97, which is located adjacent to the right end of the right operation unit 40R.

It is desirable to unify the light emission modes (continuous light emission, flashing, light color, etc.) of the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, 27M as described above across the three operation units in order to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstandings by the user. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the light emission modes of the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, 27M are unified across the right operation unit 40R, the left operation unit 40L, and the central operation unit 40M.

One method is to have the operating part of the input key itself emit light to indicate that the input function of each input key is active, but in that case, it is necessary to place the light-emitting part directly under the operating part of the input key and to manufacture the operating part from a light-transmitting material. There is also the issue of ensuring the sensitivity of the operating part of the input key, so there are many issues in terms of structure and cost.

Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided in adjacent positions, avoiding the operation of the input keys, as described above. "Adjacent" here means that, for example, the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display unit 27R are close to each other when viewed from the user's perspective, and the one-to-one relationship is instantly apparent, as in the case of the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display unit 27R. This does not include cases where the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display unit 27R are separated by a structure such as a wall that protrudes upward from the surface of the input key 43R1. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the linked cooking mode KM3, a structure is adopted in which it is illuminated from below.

In FIG. 20, heat level indicators 67L, 67R are provided at the rear of the right operating unit 40R and the left operating unit 40L to indicate the heat level during induction heating cooking.
These heat power indicators 67L, 67R indicate the heat power level of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine levels of heat power are indicated by light, ranging from the minimum rated heat power (heat power level 1: 150 W) to the maximum rated heat power (heat power level 9: 3200 W).

The flame power display units 67L, 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operating unit 40R and the left operating unit 40L. The color of the light emitted may be changed according to the magnitude of the flame power. In this embodiment 1, for example, the flame power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Heat level 1: 1 red light, remaining 8 blue light. (2) Heat level 2: 2 red light, remaining 7 blue light. In addition, at the left end of the heat indicators 67L, 67R, there is a keep warm indicator 67H that displays an LED by illuminating it when the appliance is operated in the “keep warm mode” (see “display screen 3A” in Figure 54) in which the heated object is heated with a heat level lower than the minimum heat level 1.

The left display unit 31L displays the heat level value of the left heating unit 17HL as a number between 1 and 9. A "1" is displayed when the minimum heat level is 1, and a "9" is displayed when the maximum heat level is 9. The heat display on the left display unit 31L matches the heat level displayed by the heat display unit 67L, and is displayed at the same time.

The right display unit 31R also displays the heat level value of the right heating unit 17HR as numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as those of the left display unit 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction. Moreover, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R, providing good operability and visibility. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R are also aligned in a straight line in the horizontal direction, providing a design that provides good overall operability and visibility from the perspective of a user standing in front of the cooking appliance 1 to operate it.

20 and 21, reference numeral 68 denotes a heat source display unit disposed behind the integrated display unit 30.
Since multiple heat sources are used with the central operation unit 40M, the heat source display unit 68 displays the heat source that is actually operating with the light of an LED.

The heating source display unit 68 is made up of three display units. The leftmost display unit 68L indicates that the microwave heating source 189 is in use, and the word "range" is displayed in letters near the front, making it easy to see that microwave heating is being used.

The central display 68M is a display that indicates when "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that it is easy to tell that grill cooking is being performed.

The rightmost display 68R is a display that indicates when "oven cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" involves monitoring the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 and reflecting (feeding back) it in the power control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be explained in more detail later.

20 and 21, reference numeral 69 denotes a high temperature display unit provided immediately behind the heat source display unit 68. This high temperature display unit 69 causes an LED light-emitting unit to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, thereby indicating that the part to be monitored for temperature is at a high temperature.
The integrated control device MC issues a command to display a high temperature based on temperature information from a temperature detection circuit 93 which receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors as described below, and a heating chamber control unit 159 .

The high temperature indicator 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display unit 69 has three temperature monitoring target parts, the left heating unit 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating unit 17HR, and displays the status of these temperature monitoring target parts individually. Therefore, for example, after induction heating cooking is performed using the left heating unit 17HL, the high temperature display unit 69 can notify the user that the area from the center to the left side of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL has become hot, and alert the user.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature display unit 69 displays a high temperature as much as possible, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking session is completed, for example, the IH control unit 90 continues to operate the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and uses outside air to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, i.e., the upper space 300A.

Returning to FIG.
Reference numeral 47 denotes a touch-type input key for issuing an Internet connection command to the integrated control device MC for wireless communication. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, a wireless connection is established with the home gateway 411, and information from the outside can be obtained via the home gateway 411.

46L and 46R are windows that transmit infrared signals, which act as command signals to start operation, to the ventilation device 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. An infrared transmitter 48 (see Figures 29 and 30) is installed below these windows. Note that in practice, these windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. Naturally, this sheet is made of a material that allows infrared signals to pass through.

When detailed inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is to be manually displayed temporarily on the integrated display unit 30 while cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM3 is being performed, the input key 47 can be pressed. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. In this case, the inventory information may be, for example, the name of the frozen food (e.g., "rice" or "gyoza") and the amount (one portion, weight 200g, etc.).

When cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM3 is being performed, the cooking appliance 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing, regardless of the operation of the input keys 47. This will be explained later with reference to Figures 109 and 110.

In FIG. 19, 49 is a wireless communication unit (communication module) that includes an antenna (not shown) and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown) that receives radio waves from the outside and transmits radio waves or infrared signals to the outside. This wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41, with a small gap between it and the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The reason for maintaining this gap is that there is a concern that if it gets too close to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16, the radio wave reception sensitivity will decrease.

When installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the top surface of the cooking device 1 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and exhaust air from the exhaust port end 102E of the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15) can also be released above the kitchen furniture 2.

(Control Means of Upper Unit 100)
Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
29 to 31, some components are omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown. Also, part of the configuration of the lower unit 200 is shown.

Figure 29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In Figure 31, only the main control means in Figure 29 are extracted, and the transmission and reception of control command signals, power supply relationships, etc. are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 30, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power source 99 via a power cord and power plug (not shown). 91 is a power circuit to which electrical energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 is a DC power conversion unit that converts AC power from the commercial power source into DC. This power circuit 91 is mounted on the power circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In Figures 29 and 30, MC is an integrated control device, and has the functions of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device that is mainly composed of a microcomputer. This integrated control device MC is supplied with a predetermined constant voltage current from the power supply circuit 91.

As described above, the integrated control device MC is located on the underside of the central operation board 32 (shown in a dashed frame in Figures 24 and 25). However, it may also be located on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built into the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input section, an output section, a memory section, and a CPU (arithmetic control section), and the power control program for the three heating sources is pre-stored in the memory section. In addition to the memory section (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, it also has a built-in large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM that records abnormality monitoring information. The power control program for the three heating sources may be stored in this storage device MM.

90 is an IH control unit that is responsible for control during induction heating, and is composed mainly of a microcomputer. This IH control unit 90 pre-stores (stores) current control programs that correspond to various control menus during induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device (not shown) that records abnormality monitoring information.

Some of the functions of the IH control unit 90 may be handled by a second IH control unit 90A (not shown) that is provided separately. For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80, and the microcomputer may be responsible for input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all cooking operations, including induction cooking and microwave cooking, the integrated control device MC centrally monitors for electrical abnormalities.

In FIG. 30, 96 is a clock circuit also known as a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power source (built-in battery) BT1 separate from the power circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is designed to operate over a long period of time. This may be, for example, a radio-controlled clock, which will always notify the current date and the exact time down to the second when requested by the integrated control device MC, and is set to the correct date and time during the manufacturing process of this cooking appliance 1.

Even if the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and the clock circuit 96 has the function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and stored with the correct time at the same time. Note that the clock circuit 96 may be omitted, and the integrated control device MC may have the timekeeping function.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also called a "demand control unit"). This power control unit 72 has a function of analyzing a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating from the integrated control device MC, and monitoring the total power consumption of the cooking device 1 so that it does not exceed a specified value or an upper limit set individually by the user, and also has a function of automatically limiting the heat (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed a specified value or an arbitrary set value.

In general, a "demand control device" or "demand control equipment" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (electricity demand). It automatically checks the electricity usage and if it is about to exceed a set value, it will issue an alarm or other warning. If automatic shutdown of devices that can be shut off is set, the device itself will automatically shut off electrical devices that can be shut off as set. After that, it is known to automatically turn on the electrical devices after a certain amount of time has passed, and it is said to be extremely effective in managing the contracted power with the power company in each household.

The power control unit 72 in this embodiment 1 is provided to provide the cooking appliance 1 itself with the power consumption suppression function described above. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function within the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware, and may be realized by incorporating a demand control program into the integrated control device MC from the beginning or adding it later.

The power control unit 72 of this embodiment 1 can set the maximum power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 to only one of the four levels as described above by operating the function setting input key 43KP. This setting can be set on the input operation unit 40 while viewing the numerical values of the above four levels displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when multiple specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed simultaneously. Such a simple setting method is introduced, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6012780.

As explained in Figures 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays a display that allows "peak cut value setting" and "HEMS registration setting", so that the total power consumption suppression function of the cooking appliance 1 as described above can be easily added or the function can be changed or canceled. When determining the "permission conditions" described later, the data on the upper limit value of the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in this power control unit 72 is used.

73 is a signal transmission unit provided to transmit various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, this corresponds to a signal line and connector that can transmit signals via a wire. It may also be, for example, an infrared communication unit that can transmit and receive signals wirelessly. The signal transmission unit 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90.

The IH control unit 90 obtains temperature information from a temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 are abnormally hot. For example, the central operation unit 40M is equipped with electronic and semiconductor components corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc., but since these components are relatively sensitive to heat, they are monitored via the temperature detection circuit 93 to ensure that they do not exceed a predetermined temperature (for example, 60°C).

When the measured temperature exceeds the specified temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the device is in a "pre-abnormal state." Note that the pre-abnormal state is limited to when the detected temperature is in the range of 60°C to 65°C. If the temperature exceeds 65°C, the risk increases and the IH control unit 90 recognizes the device as being in a true abnormal state.

In this preliminary abnormality state, the induction heating operation does not immediately stop, but rather the power of the induction heating is controlled to be reduced. However, once the temperature exceeds 65°C, the IH control unit 90 determines that an abnormality has occurred and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, if the IH coil being driven is the right-side IH coil 17R, the power supply to the inverter circuit 81R that supplies high-frequency power to that IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R, which includes the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor, is stopped. Note that 94L is the induction heating circuit for the left-side IH coil 17L.

The above-mentioned abnormal standby state may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61, which cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100, while maintaining the heat of induction heating. Furthermore, this may be used in combination with measures to reduce the heat of induction heating.

Then, (abnormality monitoring) information showing electrical and physical changes (for example, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30) in the main parts during induction heating during at least the period from such an abnormality preparatory state to an emergency stop is stored in the memory device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal standby state, the induction heating operation is not immediately stopped, and the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the number of rotations of the rotor blades is not changed), and the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R may be forcibly reduced to improve the condition.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the memory device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when a start command is received from the integrated control device MC until cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "IH control menu" in the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "boiling water," "stewing," "frying," etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the heat power of the induction heating are also recorded in chronological order. If an emergency stop occurs midway due to an abnormal condition, the abnormality monitoring information and information identifying the IH control menu up to that point will be saved in chronological order in the memory device 90R.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, in order to monitor the operation of the cooking appliance 1 over a wider range and acquire data, the integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information related to all heating and cooking states on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides after the main power switch 97 is turned ON. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information on the presence or absence of abnormalities from the heating chamber control unit 159 and microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73.

The inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right-side IH coil 17R, and an inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left-side IH coil 17L.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control unit 90. When these inverter circuits are referred to collectively, the reference symbol "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be explained later with reference to Figure 33.

In Figures 29 and 30, 95 is a voice synthesizer that synthesizes electronically created voice. This voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice from a speaker 95S each time an input operation is guided or an abnormality occurs. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part that constitutes the notification unit AN (see Figure 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are used to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30, etc. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control unit 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be either non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or contact type such as a thermistor, and they may be used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two, TS5 and TS6, are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are placed in the gaps at the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, as shown in FIG. 19, and receive infrared signals from the direction of the top plate 15. In other words, this allows the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the food to be cooked, to be measured without contact.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two, TS3 and TS4, use thermistors as contact sensors. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the underside of the top plate 15 or in contact with the underside of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive intermediary object. This allows the temperature of the top plate 15 to be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one, temperature sensor TS7 (see Figure 19), uses a thermistor as a contact sensor and is installed on the top surface of the holder 50. It detects the ambient temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40. The other two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 also use thermistors and are attached to the top surface of the heat sink 82 as described above.

The lower unit 200 is also equipped with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 to detect the temperature of the internal space of the lower unit 200, the details of which will be explained later. As mentioned above, a thermistor-type temperature sensor TS10 is also installed to detect the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113.

In Figures 29 and 30, 62 is a cooling fan drive circuit that controls the drive power of the drive motors 60M, 61M for the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. In other words, the air blowing capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is changed in multiple stages independently of each other by the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

In FIG. 30, 63 denotes a display section drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has the function of displaying necessary information.
The display unit drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. The control program (software) that realizes the functions of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display unit drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensor that detects shaking during an earthquake. If it detects a seismic intensity (acceleration) or greater, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC. Upon receiving the signal, the integrated control device MC determines that an earthquake has occurred and instantly cuts off the power supply to all heating means in use.

In Figures 29 and 30, 49 is a wireless communication unit, also shown in Figure 19, which receives commands from the integrated control device MC to transmit information. It also receives commands from the integrated control device MC to obtain information from the outside. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces the total power consumption.

In this embodiment 1, the abnormality detection unit EM includes an abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) that can detect various abnormalities that occur on the top plate 15, an abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) that can detect various abnormalities related to the electrical components inside the upper space 300A, and an abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) that can detect various abnormalities related to the electrical components inside the lower unit 300B.

The main abnormalities that can be detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) include, for example, three types of abnormalities, abnormality 1 to abnormality 3, as follows.
Abnormality 1: When the water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 boils and spills over, an abnormality is detected.
Abnormality 2: During induction heating, the bottom surface of the object to be heated (such as a metal pot) N is deformed (the degree of curvature increases) and it is determined that the object is placed in an abnormal state (determined by the IH control unit 90).
Abnormality 3: During induction heating, the object to be heated (such as a metal pot) is moved and not immediately returned to the original heating part (determined by the IH control unit 90).

In addition, there are also the following abnormalities 4 and 5.
Abnormality 4: The rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command content (handled by the abnormality detection unit 2).
Abnormality 5: The rotation speeds of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not match the control command content (handled by the abnormality detection unit 3).

The function of the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) is, for example, performed by a temperature detection circuit 93 (see FIG. 30) that acquires temperature information from temperature sensors TS8 and TS9, and a temperature determination circuit (not shown) included in the IH control unit 90. In addition, an abnormality (abnormality 4) related to the rotation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can be detected by the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

The function of the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) is performed, for example, by a microwave heating control unit 130 (see Figure 30) that acquires temperature information from a temperature sensor TS1, and a heating chamber control unit 159 (see Figure 30) that acquires temperature information from a temperature sensor TS10.
This also applies to the case where the rotation speed of the third cooling fan 128 does not match the control command from the heating chamber control unit 159 .

Furthermore, the anomaly detection unit 3 (EM3) is managed by the microwave heating control unit 130 and detects malfunctions in the rotation or rotation of the motor 126 that rotates or turns the antenna 125 (see Figure 15).

In the example shown in Figures 29 and 30, the abnormality detection unit EM is configured as a separate hardware component from the IH control unit 90, but it may also be configured as part of the software that constitutes the control program of the IH control unit 90 or the integrated control device MC.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) employed in this embodiment 1 is equipped with a detection electrode (not shown) disposed on the underside of the top plate 15 in order to respond to the above-mentioned "abnormality 1," and a judgment circuit (not shown) that monitors changes in the current flowing through this detection electrode and determines whether hot water, cooking liquid, etc., has boiled and overflowed from the heated object N during induction heating.

When the abnormality detection unit EM (EM1) detects an abnormality, it sends an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control unit MC. The integrated control unit MC then issues an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to bring the heating units 17HL and 17HR, which are in heating operation, to an emergency stop. Note that even in this case, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate.

In addition, if microwave heating or oven cooking (including the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode) is being performed in the heating chamber 113 when only the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) of the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in the upper unit 100, the cooling fans 128, 129 of the lower unit 200 continue to operate without being affected. These will be explained in detail later with reference to Figures 45 to 47.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) for detecting various abnormalities occurring on the top plate 15 is as described above.

In this embodiment 1, the temperature detection circuit 93 serves as an additional anomaly detection unit and repeatedly measures, in addition to the temperature of the heat sink 82 itself, the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the integrated LCD display unit 30 during induction heating operation and for a certain period thereafter (anomaly detection unit 2).
Therefore, the IH control unit 90 that has acquired the measurement data of this temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the temperature around the integrated display unit 30 so that it does not exceed a regulated temperature value. Therefore, the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) also includes this temperature detection circuit 93 and the IH control unit 90.

Note that rotation abnormalities of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are covered by the anomaly detection unit 2 (EM2) and the anomaly detection unit 3 (EM3). For example, for the first cooling fan 60, the cooling fan drive circuit 62 measures the input current for rotation drive with a current sensor and performs frequency analysis of the current to detect rotation abnormalities. When an abnormality is detected, unlike in the case of anomaly 1, the rotation drive is immediately stopped and the cooling fan 60 is stopped (anomaly detection unit 2).

Regarding "Abnormality 4," in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) has the function of detecting abnormalities in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 as described above. When the abnormality detection unit EM2 (EM2) detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 while the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is being performed, the integrated control device MC cancels the operation of the linked cooking mode, stops the driving of all heating means that are in heating operation, and immediately stops the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61.

Therefore, if an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 is detected, all heating sources automatically stop operating, ensuring high safety. In addition, since the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are stopped immediately, if the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are broken, the situation can be prevented from becoming more serious.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be described.
12 to 17, reference numeral 101 denotes a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. This lower case 101 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates with spot welding, screws, etc. In the first embodiment, as described below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

101H is a body portion that constitutes three surfaces (vertical surfaces) on the rear and left and right sides of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, which is a wall surface that inclines forward as it goes downwards so that the cooking appliance 1 does not hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

101F is a front plate that constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 comes into close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F, preventing microwaves from leaking from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114. 101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that rises vertically from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

The lower unit 200 has two independent heating sources. One of them is a microwave heating source 189 for the microwave heating device 120. The other is an oven heating source 188 for the oven heating device 140.

The oven heating source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven compartment) 113 from the outside of its wall, but it may also be located inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heat the food being cooked. In the following explanation, unless there is a particular contradiction, it is assumed that the "microwave heating source 189" does not include the "inverter circuit board 121" described below.

12, 13 and 15 show the main parts of a microwave heating device 120.
Starting from the front, the main components are installed in the following order:
At the frontmost side, an inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is disposed.

Behind this inverter circuit board 121 are arranged a magnetron 122, which serves as a source of microwaves, and a waveguide 123 that surrounds the oscillator 122A of the magnetron 122.

Furthermore, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 inside the antenna case are disposed behind the waveguide 123 .
A motor 126 is disposed behind the antenna case 124 for rotating or turning the antenna 125 during microwave heating (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, 127 is a power supply circuit board that supplies microwave heating output and power to the magnetron 122, and is equipped with a power supply circuit section 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54, and a microwave heating control section 130, which will be described later.

In Figures 12 and 13, 128 is a third cooling fan, which is disposed directly below the box-shaped case A150 that houses the inverter circuit board 121. The entire bottom surface of the case A150 is open. In other words, it is a box-shaped case with no bottom surface.

129 is a fourth cooling fan, and is placed directly below the box-shaped case B151 on which the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. The heat dissipation section 122H has several parallel heat dissipation fins formed therein so that the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 can pass through. The case B151 is box-shaped with no bottom and the entire bottom surface is open.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are sometimes collectively referred to as the "lower cooling fans." This is because these two cooling fans 128, 199 have the function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
An inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is housed vertically within the vertical portion 308 .

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. They are supported on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis at the center of the rotor blades is vertical (perpendicular).

As mentioned above, the entire bottom surface of case A150 and case B151 is open, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged so that they lie on the inside of the opening.

In FIG. 12, two rows of air deflectors 199 are provided inside the case A150, and are formed integrally or separately on the inside of the case A150. The air deflectors 199 are installed to efficiently direct the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B, which will be described later.

In Figures 12 and 13, 152F is a front air intake port formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This air intake port is composed of many small circular through-holes, or rectangular or elliptical through-holes. This air intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

In Figures 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This intake port is composed of many small circular through-holes, or rectangular or elliptical through-holes. This intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

As shown in FIG. 14, the ventilation hole (first air intake) 164 that introduces outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the interior of the upper unit 100 and the second air intakes 152B and 152F that introduce outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the interior of the lower unit 200 are located on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

In other words, when the cooking device 1 is viewed from the front side, the second air intakes 152B and 152F are located on the right side of the heating chamber 113, while the vent hole (first air intake) 164 and the vent hole 64 are located on the left side.

In FIG. 13, 153 is a duct installed on the upper part of the heat dissipation section 122H, which guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat dissipation section 122H downstream as shown in FIG. 16.

In Figures 12 and 13, 154 is case C, which houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. This case C 154 is made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation properties.

The case C154 is composed of a rear cover 154A and a container- or box-shaped main body 154B at the front, stacked together. The cover 154A covers a large opening formed on the front side of the main body 154B from the rear.

Case C154 has a main body 154B at the front side, on which a power supply circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) on which a microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted are attached. During maintenance and inspection, this lid 154A can be opened to allow various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and microwave heating control unit 130 inside.

This case C154 is installed as far away as possible from the back of the heating chamber 113 so as not to be affected by heat from the heating chamber 113. It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that electrical insulation is not impaired even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid seeps into the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, the case C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As explained in FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support bracket 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

In Figs. 12 and 13, reference numeral 131 denotes a door opening/closing detection mechanism provided as a measure against leakage of radio waves during microwave heating.
In order to ensure the safety of a microwave heating device, it is legally required to install a door opening/closing detection mechanism 131. Representative door opening/closing detection mechanisms 131 of this type are known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the above-mentioned patent document, it is proposed that the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 incorporates three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, and that these switches are linked to the opening and closing of the door to detect opening and closing with a time lag.

In addition, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147 proposes using a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch to open and close the power supply to the inverter circuit, and also proposes providing a monitor switch to turn off the fuse inserted in the power supply circuit when the first interlock switch experiences a short circuit failure.

Figures 12 and 13 show the main parts of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 used in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch, and 132B is a door switch. A monitor switch 133 (not shown) is also provided to cut off the power supply to the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121 if either or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality.

The latch switch 132A is pressed by a protruding pin 134 fixed to the door 114 side, and the built-in contacts are opened and closed. The door switch 132B is pressed by a protruding pin 135 fixed to the door 114 side, and the built-in contacts are opened and closed.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 136A denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so that it always returns to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B denotes a link rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A, 136B, etc. are attached together. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with multiple screws. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 is configured around the various switches thus mounted on the support plate 137.

If there is variation in the mounting position of the latch switch 132A or the door switch 132B during the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing at which each switch is operated may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, a closure detection unit 139 (see FIG. 30) for the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137, and the entire support plate 137 is made removable. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with multiple screws. During manufacturing or after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection unit 139 can be checked, adjusted, replaced, etc.

In Figures 12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 that houses the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower middle parts of the case A150.

The communication port 138A, as shown in FIG. 14, guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 141 described below.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 142 described below, and is used to cool the infrared temperature sensor 160 described below.

The temperature sensor 160 is mainly composed of a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor board (not shown) housed inside the sensor case, one or more infrared detection elements (not shown) mounted on the surface of the sensor board, and a lens (not shown) attached and fixed to the sensor case facing the infrared detection elements.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at multiple locations in the heating chamber 113 to enable temperature detection over a wide range, or the temperature sensor 160 may not be fixed in direction but may be automatically swung within a certain angle range to detect temperatures over a wide angle.

In FIG. 14, 161 is a detection window through which the temperature sensor 160 faces, and a gap may be formed between the outer circumferential surface of the temperature sensor 160 to allow cooling air to pass through. In the first embodiment, a gap of about several mm is formed.

In Figures 14 and 15, 162 is a cooking dish made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. This cooking dish 162 is formed with external dimensions that allow it to be inserted and removed from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 14, HV is the effective height dimension from the top surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the top surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113.

In this embodiment 1, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is just one example, and the present disclosure is not limited to this dimensional configuration.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. The heating chamber 113 is formed with this inner width dimension up to the front opening 113A, so it can also be said to be the opening dimension that determines whether the food to be cooked or cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Like the width dimension WH (see FIG. 14), this dimension determines whether the food to be cooked, the cooking dish 162, and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 includes a heater 163 .
The heater 163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and is, for example, a sheath heater, or a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire support plate made of thin mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two heaters, an upper heater 163 A and a lower heater 163 B. The power supply to these two heaters 163 A and 163 B is controlled independently of each other.
Reference numeral 163A denotes an upper heater fixed in close contact with or adjacent to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and reference numeral 163B denotes a lower heater fixed in close contact with or adjacent to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113.

The upper heater 163A can select multiple levels of heat power within a range from a maximum heat power of 1000 W to a minimum heat power of 50 W. The lower heater can also select multiple levels of heat power within a range from a maximum heat power of 1000 W to a minimum heat power of 50 W.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 166R denotes a right-side partition plate that is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R between itself and the right-side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is made of a thin metal plate.
Reference numeral 166L denotes a left partition plate that is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5L between itself and the left wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is made of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (heat radiation) from the heating chamber 113.

An upper heat shield plate 167 covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is an enclosed space so that there is no air circulation with the outside. The peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed in intimate contact with the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, with the upper edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched therebetween.

168 is a lower heat shield plate having a vertical cross-sectional shape that is vertically symmetrical to the upper heat shield plate 167. This lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield 168 and the lower heater 163B, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap is an enclosed space so that air does not circulate with the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield 168 is fixed in intimate contact with the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113, with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched between them.

169 is an upper case that is placed on the periphery of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper part of the upper heat shield plate 167. 170 is a lower case that is placed on the periphery of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower part of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have a vertically symmetrical cross-sectional shape, and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap GP8 is an enclosed space so that there is no air circulation between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield 168, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap GP9 is also an enclosed space so that no air can circulate.

A sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175A (not shown) is placed in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175B (not shown) is placed in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175C (not shown) is placed in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175D (not shown) is placed in GP9. The insulating performance is further improved if each of these insulating materials 175A to 175D is made in a form of multiple layers stacked on top of each other rather than a single layer structure. The planar size (length and width dimensions) of each of the insulating materials 175A to 175D is at least larger than the installation range of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B, respectively.

In FIG. 14, 171 is a partition plate that defines a passage 172 through which the cooling air RF5 flows above the upper case 169. A communication port 173 is opened at the top of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 173.

In FIG. 15, 174 is a communication port formed in the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the inlet of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 174. 102E is the terminal portion that is the final outlet for the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 has two independent internal passages 102A, 102B at the top and bottom, of which the cooling air RF5 flows through the upper internal passage 102A after cooling the inverter circuit board 121.
Further, cooling air RF6 which has been introduced into the heating chamber 113 and has been heated flows through the other internal passage 102B.

As will be explained in detail in Figure 32, the exhaust duct 102 is the part where the internal passage (internal route) 102A that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and the internal passage (internal route) 102B that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 join together.

The wind speed of the cooling air RF5 increases due to the exhaust port of the cooling air RF5 having a narrow opening area of the air passage. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 near the exhaust port. Due to this action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both of the two cooling air currents RF5 and RF6 are efficiently exhausted to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 from the exhaust port 20. Note that instead of adopting such an induction structure, a method in which the cooling air currents are joined at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large power supply port formed on the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes this power supply port 180 from the outside, and is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass that is microwave-transmitting. Cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the rear wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire rear side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG. 15.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the rear side of the cover 181. The motor 126 for driving the antenna is fixed to the rear side of the waveguide 123 through a heat-resistant sealant 184.

126A is the rotating shaft of the antenna drive motor 126, and is installed horizontally facing the front-to-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end (front end) of the rotating shaft 126A. The rotating shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, but only a certain area from the antenna 125 side may be made of metal, and the area from there to the antenna drive motor 126 may be made of a material with high heat resistance and insulation, such as plastic or ceramic.

In FIG. 15, 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed with a predetermined dimension around the rotating shaft 126A. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. For more effective microwave leakage prevention, a radio wave absorber (not shown) may be placed closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure to prevent microwave leakage from around the rotating shaft 126A. Note that the choke structure in a microwave heating device is described in Japanese patent documents such as JP 2011-174669 A, JP 2010-255978 A, and JP 63-172828 A (combined use of a quarter-wave choke chamber and a radio wave absorber), so a detailed description will be omitted.

In Figure 15, LA indicates the dimension from the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the very end of the antenna drive motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension will be referred to as the "protruding dimension." It is desirable to reduce this protruding dimension LA, but in reality, as mentioned above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also necessary, and there is a limit to how small the external dimensions of the antenna drive motor 126 can be reduced. This protruding dimension LA is 70 mm.

15, GP10 is the gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101, and is 69 mm at the upper end of the motor 126, while the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is about 53 mm. It is dimensionally impossible to place the case C154 in this gap GP10. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the case C154 is positioned shifted to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in the narrow space behind the heating chamber 113 .

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be described.
In Fig. 15, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame constituting the outer shell of the door 114, and is formed in a picture frame shape when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 denotes an inner frame formed from a metal plate. An opening that serves as an observation window 192W is formed in the center of the inner frame 192.

191 is a cover whose outer periphery is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is made of transparent heat-resistant plastic or glass so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen through.

193 is an inner seal frame with numerous small holes in the area corresponding to the observation window 192W, the size of which does not allow microwaves to pass through. This inner seal frame is entirely formed by pressing a thin metal plate, and a choke chamber 194 with an entrance (slit) on the heating chamber 113 side is formed on the outer periphery.

195 is a seal plate made of a thin metal plate. The outer peripheral edge of this seal plate 195 is bent continuously toward the inner seal frame 193 as shown in FIG. 15. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of this seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer periphery of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, microwaves supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 do not leak out from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113.

196 is a transparent seal plate provided on the inside of the portion of the inner frame 192 that corresponds to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate that runs along the top surface of the door 114 and has a width dimension at least equal to the width of the door 114. This upper shielding plate 197 is provided in a eaves-like shape close to the top surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with fasteners such as metal screws so that it is electrically connected to the lower case 101.

The door 114 has its lower portion supported by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) on the lower case 101, so that the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by pulling the handle 115 toward oneself.
There is a concern that in the initial stage of such opening, a gap may momentarily form at the overlapping portion between door 114 and lower case 101, causing a portion of the microwaves to leak out. However, in this embodiment 1, the upper shielding plate 197 can suppress such unwanted leakage of microwaves above door 114.

As explained in FIG. 5, it is recommended that the height dimension C1 of the front slanting portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 be 40 mm or less. In view of this, in FIGS. 16 and 17, H10 is the height dimension from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 to the underside of the flange 16A. In this embodiment 1, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, the height dimension C1 of the front downward section 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), so when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the upper case 16 does not protrude below the front downward section 2F. This makes the space below the upper case 16 larger than before, which is also advantageous when installing the lower case 101, as described below.

17, reference numeral 201 denotes an inlet formed in the front part of the right side wall of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a number of through holes having a diameter such that microwaves do not leak. The reason for providing this inlet 201 in the front part of the right side wall of the heating chamber 113 is to supply a part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114 and to suppress fogging of the observation window 192W of the door 114.
The cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the inlet 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and at the temperature sensor 160, a portion of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113, so the amount of cooling air RF6 that reaches the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air from this inlet 201 is to "prevent fogging" of the seal plate 196 on the inside of the door 114, and a small amount of air does not pose any problems. It is not necessary to supply air from a narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

(Control Means of Lower Unit 200)
Next, with reference again to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30, the various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described in detail.
In Figure 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128, 129, and controls the start and stop of their operation, their operating conditions, etc.

The power supply circuit of this microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120. Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on a power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electrical components (diodes, etc.) that convert AC power to DC are mounted on this power supply circuit board 127 and are housed in a sealed state in case C154.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in response to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120, and has the function of sending a command signal to the inverter circuit 121A to reduce the output of the magnetron 122.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is equipped with a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122. If the temperature of the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than a specified value even after microwave cooking is completed, a command signal is sent to the fourth cooling fan 129 to continue operating the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. Note that the cooling fan drive circuits for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not shown in FIG. 30.

139 is a closure detection unit for the door 114. This closure detection unit 139 electrically detects the open/closed status of one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B (see FIG. 12), and the monitor switch 133 (not shown) by the current or open/close signal flowing through each circuit. In other words, it is a detection unit that corresponds to the operation of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 described above.

The circuit board that constitutes this closure detection unit 139 is attached to the support plate 137, so it can be inspected by removing the support plate 137 or by measuring it while it is installed to check whether it is functioning properly (see Figure 12).

158 is a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and is composed of the temperature sensor 160 and a circuit (not shown) that analyzes the measurement signal from this temperature sensor and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operation, as well as their operating conditions (heating power, i.e., amount of heat generated). The control circuit for this heating chamber control unit 159 is implemented on the power supply circuit board 127 (see Figure 13).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in response to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and has the function of transmitting a command signal to reduce the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163. Note that in order to reduce the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the current flow rate per unit time is changed to change the effective heating power.

(Drive circuit for induction heating source 9)
Next, a description will be given of the configuration of the drive circuits for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking device 1. For the sake of simplicity, a description will be given of an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R in FIG.

In the cooking appliance 1, high-frequency power is supplied to each of the IH coils 17L and 17R by the drive circuit 74, whereby an induction heating operation is performed.
Each IH coil is provided with a drive circuit 74. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the drive circuit 74 for the right IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonant capacitor 76, an input current detection unit 77a, and an output current detection unit 77b.
The current detection data from the input current detection unit 77 a and the output current detection unit 77 b are sent to the IH control unit 90 .

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power source 99 to the DC power source circuit 22, i.e., the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, i.e., the input current value, to the IH control unit 90. 99 is a commercial AC power source.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, and converts the AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage and outputs it to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which IGBTs 79a and 79b serving as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d serving as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into AC power with a high frequency of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high frequency power, and supplies it to a resonant circuit consisting of the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor .

The resonant circuit including the resonant capacitor 76 has a resonant frequency that corresponds to the inductance of the IH coil 17R and the capacitance of the resonant capacitor 76, etc.

By configuring it in this way, a high-frequency current of several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current inductively heats the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R.

IGBTs 79a and 79b are made of, for example, silicon-based semiconductors, but may also be made of wide band gap semiconductors such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based materials.

The power control switching element 83 described with reference to FIG. 12 corresponds to the IGBTs 79a and 79b in FIG.
By using a wide band gap semiconductor for this IGBT, the current loss as a switching element can be reduced. Also, even if the switching frequency, i.e., the drive frequency, is set to a high frequency, i.e., even if switching is performed at high speed, heat dissipation is good. Therefore, the heat dissipation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be made small, and the drive unit can be made small and low cost.

The output current detection unit 77b is connected to a resonant circuit consisting of the IH coil 17R and a resonant capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, i.e., the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. Although a half-bridge type inverter has been described in this configuration, the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may also be a full-bridge type inverter. Also, although the circuit described in FIG. 33 is a current resonant type, a voltage resonant type may also be adopted.

As explained in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for wirelessly communicating with the home gateway 411, which comprehensively manages the power usage and operation information of the home appliances 400 in the home, and can transmit and receive wireless signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC via a communication wiring. However, the longer the wiring, the more susceptible it is to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to place the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC close to each other and to shorten the wiring connecting the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the noise mentioned above, in this embodiment 1, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation unit 40. Specifically, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. Also, the integrated control device MC is installed in the center of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(Cooling air duct)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
12, the inside of the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is partitioned into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the bottom surface 16S by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16. In other words, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" 16S, partitioning the inside of the main case HC into two spaces, an upper space and an lower space.

The upper air passage AH, which guides cooling air to the IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils, introduces outside air from outside the lower case 101 through the ventilation hole 64 that penetrates the partition wall 16S.

Meanwhile, a lower air passage UH that guides cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is disposed in the lower air passage UH. This heat dissipation section 122H is cooled by air introduced from a second air intake 152B formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. The inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by air introduced from a first air intake 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

The cooling air that flows through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air that flows through the lower air passage UH do not merge along the way. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is exhausted into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52, and is released to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 through the exhaust port 20.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 that extends vertically within the same gap GP1, and is finally released to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 through the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire path of the cooling air passage will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 32, air outside the cooking appliance 1 (outside air) passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking appliance 1 via two paths.

First path: A path that runs from the vent hole 164 formed on the left side surface of the lower case 101, through the vent hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, through the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R, and to the exhaust port 20. In Fig. 32, this is indicated as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is drawn in through two intake ports 152F, 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. One of the outside air flows through the third cooling fan 128 to cool the inverter circuit board 121. The other outside air flows through the fourth cooling fan 129 to cool the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122. Thus, although there are two second paths, they ultimately enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is indicated as the "lower air duct" UH.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, the interior of the main body case HC is partitioned by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 into two spaces: an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall 16S, and each space is provided with independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and each air passage is provided with its own dedicated cooling fan 60, 128, 129.
The upper unit 100 also includes a second cooling fan 61 , which cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the interior of the upper unit 100 .

(Central control panel control menu and cooking menu)
Next, the selectable control menu displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the central operation unit 40M will be described with reference to FIG.

As mentioned above, the "IH control menu" of the "single cooking mode" that can be selected using the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R using the induction heating source 9 includes, for example, boiling water, boiling, frying (automatic cooking), etc., as shown in FIG. 39.

However, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (excluding the case of the linked cooking mode described below), as shown in FIG. 34. These 11 types of control menus are sometimes collectively referred to as the "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. The commands for executing these control menu groups are called "control menu programs," which are stored in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final dish obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or by the names of ingredients. In other words, the "control menu" does not allow the direct selection of the food to be cooked.

The "control menus" in the "single cooking mode" KM1 and "combined cooking mode" KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M can be said to be broadly categorized based on the type, method, and conditions of heating required to complete the cooking process, and therefore the names of the control menus are conceptual and general, such as "warming" and "oven (cooking)."

The control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M include a control menu called the "range grill control menu" or "RG control menu" that uses the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Note that the control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M do not include the cooking menu of the "linked cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment 1, the induction heating source 9 has individual operation units 40L, 40R, and a single cooking mode KM1 such as "warm" can be directly selected.
In contrast, for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, since the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M is used, it is not possible to display a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1.

For this reason, in this embodiment 1, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Instead, a "single heating menu" similar to the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected in the "RG control menu" described below.

The RG control menu and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later, are fundamentally different. Also, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponds directly to each individual food to be cooked. In other words, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is an individual control pattern (control menu) based on each individual food to be cooked. These will be explained in more detail later.

The various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 34. Note that what is shown in FIG. 34 includes a control menu (e.g., "Microwave manual") for the single cooking mode KM1 that uses the microwave heating source 189, but even if that control menu is selected, exceptionally, the third specific screen 30ST cannot be displayed.

The "left display area" in FIG. 34 refers to the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30.
The "central display area" also refers to the second area 30M.
The "right display area" also refers to the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the control menu "Warm" in the left display area of FIG. 34 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. This is because the RG control menu "Warm" is set as the default.

As is clear from the "left display area" of FIG. 34, in addition to "warm," there are a total of 11 RG control menus, including "manual microwave," "pre-boil leafy vegetables," "RG cooking," "grill," and "oven." However, the "center heater" listed at the bottom of the "left display area" of FIG. 34 is not supported by the upper unit 100, and is therefore not actually displayed.

The "RG control menu" is a control pattern (of the combined cooking mode KM2) that uses microwave heating (range) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating in combination.
However, in this embodiment 1, the control pattern for either microwave heating (range) or oven heating (single cooking mode KM1) is exceptionally included.

The "center heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (center induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100, so strictly speaking it is neither a "range" nor a "grill."

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, "range" refers to cooking using a microwave heating source 189. "grill" refers to cooking using an oven heating source 188.

The first area in Figure 34 displays a total of 10 options, including "warm" and "grill," but "combined cooking," which uses two or more heating sources, includes "RG cooking" and "RG manual." Also, since "warm" only uses the microwave heating source 9, it does not actually belong to the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. However, it is included as an exception. Note that "warm," "grill," "microwave manual," and other options shown in Figure 34 do not fall under the cooking menu of the combined cooking mode KM3.

The contents shown in the "Central Display Area" in FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings for the "Central Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Central Display Area."

The contents written in the "Right Display Area" in Figure 34 indicate the contents displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Right Display Area". A blank area means that nothing is displayed.

The database of the RG control menu is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP described below, and displays guidance information 30P that serves as reference for transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated without pressing the input key 43MC, the control menu group of the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, and the first area 30L displays one of the control menus, "Warm," as a default display, the second area 30M displays "80°C" indicating the temperature condition, and the third area 30R displays no control condition. Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the third area 30R displays the guidance information 30P, which is useful for cooking. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 and the like.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, the "control conditions" (temperature, heat, time, etc.) corresponding to one RG control menu from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. 34 are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "composite cooking mode KM2", such as "RG cooking", then when the user operates the input key 43MS which commands the start of the heating operation, the mode transitions to the "composite cooking mode KM2" using both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The collaborative cooking mode KM3 will be described later.

The specific contents of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, detailed data such as control conditions and additional information, and display programs, etc. are stored in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.
The main RG control menus will be outlined below.

(1) Warm: This is actually one of the "control menus for the single cooking mode KM1" because it uses the microwave heating source 189 to heat food. However, it is exceptionally classified as one of the combined cooking modes KM2.
This "warm" setting is also suitable for reheating food. The default setting is "80°C", so microwave irradiation will automatically stop when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before heating begins.
As shown in Fig. 34, the temperature can be set in 5°C increments in the range of 0°C to 90°C. For heating frozen foods, the temperature can be set in 2°C increments in the range of -10 to 0°C. The microwave heating output is fixed at 500W.

(2) Manual Range: This refers to heating food using the microwave heating source 189, and is done by setting the heating time. The microwave heating output can also be selected from three levels: 500 W, 200 W, and 100 W. The default heating time is also one minute, but at 500 W output, it can be set between 10 seconds and 15 minutes.
This "manual range" also belongs to the "control menu of the single cooking mode KM1" because it uses microwaves only. However, it is exceptionally classified as one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode. In other words, the RG control menu shown in Fig. 25 also includes the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189.

(3) Boiling leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food, particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach, Chinese cabbage, and other leafy vegetables, using the microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "Standard" is displayed in the second area as the default display. The non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "Boiling leafy vegetables" is originally one type of "control menu for single cooking mode KM1".

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food using the microwave heating source 189, particularly for boiling root vegetables such as potatoes, whose roots and rhizomes are edible. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "Standard" is displayed in the second area as a default display. Note that the heat value is determined in advance by the cooking appliance 1, so when adjusting the heat, it is necessary to change (select) the "Standard" default display in the second area to "Weak" or "Strong", etc.
This "pre-boil leafy vegetables" is originally one of the "controlled menus of the single cooking mode KM1."

(5) Meat thawing: This is an RG control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
This is one of the "control menus for single cooking mode KM1" for heating food using a microwave heating source 189.
(6) RG cooking: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is a combination of microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, this is one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2".
There are three types of control patterns: one in which microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heating is performed by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B, one in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and one in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. The heating power value (watts) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by looking at the display in second area 30M and selecting one of "weak" or "strong", etc.

(7) RG Re-cooking: This is suitable for re-heating cooked food using the heating chamber 113. This is also one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2". The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used in combination.
(8) RG manual: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and combines microwave heating and oven heating to cook. There are three types of this mode: microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B heats the food; the reverse order is used for heating; and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. This is also one of the control menus for the pure "combined cooking mode KM2."

(9) Grill: Heats food using the heating chamber 113, and uses one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B as the heating source. As mentioned above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not managed, and the heating operation is not stopped by detecting an increase in food temperature. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. A typical applicable cooking is grilled fish. Incidentally, the rated heating power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated heating power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. This is actually one of the control menus for the "single cooking mode KM1", but in this embodiment 1, it is prepared as one control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2.

(10) Oven: Heats food using heating chamber 113, and uses one or both of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B as a heat source. The temperature of heating chamber 113 is measured by heating chamber control unit 159, and power supply control is performed by heating chamber control unit 159 so that the temperature reaches a set target temperature.
As shown in Fig. 25, the default temperature is 180°C, and the user can change this target temperature if necessary. As explained in the "Grill" section, the rated heating power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated heating power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supply rate to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the heat generation amount of these two heaters 163A and 163B. This is one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1".

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating the names of individual control menus (e.g., "warm," "manual microwave," etc.) among the total of 10 RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the first layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating the "control conditions" (e.g., "microwave output value", "power application time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the second layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (e.g., "grill cooking heating time") that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and reference information 30P, 30P1 are stored in the third layer of the memory device MM.

(Cooperative cooking mode)
Next, the "combined cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36.
As shown in Figures 35 and 36, inside the memory device MM, data for the first specific screen 30SP that is displayed when the input key 43MC is operated, and control data and an operation program for the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" that is read out when the input key 43M1 is subsequently operated (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "cooperative operation program") are stored in a memory area separate from the RG control menu.

The data for "Coordinated cooking mode KM3" and the "Coordinated operation program" include information identifying the multiple heating sources to be used to prepare each individual food item (e.g., hamburger steak), information on various control conditions (heat, standard heating temperature, etc.) and control parameters, and information on the cooking process including the order (sequence) of the heating sources to be operated. In other words, it is necessary for the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the internal processing circuits and processors that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

When one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is specified, the (multiple) heating sources that can be used and the order in which they will operate are automatically determined. For example, for "hamburger steak," which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is not necessary to first select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL. First, the first specified screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and the user can actually start the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by looking at the display and then selecting, for example, the right heating unit 17HR.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with a content indicating in advance that the left heating unit 17HL is to be used. The user can set in advance to use the right heating unit 17HR without using the left heating unit 17HL. However, there are cases where such a setting is not possible.
In addition, in the case where the right heating section 17HR is used in cooking step 1 and the subsequent cooking step 2 involves heating in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heating source 188, information on the series of cooking steps is stored in the memory device MM.

Additional information 331 that serves as a reference for transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 includes, for example, information on the cooking process described below, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), guidance information and instruction information that prompts the user to input information to proceed to the next cooking process, etc., which are stored in correspondence with each cooking menu of each collaborative cooking mode (e.g., "hamburger steak", "fried chicken")

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process up to raising the temperature to the set (target) temperature is called the "preheating process", and the process of actually heating the food to be cooked after the set temperature is reached and contributing to cooking is called "cooking process 1" or "cooking process 2".
For example, in induction heating, the start of the "cooking process" occurs when the user places the food to be cooked on the food N, such as a frying pan, which has already been heated to the desired temperature after the preheating process has been completed, and actually begins heating.
In addition, in this way, when the same heating source is used, an operation such as pressing a specific input key on the central operation unit 40M or the individual operation units 40L, 40R may be added so that (the integrated control unit MC) can clearly distinguish the point when the preheating process is completed and the point when the cooking process 1 is started thereafter.

(Information on how to use RG control menus, etc.)
Next, the use of the RG (range grill) control menu explained in FIG. 34 and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9.
The names of the control menus shown in category 3 in FIG. 37 are also displayed in the first area 30L, as shown in part in FIG. 34, and are used by the user to select a control menu.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of Figure 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data in the first or second layer of the memory device MM, as explained in Figures 35 and 36.

Therefore, at the stage of operating the input key 43M1, the user can optionally display information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37. Furthermore, the integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in category 2 on the integrated display unit 30 at the stage of the user selecting the RG control menu, to assist the user in input operations. For example, when the user holds down the input key 43M1 once and, for example, a predefined reference time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed in any of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above. Alternatively, the information can be announced by voice using the voice synthesizer 95. For example, for "warm up," the information is announced as "ideal for warming up rice or lunch boxes to your desired temperature."

As shown in categories 1 to 4 in FIG. 37, information that can be used to guide the user when selecting the induction heating source 9 is stored in the memory device MM. Therefore, in step ST4 shown in FIG. 38, the information in category 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 at an appropriate timing to assist the user in selecting the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL.

(Operation of cooking device)
Next, an outline of the operation of the cooking device 1 having the above configuration will be described mainly with reference to Figs.

Figure 38 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation before cooking starts in the cooking device 1. Figure 39 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation during induction cooking in the cooking device 1. Figure 40 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation when microwave heating is performed during induction cooking in the cooking device 1. Figure 41 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. Figure 42 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. Figure 43 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. Figure 44 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking. Figure 45 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device 1. Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device 1. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process in an example of abnormality detection in the cooking device 1.

Referring to Figure 38 .
A basic operation program from power-on to cooking preparation start is stored in a memory device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in type heating cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so the user turns on the power by pressing the operation button 98 (see Figures 20 and 30) of the main power switch 97 (step ST1 in Figure 38).

A specific low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power conversion unit 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is started. The integrated control device MC starts diagnosing itself for any abnormalities using its own control program.

Then, check for abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, which centrally controls the induction heating source 9, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130.

A total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are connected to the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature near the integrated display unit 30, etc., and the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. This allows the IH control unit 90 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (ST2).

The heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 can also obtain the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1, TS2, and TS10 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, it says "send start-up information to the outside", which means that the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT that the cooking appliance 1 will start operating. This will be explained later.

The IH control unit 90 collects temperature information from the main components built into the upper unit 100, and performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before cooking begins. For example, if the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistance temperature (e.g., 70°C) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display unit 30, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. It then notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality and performs processing such as displaying or notifying that operation cannot be started. This processing may also be performed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. The integrated display unit 30 is then started and displays a message that "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started" (ST3). The display screen at this initial stage will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice the same content as that displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information useful for health management, such as control menus and recipe information, within the range previously set by the user. For example, information that the user of the cooking appliance 1 previously sent to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using an information communication terminal device 418 or the like can also be acquired when the integrated display unit 30 is started.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires any information, it is advisable to notify the user by turning on a dedicated warning information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation unit 40 of the upper unit 100.

At this point, inventory information for refrigerator 401 is not obtained. However, as shown in Figures 109 and 110, an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent to home gateway 411 at this point.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide a notification and voice guidance to prompt the user to select a heating method (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has not been operated and the single cooking mode KM1 has been selected by the individual operation unit, the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R (STC).

As mentioned above (see Figures 34 and 37), the control menu "Warm" in "Range Heating" that uses only the microwave heating source 189 belongs to the single cooking mode KM1, but the means for selecting this control menu ("Warm") is the input key 43M1. For this reason, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected from the central operation unit 40. The only heating source that can be directly selected in this cooking appliance 1 is the induction heating source 9.

If neither input key 43M1 nor input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (e.g., 10 or 30 seconds), it is determined that neither linked cooking mode KM3 nor combined cooking mode KM2 has been selected. If the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R immediately after step ST4 or within the grace period, it is determined that only the heating source of the upper unit 100, i.e., the IH coils 17L and 17R, has been selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MC is operated in step STC, the process proceeds to step STR1 of the coordinated cooking mode. Step STR1 of the coordinated cooking mode will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 60 to 108, etc.

If step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, proceed to the next step ST10. The subsequent induction heating control steps will be explained later with reference to Figure 39.

On the other hand, if a heating source for the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to step ST8, which is a menu selection step for the two heating sources provided in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are displayed in a fixed order on the integrated display unit 30. These three types of control menus are the total of 10 control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L.

The control menu displayed at step ST8 in FIG. 38 is based on the assumption that the heat source of lower unit 200 is to be used, and the following three types of control menu are displayed.
(1) A cooking menu that uses at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). This corresponds to "grill" or "oven" in the control menu shown in FIG.
(2) In addition to the above (1), a control menu (ST9B) using the microwave heating device 120 in combination. This corresponds to the "range grill" heating (cooking) in the control menus shown in Figs. 34 and 37.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) using only the microwave heating device 120. This corresponds to "manual range,""pre-boil leafy vegetables,""warm," and the like in the control menu shown in FIG.
In this case, the "combined cooking mode KM3" is not displayed.

If it turns out midway through that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is better, you can proceed to step STR1 in FIG. 73 by operating the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. In other words, you can proceed to the stage immediately before determining whether or not permission condition 1 for the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is met.

Figure 39 shows the operational steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating control menu is selected.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following, an example in which the right heating unit 17HR is used will be described.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has commanded a heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not a heated object N (such as a metal pot or frying pan) is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether the bottom area of the heated object is larger than a predetermined value, and this estimation result is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, which determines whether to perform heating treatment suitable for a standard diameter pot or a large diameter pot (step MS1).
If the pot is compliant but has a large diameter, or is not suitable for heating, it will be treated differently from a standard pot.

Upon receiving a command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays a message on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 prompting the user to select the "IH control menu" for the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the "IH control menu", heat level, cooking time, etc., on the right operation unit 40R (MS3), full-scale induction heating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
The "IH control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes seven items: "fast heating", "deep frying", "boiling water", "preheating", "cooking rice", "boiling", and "boiling water + keeping warm". However, in order to simplify operability, the above-mentioned "function setting" may be set so that some or all of the above seven IH control menus cannot be selected.

When the user selects one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to that IH control menu are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the amount of current (heat) and current duration of the IH coil 17R are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display is displayed on the display unit prompting the user to set the desired heat, current duration, etc. (MS5). Note that the operating program for the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC, not in the IH control unit 90.

Unless the user touches the input key 43R1 again to stop use within a certain time (for example, 15 or 30 seconds) after the above display is displayed, the IH control unit 90 will drive the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R and start induction heating after the certain time has elapsed (MS6). Note that the input function of the input key 43R1 changes every time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start and stop of heating operation.

The "large diameter pot" case is basically the same as steps MS1 to MS7 above, but some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 of Figure 39 cannot be selected as IH control menus.

The "High-speed heating menu" in Figure 39 can only heat "normal pots" or "large-diameter pots" using the induction coil 17L on the left side. In this embodiment 1, a small pot refers to one with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be induction heated.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources are used simultaneously, such as induction heating and microwave heating, will be described with reference to Figures 40 and 41. Note that the example described in Figures 40 and 41 is not for the above-mentioned coordinated cooking mode KM3.

The example shown in Fig. 40 is a case where a user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction heating cooking is being performed previously using the upper unit 100. Even if oven cooking, grill cooking, or the like is performed using both or either one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during induction heating cooking, basic total power control (for the entire cooking appliance 1) as described in Fig. 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.
In this case, the combined cooking mode KM2 must be selected using the central operation unit 40M.

When a user wishes to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200, he or she must first turn on the main power switch 97 and select the heating source for the lower unit 200 using the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40.
However, a simple way to do this is to simply open the door 114. In other words, in this embodiment 1, if the upper unit 100 is operating (if the main power switch 97 is ON), cooking can be started directly by the lower unit 200. Therefore, there is no need to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as explained in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, there is a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that are opened and closed depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed. Therefore, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC (through the function of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131) can detect the opening of both or either of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B.

In FIG. 40, when a signal is received indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened (step S1) as described above, the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guidance may be, for example, "To start heating, select microwave heating and press the start button."

The default setting for microwave heating is a target temperature of 80°C, so even if you close the door 114 and start heating, it will automatically stop when it detects that the temperature of the food being cooked has reached 80°C. If you want to change the temperature from 80°C (to 75°C, for example), you can change the temperature conditions and then press the input key 43MS (see Figure 21).

When the user selects, for example, "Microwave manual" from the composite cooking menu with input key 43M1 and then issues the command "Start heating" with input key 43MS on central operation unit 40M, the rated power consumption value determined by magnetron 122 is used along with the power consumption of third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan 129, etc., and the integrated control device MC determines in step S3 whether the total power regulation value is exceeded.

For example, the integrated control device MC holds data on the heat value of induction heating cooking that has already started and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, so it can calculate the total power consumption of the upper unit 100 and the microwave heating device 120. Note that the integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption using power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81, etc., when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to either reduce the output of the operating IH coil 17R or reduce the heat of the microwave heating. In step S3, the priority of the induction heating cooking at that time is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, if rice cooking (particularly the "boiling process") is being performed in the upper unit 100, the rice cooking (boiling process) is given priority, and the heat of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In addition, when deep frying is being performed in the upper unit 100, the heat is automatically increased in response to the addition of ingredients, etc., so that the temperature of the edible oil does not drop excessively. Therefore, even in such a case, the heat of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that induction heating has priority, then in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the rated microwave output is assumed to be 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced to, for example, an output of 300 W. The user is then notified that such a restriction will be imposed. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating at low heat (S7).
Since the microwave heating control unit 130 has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, the microwave heating control unit 130 monitors whether the food has been heated and has reached the target temperature (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, a determination is made as to whether the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). As long as the induction heating operation has not ended, steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating control unit 130 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, where it is notified that microwave heating has ended.

On the other hand, if induction heating of the upper unit 100 has ended, the process proceeds to step S10, where a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to restore the heat power initially set by the user and continue microwave heating. Then, the temperature of the food being cooked continues to be monitored (S11).

When the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control unit 130, proceeds to step S12, and reports that microwave heating has ended.

The example shown in Figure 40 is based on the assumption that the power priority between microwave cooking and induction heating cooking is determined based on the control menu (e.g., "deep frying") and cooking process (e.g., the "boiling process" of cooking rice) being executed during induction heating cooking, and thus the priority with induction heating at that time.

Therefore, if the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to induction heating, a warning message will be displayed, for example, on the integrated display unit 30 before an instruction to start microwave heating is given using the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. In addition, a warning message will also be issued from the voice synthesizer 95. Even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be cases where the heat value is forcibly lowered, as in the example above.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 in the entire cooking device 1 can be set in the "Function Settings" described above. Once the power priority is set, the setting conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are carried over to the next cooking session and beyond, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off.

In the example shown in Figure 40, the temperature of the heated object is monitored, and microwave heating is terminated when the target temperature is reached. However, there is also a control method in which the microwave irradiation time is measured and cooking is terminated when a set time has elapsed, as will be explained next in Figure 41.

FIG. 41 shows an example of a control method in which cooking is completed based on the microwave irradiation time.
Since steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, the explanation will be omitted.

When microwave heating is started in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is reduced to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the extended time is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

During this process, if induction heating of the upper unit 100 ends, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated, taking into account the time elapsed since the start of heating (step S7).

When the set time 2 has elapsed, microwave heating is terminated and this is notified (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 may also be used until the set time 2 has elapsed.

(Integrated control device and total power control)
Next, reference will be made to Figures 42 and 43.
Figures 42 and 43 are flow charts for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance 1. The examples shown in these two figures are for a case where a user first attempts to perform microwave heating (in the single cooking mode KM1) using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during a period in which induction heating cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100. Even in this case, the basic total power control (for the entire cooking appliance 1) as described in Figure 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.

Unlike Figs. 40 and 41, Figs. 42 and 43 also show the transmission and reception of signals between the integrated control device MC and the microwave heating device 120, and the induction heating device consisting of IH coils 17L and 17R and an inverter circuit 81, etc.

In Figures 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, etc. When the main power switch 97 on the upper unit 100 is turned on, a start-up signal is sent to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the heating power and control menu of the IH coils 17L and 17R are determined on the input operation unit 40 (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39), information indicating the contents is sent via the integrated control device MC (L2). In other words, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum heating power and operation time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. Then, if there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 starts the heating operation using the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R.

We will explain the case where induction heating cooking is started in this way and microwave heating is also started. It is assumed that induction heating is started with the maximum heating power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, as described in FIG. 40, the latch switch 132A and/or the door switch 132B are opened, and the door open/close detection mechanism 131 (close detection unit 139), which monitors this, sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the heating power through the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues an operation start command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply issues an instruction to "start heating" on the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start operation.

If there are no abnormalities on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, the microwave heating control unit 130 will send a "warning signal" to the integrated control device MC to start cooking (L4). For example, if the microwave output is 500 W and the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, the "warning signal" will include information to use 1000 W, as shown in Figure 42.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 uses the power consumption value known in advance, which reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc., in addition to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122, to calculate the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed simultaneously, and determines whether this total value exceeds the total power regulation value (same as step S3 in Figures 40 and 41). The result is then transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As an alternative method, an upper limit for the total power consumption of the lower unit 200 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) can be determined (e.g., 2000 W), and a determination can be made as to whether the total power consumption limit will be exceeded when the lower unit 200 and upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are used simultaneously.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce the output of the operating IH coil 17R or reduce the heat of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the priority of the induction heating cooking at that time from the induction heating control menu and the heating process.

In the example shown in Figure 42, microwave heating is set as the priority, so the power of microwave heating is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is instructed to control the IH coil 17R to lower the target heating power, temporarily reducing power consumption. The user is notified that such a restriction will be imposed. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 commands the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low heat level (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control unit 90 determines that the power reduction has been completed from the current values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b. It then transmits a notification that the power reduction has been completed to the integrated control device MC (L6). In response to this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits an authorization signal to the microwave heating device 120 to start the heating operation (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A has a current detection unit (not shown) similar to the input current detection unit 77a and output current detection unit 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when microwave heating is completed, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines that the heating operation has ended from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal (L8). Microwave heating may also be performed for a certain period of time set by a timer, in which case the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the passage of that time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 to return the heating power to the setting originally requested by the user (L9). Then, the heating power is increased to the initial target level to continue the induction heating (S10).

When the set cooking time or target temperature is reached, the IH control unit 90 ends induction heating and notifies the integrated control device MC that operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation of induction heating cooking and cooling operation)
Next, basic operations of each part of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment when induction heating is performed will be described.

When the start of induction heating cooking is commanded through the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L, 94R corresponding to the specified heating unit, and drives the inverter circuits 81L, 81R of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

An operation command signal is sent from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .
Simultaneously with or slightly after the inverter circuits 81L and 81R start to drive, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start to operate.

The airflow capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 does not have to be fixed. For example, the airflow capacity may be automatically changed between low and high operation depending on the temperature of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature near the integrated display unit 30.

Generally, when the cooling fan is changed from low to high operation, the fan noise increases, raising concerns that this may become a source of noise. Therefore, the temperatures detected by the two temperature sensors TS7, TS8 and the operating strengths of the cooling fans 60, 61 are determined in a correspondence table (data table) based on data from prior air blowing tests, etc., and this correspondence table is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. The IH control unit 90 may then change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as needed according to the data table.

The correspondence table (data table) that determines the operating strength of the cooling fans 60, 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is drawn in through the vent 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. The cooling air RF1 is forced into the first air duct F1 from the air outlet 60A as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is drawn in through the vent 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. The cooling air RF2 is forced into the second air duct F2 from the air outlet 61A as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24.

Here, we will explain one of the features of this embodiment 1. In particular, we will explain the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 with reference to Figures 24, 25, 27, and 28.

The first cooling fan 60 rotates the flat rotor blades 60T in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 60C advances to the air outlet 60A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27, and is blown out from the air outlet 60A in the direction of the inverter circuit board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform across the entire area in the front-to-rear direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air swirling around the outermost periphery inside the fan case 60C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the center. This is shown diagrammatically in Figure 27 by three solid arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A travels in the direction of the air outlet line FL1, but due to the difference in speed between the rotation direction RD1 of the rotor blades 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself, as it approaches the heat sink 82, the cooling air gradually changes direction toward the rear, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 27.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear (back) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the two heat sinks 82 arranged in a front-to-back row. The cooling air then moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the rear surface of the partition wall 11. The dashed arrows in Figure 27 indicate the flow of the cooling air RF1 that flows around the heat dissipation fins 82FN.

The cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, back, and top of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, so that the main components of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out of the air outlet 60A are not diffused to the surroundings, but are instead forced into the narrow space of the heat dissipation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82, which are located behind the partition wall 11.

In addition, since the first air passage F1 begins after passing the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is introduced into the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1, and is then transported in a straight line as the cooling air RF1 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, because there is no direct connection between the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70, and because there is a gap GP14 and a front cutout 70A, a portion of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out of the air outlet 60A turns rearward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows into an area with relatively low pressure. As a result, cooling air is also generated that flows in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L.

The flow of cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be explained with reference to Figures 25, 27, and 28.

The flat rotor 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 61C moves in the direction of the air outlet 61A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27. Then, the air is blown out from the air outlet 61A in the direction of the inverter board 80.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after it is blown out of the air outlet 61A is not uniform across the entire area in the front-to-rear direction of the air outlet 61A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost part of the fan case 61C moves at the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the center. This is indicated by three solid arrows in Figure 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A travels in the direction of the air outlet line FL2. However, due to the difference between the rotation direction RD2 of the rotor blades 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the speed of the cooling air 61FL itself, as it approaches the heat sink 82, the cooling air gradually changes direction toward the rear as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 27.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front (front) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 arranged in two rows, front and back. It then proceeds to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the front of the partition wall 11. The dashed arrow in Figure 27 shows the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the heat dissipation fin 82FN.

A cover 70 is provided so as to surround the front, rear and upper sides of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a small gap therebetween.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is forced into the narrow space of the heat dissipation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 located forward of the partition wall 11 rather than diffusing to the surroundings.

In addition, since the first air passage F1 begins after passing the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is introduced into the inlet FI of the first air passage F1, and is then transported in a straight line as the cooling air RF2 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, because there is no direct connection between the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 and there is a gap (not shown) and a front cutout 70A, a portion of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out of the air outlet 61A leaks forward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows into an area with relatively low pressure. As a result, it flows as cooling air that branches off in the direction of the space directly below the front input operation unit 40, and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The vent hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the vent hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but a large number of small hole groups may be provided and these small hole groups may be shared.

Diode 79c (see Figure 33) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching elements 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Similarly, a power control switching element 83 is used for the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A flows to the right while cooling the various switches that receive input operations and are arranged on the input operation unit 40, the liquid crystal display screen, the display unit drive circuit 63, and other components.

As shown by the thick arrow in Figure 24, some of the cooling air RF1 changes direction upwards when it leaves the outlet FO of the cover 70, but due to the force of the cooling air RF2 joining it from the front, it is roughly divided into cooling air RF3 that turns around and travels to the left over the cover 70, and cooling air RF4 that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54.

The cooling air RF3 flows underneath the right-hand IH coil 17R, and then flows underneath the left-hand IH coil 17L. In the process, it cools the two IH coils 17R and 17L. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250°C to 300°C during induction heating operation. Therefore, as described above, cooling is performed using the two cooling airs RF1 and RF2 combined into cooling airs RF3 and RF4.

As explained in Figures 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R that has traveled to the right of the partition plate 14 travels rearward while cooling the filter circuit board 54, and is exhausted through the exhaust window 52B. 53R is an exhaust plate that has multiple through holes 53R1 formed therein.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L, 17R also changes direction and travels toward the exhaust window 52A, which serves as the final exhaust port, passes through a number of through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and is exhausted from the exhaust window 52A.
As a result, the cooling airflows RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, the cooling airflows are discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As mentioned above, the components such as the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are the components that need to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (IH coil installation space CK). The space for cooling these components is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B, there is a gap GP1 that connects to the exhaust port 20, but since there are no components to be cooled as described above inside this gap GP1, it does not serve as a cooling space for the upper unit 100.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, a basic operation of each part of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned ON, microwave cooking can be started immediately even if induction heating cooking is not actually being performed in the upper unit 100. However, if the main power switch 97 is once turned OFF, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave heating cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset and opened a certain time (e.g., 30 minutes) after the last use of any of the microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, heating chamber 113, etc. all drop below a specified value. Such safety measures are adopted.

Next, the door 114 is opened, food or other items to be cooked are placed in the heating chamber 113, and after the door 114 is closed, a command to start microwave heating cooking is issued by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) on the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. The integrated control device MC then issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130, causing the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 to start operating.

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillator 122A. Note that the microwaves referred to here are radio waves of 2450 MHz ±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. The motor 126 for driving the antenna 125 starts operating at the same time that the microwaves are generated, so the microwaves introduced into the antenna case 124 can be propagated evenly inside the heating chamber 113 by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. The action of this type of antenna and rotating shaft 126A is explained in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, outside air is drawn into the inside of the case A150 through the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and then cools the various electrical components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through communication ports B138B and A138A, which are provided at the top and bottom of the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 that passes through communication port B138B hits the back of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in a mounting hole in the right-side partition plate 166A. There is a tiny gap of a few millimeters or less between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided from the communication port A138A to the passage 172. In other words, it is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 that covers the top of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171. This passage has the effect of preventing high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side, even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 becomes so hot that it exceeds 300°C.

When the position of the communication port 173 is viewed from the communication port A 138A in a plan view, the communication port 173 is located diagonally rearward across the passage 172. In other words, the communication port 173 is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173, passes through the communication port 173, and is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward (see FIG. 15).

When the cooling air RF5 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is released into the room through the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
12 and 13, when the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A 151 from the intake port B 152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF6. The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat dissipation part 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the heat dissipation part 122H, and reaches the inside of the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and travels forward. It is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. 17.

Because the inlet 201 is located close to the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, some of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging that occurs on the heating chamber 113 side of the sealing plate 196.

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging steam, smoke, and the like generated from heated objects such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the cooling air RF6 moves from the front to the rear of the heating chamber 113, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the ceiling at the rear.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102, which extends horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. When the cooling air RF6 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted to the rising air current of the cooling air RF5 and merges with it, and is released into the room through the exhaust port 20.

Even if the initial air volumes of cooling air RF5 and cooling air RF6 are equal, due to the difference in the paths as in this embodiment 1, cooling air RF5 has a faster wind speed when it is released from duct 102. Therefore, it has the effect of attracting cooling air RF6 released from below.

To forcibly release the cooling air RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided midway through the exhaust duct 102. In this embodiment 1, such an exhaust fan is omitted, which can be realized at low cost and is advantageous when considering the arrangement of components inside the upper unit 100.

Next, we will explain Figure 44.
FIG. 44 is a table showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the cooking appliance 1 and the types of cooking.
As is clear from Fig. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in the case of induction heating cooking, as well as in the case of microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated in the cases of microwave cooking and oven cooking.
On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated only during oven cooking.

Next, we will explain Figure 45.
FIG. 45 shows a case where cooking is performed using the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and "hamburger steak" is selected as the cooking menu.

This is an example of cooking in three stages: a preheating process using induction heating source 9, a cooking process 1 using induction heating source 9, and a cooking process 2 using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189.
Fig. 45 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 has been detected among the main abnormalities that can be detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). Note that abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the contents of the control command) is not shown in Fig. 45.

Preheating process: When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are controlled as shown in FIG. 45.
That is, the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Also, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times “Th1”, “Th2” from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning during the preheating process, so they are not affected in any way.

Cooking process 1: If at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 in heating operation is immediately stopped. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be explained later.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning during the preheating process, so they are not affected in any way.

Cooking step 2: In cooking step 2, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used. When the oven heating source 188 is driven, the third cooling fan 128 starts operating.
Furthermore, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is also started at the same time (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 in the heating operation is immediately stopped. Also, if the microwave heating source 189 is being driven, it is immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are in operation, as will be described later, they are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2".

As shown in FIG. 45, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected during a period in which the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operating, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not affected in any way because it has not been operating from the beginning.

As described above, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) at any stage of the preheating process, cooking process 1, or cooking process 2, the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 (in Figure 45, the cooking menu is "hamburger steak").

The effect of this "cancel" is the same as the effect of canceling the combined cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
Therefore, this cancellation results in the "occupation" of the heat source being used being eliminated. Incidentally, "occupation" will be explained in detail later with reference to Figures 62 to 64.

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
FIG. 46 shows a case where cooking is performed using the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and "fried chicken" is selected as the cooking menu.

A preheating step using induction heating source 9 is started, and during the period during which current is being applied to the preheating step, cooking step 1 is started using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189. In other words, the preheating step and cooking step 1 overlap in time.
The cooking process 2 is an example in which the food N, which has been heated to a high temperature in the preheating process, is further heated by the induction heating source 9 above the top plate 15 to perform cooking.

As with FIG. 45, FIG. 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 has been detected. Note that FIG. 46 does not show abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command).

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
This is an example of a case where three types of cooking are performed: a preheating step using induction heating source 9, cooking step 1 using induction heating source 9, and cooking step 2 using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189. This differs from the cooking mode in Fig. 45 in that the preheating step and cooking step 1 overlap in time.

This Figure 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 has been detected among the main abnormalities that can be detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). Note that abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command content) is not shown in this Figure 46.

Preheating process: First, the induction heating source 9 is energized to start preheating the object N to be heated.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Furthermore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the point in time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning in the preheating process, and are therefore not affected at all.
During this preheating process, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (in Figure 46, the cooking menu is "fried chicken").

Cooking process 1: If at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 in heating operation is immediately stopped. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be explained later.

The third cooling fan 128, which has been started at the same time as the oven heat source 188 is driven, is operated for a heat dissipation operation time "T01" from the time when the oven heat source 189 is stopped, as will be described later.
Moreover, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated from the beginning and is therefore not affected at all.

On the other hand, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129 also starts operating at the same time (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the microwave heating source 189 in the heating operation is immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are in operation, as will be described later, they are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2".

Cooking step 2: In cooking step 2, the induction heating source 9 is used. Therefore, as soon as the induction heating source 9 is driven, the first and second cooling fans 60, 61 start operating.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped.

As will be described later, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for heat dissipation operation times "Th1", "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped.
Even at this stage of cooking process 2, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (in Figure 46, the cooking menu is "fried chicken").

The effect of "cancelling" the combined cooking mode in the preheating step, cooking step 1, and cooking step 2 described above is the same as the effect of canceling the combined cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
This cancellation therefore eliminates the "occupation" of the heat source in use.

Next, we will explain Figure 47.
FIG. 47 explains the operation of the integrated control device MC during the cooking operation of the cooking appliance 1, particularly after an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit EM.

The anomaly detection unit EM does not detect anomalies before the actual heating operation starts, such as step MS1 described in FIG. 39. Therefore, it detects physical (electrical, mechanical, etc.) anomalies in the cooking process after the heating operation has actually started.

In FIG. 47, steps S20 to S33 show the operation of the integrated control device MC.
For the sake of simplicity, a case will be described in which the abnormality detection unit EM detects abnormality 1 out of the abnormalities 1 to 3 described above.
Anomaly 1 occurs when water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 boils and spills over, resulting in an abnormality being detected.

When it is detected that liquid has overflowed from the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 due to induction heating, the integrated control device MC receives an abnormality signal (determined as "Yes" in step S20). In other words, if the liquid spills onto the top surface of the top plate 15 and reaches the top surface of the input operation unit 40, there is a concern that this could cause the input operation unit 40 to malfunction.

In the next step S21, the inverter circuit 81L is stopped to stop heating the IH coil 17L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL of the operating induction heating source 9. The integrated display unit 30 also displays that the operation has been stopped due to an abnormality. In this case, it is advisable to display the same information on the left display unit 31L.

In the next step S22, it is determined whether any heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, and if the answer is "No", the process proceeds to step S23, where the operation of the two cooling fans 60, 61 is stopped. Note that this operation stop process does not mean that the cooling fans 60, 61 are stopped immediately after step S21. This point will be explained in detail in Figures 48 and 49.

If it is determined in step S22 that a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, the process proceeds to step S24.
In step S24, it is determined whether a cooking process is being performed by the microwave heating source 129.

In step S24, if it is determined that a cooking process is being performed using the microwave heating source 189, the process proceeds to step S25.
In step S25, it is repeatedly determined at regular short intervals (less than a few seconds) whether the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 has ended.

When it is determined that the cooking process using the microwave heating source 189 has ended, the driving of the magnetron 122 is stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S26.
In step S26, it is determined whether or not a cooking process using the oven heat source 188 is being performed.

In step S26, a cooking process using oven heat source 188 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step S30.
On the other hand, if the determination in step S26 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process using the microwave heating source 189 has been completed.
In the next step S28, a process is performed to stop the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 that has been cooling the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 by the cooling air RF6. Note that the cooling air RF6 has been introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201, but the supply of this cooling air is stopped.

The "operation stop process" in step S28 does not mean that the cooling fan 129 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S27. This point will be explained in detail in Figures 48 and 49.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S24 is "No", the process proceeds to step S30.
Also, if the determination in step S26 is "No", the process proceeds to step S30.

In step S30, it is repeatedly determined at short intervals (less than a few seconds) whether the cooking process of the oven heat source 188 has ended.
When the power supply to the oven heating source 188 is stopped and the cooking process is completed, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process using the oven heat source 188 has ended.
In the next step S32, a process is performed to stop the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 that has been cooling the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the cooling air RF6. Note that this process does not mean that the cooling fan 129 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 48 and 49.

In addition, the third cooling fan 128, which supplies cooling air RF5 to the area around the temperature sensor 160, is stopped. Note that this stop operation process does not mean that the cooling fan 128 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be explained in detail in Figures 48 and 49.

When the operation stop process for each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, 129 is completed by steps S23, S28, S32, and S33 and the cooling fans are stopped, the operation history information shown in step S29 is recorded. In other words, the series of operations from step S20 onwards are stored in an operation history storage area prepared inside the memory device MM and are used for control thereafter. They are also used by users and maintenance and inspection specialists to check for abnormalities, etc.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the timings for starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when coordinated cooking is performed in the cooking appliance 1.

As shown in FIG. 48, the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 start operating basically at the same time as the start of cooking.
The solid arrows in Fig. 48 indicate the period from the start to the end of operation, and the dashed arrows following the solid lines indicate the additional operation time for heat dissipation, which will be described below. Note that each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 does not actually stop operation at the end of the solid arrows, but continues to operate for the additional operation time.

In the first embodiment, the time from the start to the end of operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: Starts operation when induction heating starts. Also starts operation when microwave cooking and oven cooking start. In single cooking mode KM1, "heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the cooking mode ends. This is to cool high-heat parts such as the top plate 15. Depending on the value determined by the "product" of the length of induction heating time and the maximum heat power used (power consumption of the inverter circuit), one of three stages, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes, is selected as the "heat dissipation operation time Th1". This is performed by the IH control unit 90.

In the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used, if there is a heating source that finished its heating operation after the induction heating source 9 stopped operating, the first cooling fan 60 performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time that the heating operation of that heating source finished or until the temperature of the top plate 15 drops below the reference temperature. In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, operation is controlled by the integrated control device MC.
In FIG. 48, the "heat dissipation operation time" of the first cooling fan 60 is indicated by the symbol Th1.

Second cooling fan 61: The "heat dissipation operation time Th2" is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60. This is done by an operation start command and an operation end command from the IH control unit 90. Note that operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60. In the case of the linked cooking mode KM3, operation is controlled by the integrated control device MC.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "heat radiation operation" is performed for only 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. In other words, this "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes. This is performed by the microwave heating control unit 130.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: The oven will not operate.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "Heat radiation operation time Tm1" is the same as "heat radiation operation time Tm2" of the fourth cooling fan 129. In addition, the start and end of operation are controlled by the microwave heating control unit 130, similar to the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: Immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is finished, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured and the oven is operated until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 falls below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.
Temperature is measured by a temperature sensor 160 that measures non-contact using infrared rays, and a contact-type temperature sensor TS10 (see Figs. 15 and 30). Temperature measurement data is sent to a non-contact temperature measurement unit 158 and a heating chamber control unit 159. The temperature measurement data is finally sent to the integrated control device MC, and the third cooling fan 128 continues to operate until an operation end command is issued to the third cooling fan 128.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the case of oven cooking, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128 is important.
In oven cooking, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes hot (for example, 200° C.), and therefore it takes time to cool down such heating chamber 113.
If the temperature of heating chamber 113 is not lowered, the next time microwave cooking is performed immediately, the temperature of heating chamber 113 may be high from the beginning.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, it will be impossible to use the microwave heating source 189 for "warming" cooking. This is because the "warming" control menu employs a control that automatically stops microwave irradiation when the food is heated and reaches, for example, 80°C (default value). Therefore, in order to avoid confusing the user, for example, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is already 80°C or higher, it is necessary to implement error processing and not accept heating cooking.

In this embodiment 1, the relationship between the control menu of the embodiment 1 and the operation times (periods) of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is set as follows.
That is, the control program of one control menu includes the above-mentioned times such as "heat radiation operation time Th1,""heat radiation operation time Th2," and "heat radiation operation time To1." That is, the operation times of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 are also controlled by the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when one control menu is set, a series of control operations from the end of the heating operation until the end of the heat dissipation operation is determined according to that control menu. In other words, one control menu ends when the operation of the related first cooling fan 60 to fourth cooling fan 129 ends. Therefore, for the induction heating source 9, the arrow indicating the execution period of one control menu is a longer period that extends beyond the execution period of the oven heating source 188 (as shown in FIG. 48) in the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM3.

The above explanation is based on the assumption that the airflow volume (airflow capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 during cooking is constant, but it is also possible to make changes such as increasing the airflow volume during cooking and decreasing the airflow volume during heat dissipation operation. Also, it is also possible to perform variable capacity operation such that the airflow volume is decreased when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or upper unit 100 is low rather than when it is high.

In addition, in FIG. 48, the induction heating source 9 is depicted as being driven (energized) until a point later than the point at which the microwave heating source 189 is driven. This is because, in this example, the induction heating source 9 heats the object N to be heated, for example a frying pan, to a preheating temperature (for example, 180°C) (preheating step), the object to be cooked is slightly heated in the high-temperature frying pan (cooking step 1), and then the object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113 and microwave heated, and it is not necessarily necessary to stop the induction heating source 9 before starting microwave heating.

In addition, in FIG. 48, during oven cooking, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated as indicated by the dashed line for the operation period of the fourth cooling fan 129.
In this case (oven cooking), the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, and the operation continues until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 falls below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat radiation operation time To2" may be changed from time to time. Or, it may be adjusted to the "heat radiation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128.

Next, we will explain Figure 49.
FIG. 49 is a time chart showing the timings for starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heating sources are driven simultaneously in the cooking appliance 1. In FIG.

Figure 49 is a time chart showing the case where the integrated control device MC executes "abnormality processing mode A" because the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during a cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven simultaneously.

When the induction heating source 9 finishes the heating operation as shown in Fig. 49, the first cooling fan 60 performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time when the heating operation ended as described in Fig. 48. Specifically, as described above, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60 .

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated for only the "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" after the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is stopped.
46, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated for the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 is stopped. This "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes.

If the abnormality detection unit EM detects, for example, "abnormality 1" on the top plate 15 (e.g., overflow from the object to be heated N), when the integrated control unit MC receives an abnormality detection signal, it immediately stops the operation of the induction heating source 9 arranged inside the upper space 300A. For example, if induction heating is being performed in the left heating unit 17HL, it stops driving the inverter circuit 81L (see Figure 30) dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL by the IH control unit 90. The same applies to "abnormality 2" and "abnormality 3" described above.

In FIG. 49, ET1 indicates the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped urgently.
On the other hand, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow rate) as before the occurrence of the abnormality until the timing ET2 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49, while the microwave heating source 189 is driven, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow rate) as before the occurrence of the abnormality.
Then, based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 has finished driving, the microwave heating source 189 is operated for a "heat radiation operation time Th3" and a "heat radiation operation time Th4".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th3" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th1." Also, the "heat dissipation operation time Th4" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th2."

The "heat radiation operation time Th3" and "heat radiation operation time Th4" are specified to be a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 ends its heating operation. This time is determined by the integrated control device MC, which grasps the operation information of the microwave heating control unit 130, and the IH control unit 90 selects only one of three minutes, five minutes, or ten minutes based on the operation information from the integrated control device MC.

As described above, even if the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and causes an emergency stop of the driving sources of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R, etc. of the induction heating source 9 while induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking are being performed simultaneously, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 that cool the inside of the upper space 300A will continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality, at least until the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is terminated, as explained in FIG. 49.

As a result, the cooling effect of not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire cooking device 1, and the power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, and other important components related to each heating source are not affected in any way. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions such as overheating and quality deterioration of these components.

Next, we will explain Figure 50.
FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the timings for starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heat sources are driven simultaneously in the cooking appliance 1. In FIG.

Figure 50 is a time chart showing the case where the integrated control device MC executes "abnormality processing mode B" because the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during a cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously.

When the induction heating source 9 finishes the heating operation as shown in Fig. 50, the first cooling fan 60 performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time when the heating operation ended as described in Fig. 48. Specifically, as described above, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60 .

Meanwhile, the third cooling fan 128 measures the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and operates until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time Tо1" is determined under these conditions.

If the abnormality detection unit EM detects, for example, overflow from the object to be heated N on the top plate 15, the operation of the induction heating source 9 arranged inside the upper space 300A is immediately stopped, as described in FIG. 49.

In FIG. 50, ET1 indicates the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped urgently.
On the other hand, if the cooking process of the oven heating source 188 has not yet finished when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped in this way, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality until the timing ET3 shown in Figure 48.

As shown in FIG. 50, while the oven heat source 188 is driven, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow rate) as before the occurrence of the abnormality.
Then, based on the time when the oven heating source 188 has finished driving, the oven heating source 188 is operated for a "heat radiation operation time Th5" and a "heat radiation operation time Th6".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th5" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th1." Also, the "heat dissipation operation time Th6" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th2."

The "heat radiation operation time Th5" and "heat radiation operation time Th6" are set to a maximum of 10 minutes, based on the time when the oven heating source 188 finishes its heating operation. This time is determined by the integrated control device MC, which grasps the operation information of the heating chamber control unit 159. Based on the operation information from the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90 selects only one of three minutes, five minutes, or ten minutes.

When cooking using the oven heating source 188 alone, the fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate, but it may be operated as shown in FIG. 49. In this case, the "heat radiation operation time To2" is the time it takes for the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 to drop below a certain temperature. In other words, it may be changed from time to time. Or, it may be synchronized with the "heat radiation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128.

As described above, even if the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and emergency stops the power supply to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B while induction heating cooking and oven heating cooking are being performed simultaneously, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 that cool the inside of the upper space 300A will continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow volume) as before the abnormality occurred, at least until the operation of the oven heating source 188 is stopped, as explained in FIG. 50.

As a result, the cooling effect of not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire cooking device 1, and the power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, and other important components related to each heating source are not affected in any way. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions such as overheating and quality deterioration of these components.

The heat dissipation operation times (Th1, Tm1, To1, Th2, etc.) are guaranteed even if the user turns off the main power by pressing the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97. In other words, the integrated control device MC is programmed to cut off its own power circuit after completing the heat dissipation operation described above.

(Basic operation when cooking in the oven)
Next, a basic operation of the oven heating device 140 in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the integrated control device MC presumes that some kind of cooking will be started and performs a preliminary start. Therefore, oven cooking can be started immediately even if induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking is not actually being performed in the upper unit 100. However, if the main power switch 97 is once turned OFF, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start oven cooking.
Furthermore, pressing this main power switch 97 again will turn it off, and all heating and cooking that is being performed will be stopped at the same time (however, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129, which will be described later, will not immediately stop operating, but will continue to operate in a heat-dissipating mode until certain conditions are met, as will be described later).

Next, the door 114 is opened and food or other items to be cooked are placed in the heating chamber 113, after which a control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, when cooking fish or meat by grilling, the heating time and heat are set. However, if the control menu for automatic grilling is selected, the heat is automatically set by the heating chamber control section 159. The selection of this control menu will be explained later.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives command signals from the integrated control device MC and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the time period during which they are energized, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the heat, etc.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measurement unit 158. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature and controls the power supply to both or either of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (feedback control). Note that the temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as the "second temperature sensor."

In addition, when the control method for timer cooking is input through the central operation unit 40M, the upper heater 163A and/or the lower heater 163B are energized for the set time. In other words, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the detected temperature data of the temperature sensor TS2.

After the door 114 is closed, when a command to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113) is issued on the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC issues a drive command to the heating chamber control unit 159, and starts operating the third cooling fan 128. Note that the heating chamber control unit 159 may also send a drive command signal directly to the third cooling fan 128.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A150 through the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit board 121.

The cooling air RF5 that passes through the communication port A138A is blown out into the heating chamber 113 through the gap between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole, via the detection window 161.

The cooling air RF5 that passes through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. It then reaches the communication port 173 while cooling the upper case 169, and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated from the start in oven cooking (see Figure 44). If it were operated, the cooling air RF6 would pass through the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 and reach the inside of the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it is not generating heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no increase in temperature (see Figures 16 and 17).

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. 17. As a result, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inside portion of the door 114.

The food or other cooked object placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, etc. due to the radiant heat from the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such steam, oily smoke, etc. is carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving from the front to the rear of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15.

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102, which extends horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward and passes through the exhaust port 20, before being released into the room (see FIG. 15).

In the above-described first embodiment, after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the integrated control device MC controls the overall state of the cooking device 1 up to a certain stage, and then, if the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R is operated, the subsequent induction heating control is left to the IH control unit 90. However, the range of control by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the IH control unit 90 and the integrated control device MC.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, after one of the control menus, induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating, is selected, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 may basically perform the control operations related to heating.

In this case, if new input is made to the input operation unit 40 (including stopping heating), control will be temporarily performed by the integrated control device MC, but if no input is made, cooking can be performed by either the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130.

(Control during deep-frying by the IH control unit 90)
A specific example of the control operation of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when deep frying (automatic), which is one type of single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the cooking appliance 1.

When "deep frying (automatic cooking)" is selected in the induction heating cooking control menu by operating the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R, the temperature of the cooking oil placed in the heated object (metal pan) N is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the heat of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the control menu for deep frying (automatic), the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a deep frying process, and a heat-up process, as shown in FIG.
Furthermore, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, necessary information and reference information (e.g., the estimated time required for preheating) are displayed in the form of characters, figures, etc. Also, the fact that this is priority cooking and power is not limited (suppressed) by the power control unit 72 is displayed.

This allows the user to know that power will be secured as a priority during deep frying, even if microwave or oven heating is in use.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts operating at a specified heating power value (maximum 1500W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rises rapidly from room temperature (e.g. 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

This temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, so when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) of 180°C has been reached, the IH control unit 90 adjusts the amount of induction heating, i.e., the inverter output, to maintain the target temperature as is (this control action of automatically adjusting the high-frequency heating power to approach the target temperature based on such temperature detection information is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

Then, a display command is sent to the integrated control device MC, and audio guidance is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95, such as "The oil temperature has reached the appropriate level. Please add ingredients."

When the user places ingredients, for example frozen croquettes, into the cooking oil, cooking step 1 begins at this point.
The cooking oil is cooled rapidly from the moment it is added by the cold ingredients (croquettes), so its temperature drops sharply as shown in Figure 51. However, the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors this temperature drop and immediately increases the heating power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) to the specified heating power of 1500W or 1800W, causing the oil temperature to rise again (temperature feedback control). When the oil temperature reaches the target temperature T1 again in this way (or after a specified time has passed), the process switches from the deep frying process to the heating power increase process.

During the heating power increase process, the control device 90 controls the inverter circuit 81R (81L) so that the oil temperature is maintained between the second temperature T2 (225°C) higher than the target temperature T1 and the upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 (230°C) which is even higher than that.

As shown in FIG. 51, the heating power is about 900 W and the heater is driven intermittently.
The process after the first temperature T1 is reached is called the "deep-frying finishing process" and is an important process for finishing deep-fried foods crisply. If sufficient heat is not applied in this heat-up process, deep-frying will not be done well. Note that the deep-frying process is not limited to a certain time, so when the user presses input key 43R1 (or input key 43L1), all deep-frying is completed.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the (automatic) deep frying control menu, the period from the deep frying process to the heat-up process is defined as the "priority control menu execution time period", and during this execution time period, power reduction is prevented by starting other heating sources or changing operating conditions. In other words, the induction heating IH control unit 90 has the function of constantly knowing whether the control menu being executed is within the "priority control menu execution time period", and if it is within that execution time period, reporting this to the outside.

As is clear from the above explanation, when a specific heating process is started, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is entirely left to the control of the IH control unit 90.

In the "linked cooking mode KM3" described in detail later, when a control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "cooking process" begins from the stage of the "drying cooking process" where the food to be cooked is actually heated. In other words, the preheating process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display on integrated display unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display unit 30 and the various input keys of the central operation unit 40M, the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 53 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the operation of the left operation unit of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 54 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the operation of the left operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 56 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 59 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during combined cooking of the cooking appliance 1.

Referring now to Fig. 52, when the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display unit 30 is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 52, 30A is a display message informing the user that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing the user to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a message explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.

When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 that stores information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are a type of "common information during standby" 30N.

After display screen 1 in FIG. 52 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. On display screen 2A, the text "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning displays 30E.

Here, "bumping" refers to the phenomenon in which, for example, when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is being heated, the inside of the food becomes overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden, violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets may fly off, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping is said to be the introduction of foreign matter from outside or an impact. For this reason, when a metal pot or the like containing food is placed on the top plate 15 and induction heated, a warning is displayed when stirring the food. The information displayed in this warning is a type of "common information during standby" 30N.

The three display screens shown in FIG. 52, display screen 1, display screen 2A, and display screen 2B, may be referred to as common screen 30Z. Note that common screen 30Z may include forms other than these three.

In display screen 2B, 30E is a warning display that warns that the inside of heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and to avoid careless contact. If the integrated control device MC detects that heating chamber 113 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 113, it automatically switches to this state of display screen 2. Note that display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, but they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to warn about both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Also, the warning contents of display screens 2A and 2B may be output in parallel as voice by a voice synthesizer 95.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A, 2B in Figure 52, these displays are made using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, rather than displaying partially in any of the first area 30L to third area 30R described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 30L to third area 30R are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user sees them displayed on the entire integrated display unit 30.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are at stage ST3 in terms of the operation steps of FIG.
When a certain time, for example 10 seconds, has elapsed since display screen 1 to display screens 2A and 2B were displayed, the display content changes to one that prompts the user to select a heating source (heating means) (corresponding to operation step ST4 in FIG. 38).

Next, induction heating cooking will be described with reference to FIG. 53. Note that FIG. 53 describes the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3.

Figure 53 is a plan view of the left display unit 31L and left operation unit 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking with the left heating unit 17HL is not pressed, it is in the state shown in Figure 53 (A).

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the integrated control device MC causes the individual light-emitting unit 27L3 to emit light, indicating that an operation input has been received.

The input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for input, so the individual light-emitting element 27L1 is made to blink. Also, the selection of the control menu is also waiting for input, so the individual light-emitting element 27L2 located directly behind the input key 44L is made to blink. In FIG. 53(B), the star symbol indicates that the light-emitting display element 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heat level of the heat level indicator 67L, which shows the heat level during induction heating cooking, is set to "3," the light-emitting portion of the heat level indicator 67L will continuously light up from the left side (or change from blue to red) until it indicates heat level 3, thereby indicating the level of heat level to the user.

When the user wants to change the heat level to something other than the default setting, by pressing input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heat level will decrease or increase by one level each time the key is pressed, and the range of the light-emitting portion (or the red light-emitting portion) of heat level display unit 67L will expand from left to right or shrink to the left accordingly, thereby displaying the heat level adjustment status to the user.

Next, we will explain Figure 54.
FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the left operating unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking appliance 1.
In Fig. 54, states A to C on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L. State A in Fig. 54 shows the state before operation starts.

As described in FIG. 53, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light-emitting display section 27L3 emits light as shown in state B of FIG.
In state B, the light-emitting display unit 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, pressing the left input key 43L2 decreases the flame power. The increase or decrease in flame power can be seen from the light-emitting state of the flame power display unit 67L located immediately behind it.

Next, the "single (heating) cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9 will be described.
For ease of explanation, a case in which the left heating unit 17HL is used will be explained.

When the input key 43L2 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, the heat level is specified down to level 1, and the integrated control device MC determines that the "keep warm" control mode has been specified, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays the "third specific screen" 30ST for keeping warm.

Furthermore, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "deep-fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific screen" 30ST corresponding to deep-fried food is displayed.
The "third specific screen 30ST" for deep-frying has a default temperature set to 180°C, so the text "Deep-frying 180°C" may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once more, the "third specific screen 30ST" corresponding to preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for making eggs, etc. may also be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A in Figure 54, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 displays a "schematic diagram of a container" 280 such as a pot, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a wide horizontal display area.

The words "Keep Warm (Left IH)" are displayed in the combined space of the second area 30M and the third area 30R, indicating that the temperature for keeping warm is approximately 80°C. An explanatory text 30F indicates that this is a recommended control menu for soups, etc. At this stage of the display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left display section 31L. However, as shown in FIG. 54, the temperature for keeping warm may be displayed as "80°C."

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in state B of FIG. 54, each time it is pressed, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" and displayed as in display screen 3B. The example of display screen 3B shows that "deep-frying" has been selected. After a certain period of time has elapsed in this state B, the control menu for the left heating unit 17HL is confirmed as "deep-frying" and the operation of the IH coil 17L begins. As explained in FIG. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiling" and "boiling water" in addition to "deep-frying".

In the case of display screen 3B, the default temperature is set to 180° C., so the left display section 31L displays the words "Deep frying 180° C." as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180°C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180°C. When 180°C is reached, a voice synthesizer 95 will notify the user by voice. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 will display "preheating temperature has been reached," which is expected to have the effect of encouraging the user to add ingredients, etc.

If you want to change the preheat (target) temperature in this frying (automatic) control menu, you can lower the temperature using input key 43L2 or raise the temperature using input key 43L3.

As can be seen from display screen 3B, display screen 30D combines second area 30M and third area 30R to form a wide horizontal display area, and in the combined space of second area 30M and third area 30R, a warning message 30G is displayed informing the user that preheating has started and that the user should not leave the vicinity of cooking appliance 1 during the preheating operation.

Next, in state B of FIG. 54, when input key 44L is pressed and "optimum temperature" is selected as another control menu, display screen 3C is displayed. As shown in display screen 3C, the "optimum temperature" control menu is a control mode recommended for heating a pan or the like to a set temperature (default temperature is 180°C) and for making eggs and the like. A recommendation 30H is displayed so that this meaning can be understood. At this display screen 3C stage, text information saying "Preheat 180°C" is displayed on the left display section 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST may be displayed on the individual display units (left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation units (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L).

Next, we will explain Figure 55.
55 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking appliance 1 is operated. The scene in which the composite cooking mode KM2 is executed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is a default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC, "Warm" is displayed in the center of the front-to-rear direction of the first area 30L.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific text 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menus), "Warm," is displayed large in the center of the front-rear direction of the first area 30L.

The word "oven" is displayed slightly smaller on the BK side behind the specific text 30J for "warm" that is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, and conversely, the word "microwave manual" is displayed slightly smaller on the FR side in front of it.

When the user selects the control menu, the next options are "Oven" and "Microwave Manual." If the user presses the input key 43M1 (left side) located in the position corresponding to the first area 31L once at this stage, the word "Warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "Microwave Manual."
Moreover, when the input key 43M1 (on the right side) located in the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the word "warm" changes to "oven."

In FIG. 55, the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen, displays target temperature information 30T of "80°C" in the second area 30M. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, if the food temperature is 80°C, microwave heating will automatically stop when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80°C.

To raise the target temperature (80°C) in the second area 30M to 85°C, operate the right input key 43M2 located just before the second area 30M once. Conversely, to lower the temperature to 75°C, operate the left input key 43M2 once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the target temperature (80°C) in the second area 30M. Also, a downward-pointing (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed below the 80°C number.

The shape of this symbol 30UP is similar to that of the input key 43M2 (on the right side) of the central operation unit 40M, so that the user can easily understand that to increase the temperature or heat, etc., they should operate the input key 43M2 on the right side.

Conversely, because the shape of the symbol 30DN and the (left) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are similar, it is easy for the user to understand that to lower the temperature or heat, etc., they should operate the left input key 43M2. This correspondence rule also applies to the relationship between the display in the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, efforts are made to prevent users from making input operations (pressing the wrong input key).

In FIG. 55, 30K is a heating source display section that displays in text that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As mentioned above, 30P is reference information that is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for warming side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for a few seconds on the display screen 30D.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 37, information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time in response to the operation of the input key 43M3.
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 30P that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").
Furthermore, when reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 55, if the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touched, the reference information 30P1 can be displayed in the third area 30R instead of the reference information 30P.

Next, we will explain Figure 56.
FIG. 56 is another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking appliance 1 is operated to implement the combined cooking mode KM2.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1, etc. shown in FIG. 56 are all types of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "manual range", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC in the collaborative cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "manual range") and the default values of the control conditions (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are displayed as a set.

As explained in FIG. 21 and FIG. 55, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST in FIG. 55 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as one type of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific text 30J changes to "Range Manual" and the display screen 5ST in FIG. 56 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, the specific text 30J of the control menu "Manual Range" is displayed large in the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L.

In the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M. In addition, the adjacent third area 30R displays microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds." As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, although it is included in the combined cooking mode, in this "manual range" it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 will be used, so the heating source display section 30K as shown in FIG. 55 (which displays in text the microwave heating source 189) does not need to be displayed.

If you want to lower the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of this display screen 5ST by one step to 200 W, you can do so by operating the left input key 43M2 once.

Similarly, to increase the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute 10 seconds, operate the right input key 43M3 once, located immediately before the third area 30M. Conversely, to decrease the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, operate the left input key 43M3 once.

In the display screen 5ST in Figure 56, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number for the output (500W) in the second area 30M. Similarly, a downward-pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed below the number 500W.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 56 shows the minimum heating power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum heat (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only heats greater than this can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number for the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. In other words, the symbol 30UP indicates that a time shorter than this cannot be selected.

Next, we will explain Figure 57.
5 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 is performed. That is, it shows a state in which the display contents of the second specific screen 30SC change from time to time in response to an input operation by the user.

When the display screen shown in FIG. 56 is displayed, by operating the left input key 43M1 corresponding to the first area 30L once, the setting can be changed from "Microwave manual" to "Pre-boil leafy vegetables" as shown in FIG. 57.

The display screen 6ST in Fig. 57 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, a specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "Pre-boil leafy vegetables", is displayed in a large size.
In the second area 30M, the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started in this state, heating will be performed at 500 W. Note that the microwave output value in this "standard" case may be 500 W, but it may be other than this. In other words, the "standard" heating level when using the microwave heating source 9 differs for each composite cooking menu, and is not always the same output (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 57, as explained in FIG. 55, the heating source display section 30K displays in text a message indicating that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As mentioned above, 30P is a recommendation message (reference information) indicating that this is a recommended control mode for heating side dishes, etc. The content of this recommendation message may be other additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for several seconds on the display screen 30D.

Instead of the recommendation text 30P in FIG. 57, as explained in FIG. 55, reference information 30P1 showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37 may be displayed each time in response to a user request.

Next, we will explain Figure 58.
58 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 is performed. It shows a state in which the display contents of the second specific screen 30SC change from time to time in response to an input operation by the user.
FIG. 58 shows a scene where a range grill (RG) control menu "RG cooking" is selected.

As described above, the "RG cooking" is a control menu that allows cooking using the heating chamber 113 by combining microwave heating and oven heating.
There are three types of patterns: microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heating is performed by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B, heating is performed in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. Note that "simultaneously" does not mean that the timing of the start and end of heating is exactly the same, but rather that the time periods of the heating operations overlap even partially.

The display screen 7ST1 shown in Figure 58 shows that the heating control (time control) pattern is to first drive both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 simultaneously to heat for one minute, and then stop the microwave heating and heat only with the oven heating source 188 for five minutes.

The reason why the term "range grill" is not used and the abbreviated form "RG" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. If more characters were to be displayed, the area occupied by the first area 30L would increase.

In the example display shown in Figure 58, heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes (however, if the time is short, it is displayed in 10-second units).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY shown in the third area 30R can be changed as appropriate by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 58, display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 alone is used to heat for one minute (microwave output 500 W) at first, and then the oven heating source 188 alone is used to heat for five minutes. This display screen 7ST2 is the default display screen. Note that display screen 7ST1, in which both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating edge 188 are driven for only the first minute, is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance ("Function setting" using input key 43KP as described above).

Next, we will explain Figure 59.
Figure 59 is a schematic plan view illustrating the state of the display screen 6ST displaying the control menu for "pre-boiling leafy vegetables" shown in Figure 57 at a predetermined position (center position between front and back) in the first area 30L, and the operation of the central operating unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 causes the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 to emit light in a unified color.

Thereafter, when the selection input key 43M1 for the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 57 is displayed as a default in the first area 30L.
At this display stage, all of the four input keys 43M1-43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can receive input, and therefore the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1-43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screen 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the start input key 43MS changes from continuous illumination to blinking, as shown by the dotted circle in FIG. 59. The presence of the input key 43MS is then highlighted with light.

When the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 59, the mode transitions to the combined cooking mode KM2. In the case of a heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation starts immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43R1 or 43L1 once after transitioning to the combined cooking mode KM2. Note that the same is true in the linked cooking mode KM3 after a command to transition to a cooking process using the induction heating source 9 is given (by the input key 43MS).

In this manner, in the first embodiment, a light-emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63) is provided which causes each of the light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light in the first light-emitting mode (continuous light emission) when the input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are valid.
The integrated control device MC is configured to, when displaying the reference information 30P, 30P1, cause only the light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the start selection section (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light emitting mode (flashing).

Because of the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state in which the device is waiting for a command to start the heating operation (in combined cooking mode KM2) by the blinking of the light-emitting unit 27M6. Note that the light-emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT, which can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations. Therefore, even after the heating operation has started, if the light-emitting unit 27M6 is emitting light, the input function of the input key 43MT is also valid, and a command to stop heating can be sent by touching it.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display drive circuit 63 may be configured to blink only the light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection element, from the beginning. The other light emitting elements 27M1 to 27M4 may be configured to emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection element.

(Basic operation during heating and cooking in the linked cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the combined cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 68.
Fig. 60 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M during cooperative cooking. Fig. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operations and steps when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 are performed. Fig. 62 is explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode. Fig. 63 is explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, a first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 60 is displayed.
Note that even if the input key 43M1 is pressed first and the operation for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in Figures 55 to 59 is halfway through, if the operation is at a stage before the input key 43MS is pressed, the input process for the combined cooking mode KM3 will start from the stage at which the input key 43MC is pressed. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP will be displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43M1 is touched next after the input key 43MC, further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 330 is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) to identify the food to be cooked that is the target of the multiple linked cooking modes KM3 (the linked cooking menu).

In FIG. 60, the number of "foods" that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is three. That is, there are three: "hamburger steak," "gratin," and "roast beef." In this way, the number of food items is called the "number of coordinated cooking menus."

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight collaborative cooking menus. Details are explained in Figures 82 and 83.

In FIG. 60, 330 is identification information, which in this embodiment 1 is information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).
There are eight pieces of identification information 330. In other words, the number of linked cooking menus is also eight. Reference numeral 331 denotes additional information presented to the user regarding cooking of an object to be cooked (e.g., a hamburger steak).

In this Figure 60, the additional information 331 indicates that "Press the start button to start heating the left IH." This means that by pressing the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M, induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS, followed by the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

As shown in FIG. 60, identification information 330A indicating the name of another food item (e.g., gratin) is displayed above the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Further, identification information 330B indicating the name of another food (e.g., roast beef) is displayed under the identification information 330. In the following description, when the identification information is collectively referred to, the reference numeral 330 is used.

Similar to the switching of the display of the "composite cooking mode KM2" described in Figures 55 to 59, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (e.g., hamburger steak) changes in a manner that it moves sequentially upward or downward. In other words, the identification information 330 can be displayed sequentially at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in the first area 30L by forward and backward movement.

In this embodiment 1, as mentioned above, there are a total of eight types of food items in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all food items will be cycled through. Conversely, if the right input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all food items will be cycled through. This will be explained in detail in Figures 82 to 84.

The default display for the collaborative cooking menu is "Hamburger" as shown in FIG.
Identification information 330 indicating the name of this food (hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). In this state, by operating the input key 43M1, identification information of another food can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 74).

In this embodiment 1, the "first specific screen" 30SP refers to the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 60. The display content of this first specific screen SP is not always the same because it changes from time to time depending on the input by the user to the central operation unit 40M and the operating state of the cooking appliance 1.

The main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG.
(1) The first area 30L displays the identification information 330. In principle, the identification information 330 is always displayed even when the heating process of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, there are some exceptions, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG. 93(B).
(2) In the first half of the horizontally long area formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a pair of heating unit specifying parts 333R, 333L corresponding to the heating units of the induction heating source 9 to be used are displayed. Either one of these heating unit specifying parts 333R, 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating unit specifying part 333R, 333L changes color or brightness, for example, to show the character "left" in white as shown in Fig. 60, to indicate the selected heating unit (either the right or the left).
(3) In the latter half of the horizontally long area formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a horizontally long band-shaped process display section 332 is displayed. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed from before the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until all cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed. In addition, the content is updated as the cooking process progresses, for example by displaying in black and white inversion or changing the color, so that the current cooking process can be identified. This will be described in detail later.
(4) Additional information 331 useful for cooking is displayed to the right of the heating unit identification sections 333R and 333L. In exceptional cases, the additional information 331 may be displayed over a wide area covering the entire integrated display section 30 (see display screen 10C in FIG. 93).

When the input key 43MS is pressed while the identification information 330 of the desired food item (e.g., hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, a command to execute the linked cooking mode KM3 for heating and cooking the food item is issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 73).

In addition, when cooking using the induction heating source 9 in cooking step 1 (e.g., hamburger steak), either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended depending on the linked cooking mode. For example, to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP for hamburger steak is as shown in FIG. 60, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes as the cooking process progresses and also changes depending on the food being cooked. The example shown in FIG. 60 explains that in order to start induction heating cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS.

Next, we will explain Figure 61.
In the flow chart for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 38, the operation from step ST4 onwards is shown in FIG.

After the display/notification step (ST4) that prompts the user to select the heating method, the user can select cooking using the right heating unit 17HR with the right operating unit 40R (SP1). Also, cooking using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected with the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Furthermore, after step (ST4), the central operation unit 40M can be used to select cooking using the microwave heating source 189 (SS1). The central operation unit 40M can also be used to select cooking using the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 (SS2).

Furthermore, the combined cooking mode KM2 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). Also, the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected (SS3B).

After the step (ST4), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be selected by operating the input keys 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In Fig. 61, CH1 is a first-layer selection means for selecting one of three types of heat sources. That is, the first-layer selection means includes a total of four input keys: input key 43MC and input key 43M1 of central operation unit 40M, and input key 43L1 and input key 43R1 of left operation unit 40L and right operation unit 40R, which are individual operation units.

As mentioned above, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single food item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; the same applies below) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions (hereinafter referred to as "control conditions") can be set independently.

More specifically, in the “cooperative cooking” in this embodiment 1, the heating locations for one food item are on top of top plate 15 and inside heating chamber 113 .
The two types of heating sources for which heating operation conditions can be set independently are the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 perform heating operations during the same time period or with a time difference.

In the first embodiment, the "coordinated cooking" is made up of two coordinated cooking operations: a "first coordinated cooking" and a "second coordinated cooking".
The "first coordinated cooking" refers to first cooking with the induction heating source 9 in the left heating section 17HL, and then cooking with microwaves inside the heating chamber 113. The cooking process of this "first coordinated cooking", i.e., the cooking sequence, is defined by the "first coordinated cooking mode" (SR2A).

On the other hand, "second coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that is first performed inside the heating chamber 113 using microwave heating or the oven heating source 188, or using these two heating sources in combination, and then cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL using the induction heating source 9.

The cooking steps of this "second coordinated cooking", i.e., the cooking sequence, are defined in the "second coordinated cooking mode" (SR2B).
In the case of the second collaborative cooking mode, normally (default setting condition), the integrated control device MC performs a process to restrict operation corresponding to menus other than the collaborative cooking mode KM3 for a specific period of time for either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, which are the heating sources used first.

The selection of the "first coordinated cooking mode" and the "second coordinated cooking mode" (SR2A, SR2B) is not made by the user each time he or she makes a decision to select, but is automatically selected (determined) by the integrated control device MC when the user selects identification information 330 (for example, the name of a dish called "hamburger steak") that corresponds to a coordinated cooking menu in the coordinated cooking mode.

In this embodiment 1, the heating parts of the induction heating source 9 that are used when the "coordinated cooking" menu is executed are both the right heating part 17HR and the left heating part 17HL. Therefore, if, for example, only the left heating part 17HL is being used during the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the right heating part 17HR can be used freely during the execution of the coordinated cooking mode, independent of coordinated cooking. However, if the power control part 72 determines that the total power consumption during coordinated cooking and the power consumption of the right heating part 17HR used separately exceeds the limit value, the integrated control device MC issues a command to prohibit the use of the right heating part 17HR or to forcibly reduce the heat.

In FIG. 61, CH2 is a second-level selection means for selecting a control menu. That is, in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the second-level selection means is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.

On the other hand, the second layer selection means in the composite cooking mode KM2 is the input key 43M1 of the central operation section 40M.
Furthermore, the second layer selection means in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 are the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L, and the right operation unit 40R has two input keys 43R2 and 43R3.

In other words, in this embodiment 1, the input keys for forwarding and backwards through the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and displaying them at a predetermined display position on the integrated display unit 30 are both input keys 43M1. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu or a control menu, the desired cooking menu, etc. can be displayed by the same input key 43M1, which provides good operability.

As shown in FIG. 61, when induction cooking has started (SR5), the user can operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to specify the heating power (power consumption) of the left heating unit 17HL (SR6). Also, by operating the input key 43L1, the heating operation can be stopped at any time (SR7).

In addition, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the heating and cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is not generally set in advance, so the user can heat and cook for any desired time.

In addition, at the stage where induction heating cooking has started using the right heating unit 17HR (SR5), the user can operate the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R to specify the heating power (power consumption) of the right heating unit 17HR (SR6).

Furthermore, when the right heating unit 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Furthermore, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When cooking process 1 by the left heating unit 17HL is ended by input key 43L1, the cooking process in the linked cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next cooking process 2 (described in detail in FIG. 64).

When the induction heating process is completed during the cooking process of the first coordinated cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When a command to resume this coordinated cooking is issued (SR9), it may be possible to increase or decrease the microwave output value during microwave heating by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 on the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there are also cases where the microwave output is fixed at, for example, 500 W as the cooking process proceeds.

When microwave heating cooking (cooking process 2) is ended by input key 43MT, all cooking processes in the linked cooking mode KM3 end at this point (SR11). In other words, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 becomes the same as if it had been canceled. However, if cooking process 3 follows cooking process 2, the setting state of the linked cooking mode KM3 is maintained.

Although this is not a cooking step of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the user may operate the central operation unit 40M from this point onwards to further perform microwave heating cooking (using the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1).

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 61 show the operation steps when microwave cooking and oven cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, by operating the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M, the control menu (11 types) of the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 for microwave heating and oven heating is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 34).

Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, the control menu of one of the composite cooking mode KM2 or the control menu of the single control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3). However, as described above, since only the composite cooking mode KM2 can be selected on the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40, the third specific screen 30ST is not displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Next, by pressing the input key 43MS, execution of one of the composite cooking modes KM2 or the independent control mode KM1 is commanded (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). Note that in the explanation of FIG. 34, the overall explanation was given as a composite cooking mode, but strictly speaking, menus such as "Microwave manual" are control patterns of the independent cooking mode KM1, but cannot be selected when one wants to select the composite cooking mode KM2. In other words, in reality, they also include the control menu of the independent heating mode KM1. This was explained in FIG. 37.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the above-mentioned control menu "Range Grill (RG) Cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit, and this "RG Cooking" is a single control menu (of the combined cooking mode KM2) that combines microwave cooking and grill cooking.

On the other hand, by operating the same input key 43M1, "warm" can be selected, but this is cooking using the microwave heating source 189 alone, and is one control menu of the single cooking mode KM1. Due to the constraints of the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the corresponding third specific screen 30ST cannot be displayed.

After the microwave heating or oven heating is started, the heating conditions (for example, heating time) may be changed (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, a command is issued to stop the execution of one control menu (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 61 show operation steps when induction heating cooking is performed using the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, cooking using the right heating unit 17HL can be selected (SP2). Then, even if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is not operated, the induction heating control menu is automatically confirmed after a certain period of time (SP3). Note that the "induction heating control menu" here refers to the IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the cooking menu of the "combined cooking mode KM3" displayed on the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 by operating the input key 43MC.

The execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
The term "single cooking" in step SP5 means that the heating source used is the induction heating source 9 alone.
If, after induction heating has started, the user operates input key 43R2 or 43R3 to command a change in the heating power of induction heating, the integrated control device MC changes the heating power, which is one of the control conditions (SP6).

In both the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the command to start the cooking process using microwave heating is input key 43MS. Also, the command to start the cooking process in the independent cooking mode KM1, in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are each driven independently, is also input key 43MS.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, there is no dedicated switch (button or input key) for the induction heating source 9 to command the start of cooking, but a dedicated switch or input key (in addition to input key 43MS) may be provided.

Pressing input key 43R1 commands the right heating unit 17HR to stop (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, pressing input key 43L1 is sufficient. In this way, input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are used both when selecting a heating unit to start operation, and when ending cooking.

Next, Fig. 62 will be described. Fig. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9. It is also a schematic diagram showing that the operation of the heating source used during cooperative cooking is restricted.
The coordinated cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 62 is the "first coordinated cooking mode" described in FIG.

In this example, the "first coordinated cooking mode" uses the induction heating source 9 in cooking process 1, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated in cooking process 2. Also, in cooking process 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 62, one collaborative cooking mode KM3 is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the collaborative cooking mode until the input key 43MS is subsequently pressed.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1). Note that this cooking step 1 does not include a "preheating step" in which the food to be cooked is not actually heated.
P3 is a pause period (also called a "transition period TR") during which the operation of the heating means used in cooking step 1 is temporarily stopped and heating by the other heating means is started in order to switch from cooking using the heating means used in cooking step 1 to cooking in cooking step 2, which uses a different heating means. The length of this pause period depends on the timing of the user's operation. In other words, the earlier the user issues a command to start cooking step 2, the shorter this pause period will be.
P4 is a heating and cooking period (cooking process 2) by the heating means used in cooking process 2 (the heat source may be either single or multiple).

In this embodiment 1, a "cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4" is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail later, but an example of a cooking menu that utilizes the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of this "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the heating operation of the preheating process does not stop at the start of cooking process 1 (that is, the energization for induction heating in the preheating process and the energization of the heating source for cooking process 2 are performed simultaneously in parallel during a certain time period).

In other words, in the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4, the heating source (induction heating source 9 in the above explanation) that has been operating before cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of cooking process 1, and during cooking process 1, the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or microwave heating source 189 may be driven simultaneously.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be based on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM3 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM4.

As is clear from FIG. 62, when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (on the first specific screen 30SP).

Specifically, among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L, at least the input key 43L1 is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This "disabled" means that a valid command signal is not sent from the input key 43L1 to the integrated control device MC, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the integrated control device MC does not process the command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

On the other hand, even when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR can be used. This is because the integrated control device MC initially determines (by the control program) that the right heating unit 17HR will not be used in the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Therefore, the above-mentioned "prohibition of use" process is not performed on the right operation unit 40R. There is no restriction on this even when other cooking is being performed.

Therefore, in the induction heating source 9, only the left heating section 17HL is "occupied" by the selection of the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the induction heating source 9 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the left side) of the two heating sections is "restricted." Note that if the right heating section 17HL is not being used for other cooking, this right heating section 17HR may also be placed in an occupied state. Note that the control program may be changed to place the right heating section in the "occupied" state when the input key 43MS is pressed after the selection of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is completed.

Here, the use of the induction heating source 9 will be described, focusing on the function of the input operation unit 40.
As described above, the input operation unit has the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
After the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L has started, this input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time. That is, when the input key 43L1 is pressed once at first, it has the function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when the input key 43L1 is pressed once again after induction heating has started, it can instantly stop the heating operation.

On the other hand, the input operation section has an input key 44L. This input key 44L is a touch-type input key with which a "control menu" for induction heating cooking by the left heating section 17HL can be selected.
In this case, the "control menu" includes "boiling water,""boiling,""cookingrice,""frying(automatic)," etc., from which only one can be selected.

To select cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. When the input key 43MC is pressed, if the above-mentioned "permission conditions" are met, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.
When this first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 62), or when a "start input command" for switching to the cooperative cooking mode is entered using the input key 43MS (see FIG. 63), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, and at the same time, the heating source to be used becomes "occupied."

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the "occupied state" will be described.
There are two methods by which the integrated control device MC can occupy the left heating section 17HL.
(1) First Method:
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, and the input functions of the other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, and 44L are all disabled.
In this case, after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed, the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L begins.
Therefore, when the induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) that has started is to be stopped, the input key 43L1 should be pressed once. In addition, at the same time as the start of the supply of high-frequency power, the input functions of the input keys 43L2, 43L3, etc. that have been disabled are restored.
Moreover, in this state, to start heating again for additional heating, the input key 43L1 is pressed once again (the cooperative cooking mode is not cancelled even at this stage).

(2) Second Method:
The input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, and 43L4 in the left heating unit 17HL are disabled, except for the input key 44L, which remains enabled even when the cooperative cooking mode is entered.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is finalized only when the input key 44L is pressed once after the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Thereafter, when the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L starts and induction heating starts, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, etc. are immediately restored. Therefore, the induction heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43L1 once. Moreover, the induction heating operation can be resumed by pressing the input key 43L1 again (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not released even at this stage).
These will be explained later in FIG.

In both the first and second methods, the input function of the input key 43L1 is disabled until a certain time in order to prevent the left heating unit 17HL from being selected.
In the following description, the first method will be described as an example, but even if the second method is adopted, there is no impact on the basic effect obtained by the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 62, after induction heating has started in cooking step 1 (P2), the user can increase or decrease the heat by operating the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L.

In cooking process 1, it is necessary to first press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) on the left operation unit 40L only once, at which point a command to start induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC.

It is also possible to omit the operation of the heating start command using the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, and have induction heating cooking start at a fixed heat level (low or standard heat level) a fixed time (e.g. 10 seconds) after the input using the input key 43MS.

Furthermore, in cooking process 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching input key 43L1 on left operation unit 40L.
When the heating operation is stopped, cooking step 1 ends immediately, but the combined cooking mode itself is not cancelled.

Therefore, the heating operation (linked cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation to restart the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode KM1 as described in Figures 53 (A) and (B), and it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 once again to restart cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Furthermore, if the user wishes to specify (change) the heat after the induction heating operation has started, by pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heat will be decreased or increased by one level each time it is pressed, allowing the desired heat to be set.

As shown in FIG. 62, after cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated food is moved to the heating chamber 113. It is possible to place the metal dish used during induction heating directly in the heating chamber 113 and heat it with microwaves, but if the food is completely surrounded by metal, it is not possible to heat the food inside with microwaves, so it is necessary to transfer it to an open metal container, heat-resistant glass, or a porcelain container.

During the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwaves generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 are guided into the heating chamber 113, and the heating and cooking period (cooking step 2) (P4) begins.

After microwave heating is started by input key 43MS, the user can set the microwave heating control conditions as desired by operating various input keys 43M2, 43M3 on central operation unit 40M (the default values can be changed). However, depending on the individual food being cooked that is the target of linked cooking mode KM3, there may be some restrictions on changing the control conditions. For example, the microwave heating output is basically 500W, so the control program is set up so that the user cannot increase or decrease this output at will during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 62, after cooking step 2 (P4), there are two types: the cooking step ends automatically when a predetermined time (default time) specified in the control program has elapsed without the need to set the microwave heating control conditions (e.g., heating time), and the cooking step ends at any stage by the user operating the input key 43MT on the central operation unit 40M.

In addition, once cooking step 2 is stopped, it is treated as if all cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 have been completed. Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and as in the case of implementing the combined cooking mode KM2, the input key 43M1 can be operated again to set a control menu such as "microwave manual" to perform additional heating and cooking. Note that if the operating program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 expects cooking step 3 to follow cooking step 2, the cooking mode will proceed to cooking step 3 after a transition period TR following cooking step 2.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this coordinated cooking mode KM3, only the left heating unit 17HL of the first heating source 9 is used, so there are no restrictions on the use of the right heating unit 17HR during the preparation period (P1) through cooking step 2 (P4). Therefore, during cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, another heating cooking can be performed simultaneously in parallel using the right heating unit 17HR. For example, the right operating unit (first operating unit on the right side) 40R can be used to start, for example, "boiling water" in the IH control menu using the right heating unit 17HR.

Next, we will explain Figure 63.
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the combined cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source, and is an example in which the configuration of FIG. 62 is slightly modified.
FIG. 63 shows a slightly modified timing from FIG. 62 in which the operation of the heat source used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) starts to be restricted in the coordinated cooking mode KM3.

In the example shown in FIG. 63, at the stage of selecting the coordinated cooking mode KM3, i.e., when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP), the left heating source 17HL is not yet occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL is operable for input, and cooking from the IH control menu (e.g., "boiling water") can be selected in the single cooking mode KM1.

In other words, during this preparation period P1, it is possible to input a new (single cooking mode KM1) using the left operation unit 40L.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 of the various input keys on the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This is different from FIG. 62. All input keys on the left operation unit 40L may be disabled. Note that the meaning of "disable" in FIG. 63 is the same as that explained in FIG. 62.

Next, the basic operations of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in this embodiment 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 64 to 70.

Figure 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys and cooking steps in the input operation unit 40 in chronological order from the selection to the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operations and displays in chronological order until the transition between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Figure 66 is explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 67 is explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 68 is explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 69 is flowchart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 70 is flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode in a heating cooker.

Referring to Figure 64 .
FIG. 64 shows the case of a coordinated cooking mode KM3 (coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4) in which cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating section 17HL and cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113.
In Fig. 64, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to the start and end of a cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, pressing 43MS transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the heating cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating unit 17HL, cooking step 1 is carried out in the left heating unit 17HL.
For this reason, it is necessary to press the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L as shown in Fig. 64. Note that, since the control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed in the default settings, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 64, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

When the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the induction heating operation stops at this stage and the heating and cooking period P2 ends.

Next, the heating pause period P3 is entered. In other words, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all enabled (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame).

In this embodiment 1, we will explain what it means that "when the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M is restored, and the start and end of the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is performed according to the command from the central operation unit 40M."

The above "restoring input functions" does not mean that the functions are unconditionally restored immediately after cooking process 1 is completed. For example, if the door 114 remains closed from before the end of cooking process 1 until after it is completed, the integrated control device MC does not enable the functions of the disabled input keys. In other words, the functions are restored to their active state when the door 114 is opened. In this way, the conditions and timing for restoring the input functions are appropriately determined to suit the actual user operations (including opening and closing the door) in consideration of the user's operations for the next cooking process 2, etc.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all maintained as valid, so the left heating unit 17HL may be used for other cooking during the transition period TR or the heating and cooking period P4 (in this case, the control menu is selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches input keys 43M1 or 43MS on the central operation unit 40M, cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 starts. Then, by pressing input key 43MT, cooking step 2 can be ended at any time.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released as soon as cooking process 2 ends.

Therefore, if you want to perform additional heating again in the heating chamber 113 using the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 immediately after the end of cooking step 2, you can operate the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc., and the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2. However, since the central operation unit 40M does not allow you to directly select the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 to resume the single cooking mode KM1, you must first select the combined cooking mode KM2 and then select, for example, "warm" at the control menu selection stage.

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (e.g., within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode, and the process may wait for the user's input (operation of the input key 43MS).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can remove the food from the heating chamber 113 and check the doneness, etc., and if it is not heated enough, he or she can immediately return the food to the heating chamber 113 and touch the input key MS waiting for additional operation by the user. This method also improves usability for the user.

Referring to Figure 65 .
The operation procedure for transitioning to the composite cooking mode KM2 requires four inputs as shown in Fig. 65. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3, and 43MS. When transitioning to the composite cooking mode KM2, the input key 43R1 or 43L1 must be operated to actually perform the heating operation of the induction heating source 9.

On the other hand, the operation procedure to switch to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 requires four inputs as shown in FIG. 65. In other words, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS.

When switching to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 as described above, the user operates the input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M, and then operates the input key 43R1 on the right operation unit 40R to operate the right heating unit 17HR first.

When the user selects to use the left heating unit 17HL in the coordinated cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

In this way, after switching to the linked cooking mode KM3, the start of the heating operation can be commanded from the operation unit corresponding to the heating source. The heating stop operation can also be performed from the same operation unit, so that the user does not get confused about the location of the operation unit or input keys when starting and stopping heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 66.
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing various steps in the coordinated cooking mode on the horizontal axis, and the operation of the main components such as user operations and the display unit on the vertical axis.

FIG. 66 shows the steps up to the start of cooking operation in the combined cooking mode KM3.
In item A on the left side of Fig. 66, "user operation" refers to various input operations in central operation unit 40M and right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" process, five operations A1 to A5 are performed.

"Pressing relay button" in A1 refers to operating the input key 43MC to select the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
The "menu selection" of A2 refers to the selection of a desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made using the input key 43M1.

The "heat source selection" of A3 is an operation for selecting either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed by the input key 43M2. In this example, the case where the right heating section 17HR is selected is shown.
"Pressing the start button" in A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
"Pressing the right IH input button" in A5 refers to operating the input key 43R1 of the right operation section 40R.

In item B on the left side of Fig. 66, "cooking process" indicates the type of process up to the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The process here is different from the cooking process 1 and cooking process 2.
"Selecting a coordinated cooking mode" in B1 indicates a process of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 corresponding to that object.
"Grill heat source on standby" in B2 indicates a period during which the oven heat source 188 is on standby. "Heating" in B3 indicates a period during which induction heating is performed by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 66, "left IH display unit" refers to the left side display unit 31L.
"Off (operation not accepted)" in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left display unit 31L. As described above, until the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66), the user is performing input operations while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user will use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left display unit 31 is not started as part of putting the left heating unit 17HL into an "occupied state." At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

"Off (accepts normal operations)" in C2 means that no information is displayed on the left display unit 31L. However, after the input commanding the start of the transition to the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP has been completed. Therefore, it is determined that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, and there is no longer any possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, there is no need to put the left heating unit 17HL in an "occupied state." For this reason, at this stage, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is made available for acceptance. By actually pressing the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L, the control menu (for example, "boil water") of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 66, "Right IH display unit" refers to the display content of the right side display unit 31R.
"Off (no operation accepted)" in D1 means that no information is displayed on the right display unit 31R.
As described above, until the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66), the user is performing input operations while viewing the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right display unit 31 is not started in conjunction with the right heating unit 17HR being in an "occupied state." At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

Thereafter, when the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has already ended.
The "heating standby state" of D2 refers to a state in which the right heating unit 17HR is waiting for a user operation A5 after the user has confirmed that the right heating unit 17HR will be used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, this is the stage in which the right heating unit 17HR is waiting for a command to start cooking process 1.

"Preheat display" in D3 means displaying information on the preheating state on the right display section 31R. For example, it is to display information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature (e.g., 180°C) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG. 66, “central display section” refers to the display content of integrated display section 30 .
The "initial screen of coordinated cooking" in E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 94).
"Change menu" at E2 means operating the input key 43M1 to select one desired food item from the linked cooking modes and to select the corresponding linked cooking menu (see FIG. 95(A)).

"Change selected heating source (select right IH)" in E3 refers to selecting the right heating unit 17HR while viewing the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made using the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 95(B)).
The "right IH input button press guidance display" in E4 means that a message is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 indicating that the input key 43R1 located on the right operation unit 40R must be operated to start coordinated cooking. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 to start cooking step 1 of coordinated cooking (see FIG. 96(A)).

The "IH preheating display" in E5 indicates that the right heating section 17HR has started preheating. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180°C is reached. In contrast, the integrated display section (central display section) 30 displays information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress" or "Preheating completed" in the first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 96 (B)).

In item F on the left side of FIG. 66, “notification means” refers to the notification contents notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .
As shown by F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooking is performed, a total of five audio notifications are issued.
The notification content of F1 is, for example, "This is a hamburger steak. It will be cooked on the induction cooker and then finished on the range grill." In other words, the first specific screen 30SP also displays the food to be cooked and the cooking process, but the same information is also notified to the user by voice.

The content of the notification in F2 is, for example, "This is fried chicken. It will be cooked in the range grill and then finished on the induction cooker." In other words, in response to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of the selection of the linked cooking mode and an explanation of the cooking process are displayed in real time.

The content of the notification for F3 is, for example, "Right IH." In other words, because the user selected right IH (right heating unit) 17HR through operation A3, the result of the heating source selection is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "Press the right IH input button to start heating." In other words, the user is asked to perform operation A3 of menu selection, followed by operation A4 of the start button (input key 43MS). When this operation A4 is performed, the user is asked to operate the "input key" on the right operation unit 40L. Note that the input key referred to here is input key 43R1.

The notification content of F5 is, for example, "Preheating the pan to 180°C."
After coordinated cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR begins, and preheating operation is started so that the temperature of the heated object N, such as a pot placed on the top plate 15, reaches the target temperature of 180°C, and this fact is notified.

In item G on the left side of Figure 66, "left IH drive unit" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of Figure 66, "right IH drive unit" refers to the operation of inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating step" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven and a preheating step is being performed.

In item J on the left side of Figure 66, "range grill drive unit" refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the power supply to the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B that make up the oven heating source 188, and the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 of the microwave heating source 189. In other words, it collectively refers to the operation of the drive unit that performs the above-mentioned "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

Next, we will explain Figure 67.
Fig. 67 shows a case where "hamburger steak" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. As in Fig. 66, this is an explanatory diagram in which the horizontal axis indicates various steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the vertical axis indicates user operations and the operation of the main components such as the display unit.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 67 are the same as those explained in FIG.
In Figure 67, the operation content of A11 is to start preheating in order to cook the hamburger steak, and then to perform cooking process 1 (the corresponding part is cooking process B11 in Figure 64), by first selecting the left heating unit 17HL and pressing the input key 43L1.

"Press IH OFF/ON button" in A12 means that the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL as the input switch and presses the input key 43L1 to end cooking process 1 of the hamburger steak.

The "open grill door" in A13 is an operation in which the user opens the door 114.
"Press the start button" in A14 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the time button" in A15 refers to pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

"Press the start button" in A16 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the cancel button (canceling grill heating in the middle of the process)" in A17 means pressing the oven heat source 188.
"Pressing the cancel button" in A18 refers to pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, the series of heating operations in the coordinated cooking mode is all terminated (the coordinated cooking mode is cancelled).

In item B (cooking process) of Figure 67, "IH heating process" in B11 indicates the induction heating process in the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
The "grill heating standby step" of B12 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is on standby until the user performs the operation A14.
The “grill heating process” of B13 indicates a heating process using an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189.

The "grill heating extension standby process" in B14 indicates a standby period during which the grill heating process in B13 is once completed, and the user is awaited to determine whether or not to command an extension process.
The "extended heating step" of B15 is a step in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven again (power is started) because the user performed operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extended standby step of B14. The extended heating step is started by pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 67, the "extended heating process" B15 can be performed multiple times, not just once, if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the "cancel button" of A18 is pressed, the coordinated cooking mode is cancelled at the time of the cancel operation of input key 43MT (to cancel the coordinated cooking mode and combined cooking mode), so to cook again in heating chamber 113, it is necessary to operate oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display) of FIG. 67, "Preheat display" of C11 refers to displaying the target preheat temperature in the preheating process on the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L (see FIG. 87 and FIG. 89). For example, the preheat target temperature (e.g. 180°C) is displayed.

C11a to C11d show progress display 1 to progress display 4. For example, progress display 1 is a display that says "preheating", and "progress display 4" is a display that says "suitable temperature". This "suitable temperature" indicates that the object to be heated (such as a pan) N has been heated to the preheat target temperature (for example, 180°C). During the preheating display (C11), the progress displays 1 to 4 (C11a to C11d) are displayed in accordance with the progress of preheating (temperature rise). In this FIG. 67, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating unit 17HL is displayed on the left display unit 31L.

The "cooking process" in C12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is cooking the object N after it has reached the preheating target temperature (e.g., 180°C). In other words, it indicates that cooking process 1 has begun. As is clear from the cooking processes in C11 and C12, no user operation is performed during this period (no operation is required). In other words, after operation A11 is performed, no user operation input is required before operation A12.

Item E (center display section) in FIG. 67 shows the display contents of the integrated display section 30.
The "IH preheating display" of E11 displays on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display unit 30 that preheating has begun by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 97(A)).

In FIG. 67, the "IH heating display" of E12 indicates that preheating has been completed and heating is possible with the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 97 (B)). In other words, it indicates that the stage is now moving on to cooking process 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

The "grill door opening and closing operation guidance display" in E13 prompts the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber (heating compartment) 113 (where cooking process 2 will be performed) since induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed (see FIG. 99). One example of additional information 331 in this scene is a display that reads, "Please place food in the heating compartment."

As shown in FIG. 98, if the user wishes to stop the induction heating operation using the left IH coil 17HL at any time during the induction heating operation, additional information 331 stating "Press the left IH on/off button" may be displayed. The "on/off button" here refers to the input key 43L1.

In FIG. 67, E14's "alternating display of heat power change display and start prompt display" indicates that the heat power for range grill cooking (combined heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further indicates that grill cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 100).

In FIG. 67, the "grill heating indicator" E15 indicates that the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2) (see FIG. 101).

In this embodiment 1, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, and the food being cooked is heated from both the inside and outside at the same time by the synergistic effect of the microwaves and radiant heat.

In FIG. 67, E16's "alternating display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" indicates that the grill heating process B13 has ended, and that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3) and grill heating can be performed again (see FIG. 102 (A)).

If the user does not wish to perform extended heating, the display indicates that the user can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to end the linked cooking mode without performing extended heating (see FIG. 102 (B)). These two types of information are displayed alternately on the first specific screen 30SP, for example at intervals of a few seconds.

The "time setting display" of E17 displays the result of setting the extended time when the cooking time is extended using input key 43M3 and grill heating is performed again (see FIG. 103). After this time setting display, the aforementioned "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 67, the notification content of F11 is "Preheating the pan to 180°C will begin." This is a voice notification that the preheating process has begun by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating process B11.

In FIG. 67, the notification of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking." This notifies the user that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (e.g. 180°C) and prompts the user to start heating using the right operation unit 40R.

FA1 in FIG. 67 is a notification of the first reference information. In the following explanation, this "first reference information" FA1 will be referred to as "reference information 1." The gist of this reference information may be displayed in the form of text or graphics on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 1."

The notification of reference information 1 (FA1) is made when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the start of cooking process 1 (G12 in FIG. 67) by the left IH coil 17L. This will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 69.

In FIG. 67, the notification for F13 is "The pan is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when placing food inside." This is to alert the user that cooking process 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR has finished, and that food should be moved to the heating chamber 113 for cooking process 2, and that the top plate 15, etc. are hot.

The notification content of F14 is "Press the start button to start heating the range grill." This notifies the user that range grill cooking can be started by operating the input key 43MS.
The notification content of F15 is "Starting standard range grill finish." This notifies that cooking step 2 of the range grill will start and cooking (e.g., hamburger steak) will be completed. Note that "Starting standard" means that the heat during range grill cooking will be "standard."

FA2 in FIG. 67 is a notification of second reference information. In the following explanation, this "second reference information" FA2 will be referred to as "reference information 2." The gist of this reference information may be displayed in the form of text or graphics on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 2."

The notification of reference information 2 (FA2) is made when a predetermined time (second elapsed time TN2) has elapsed since the start of cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 67) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113. Or, it is made when a predetermined temperature (second rising temperature TN2) has been exceeded since the start of cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 67). These will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 69.

The notification F16 informs the user that cooking on the range grill has finished and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). It also informs the user that the linked cooking mode KM3 will end without extended heating if the user operates the cancel button (input key 43MT). In addition, it warns the user that the heating chamber 113 is hot and that the user should wait until it cools down before cleaning the interior.

The notification F17 notifies the user that after the cooking process (B13) of the range grill is finished, the user will operate the extended heating to start heating for an additional 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After this notification F17, the notification F16 is issued again. If the user again commands extended heating, notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) of FIG. 67, G11 indicates the induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows the induction heating operation for cooking process 1 which is carried out following the preheating process.

In item J (range grill driving section) of Figure 67, J11 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and cooking process 2 is carried out during this period.
J12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are activated for the extended heating step.

Next, we will explain Figure 68. Figure 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various steps and operations when "fried chicken", one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode. As with Figures 66 and 67, the horizontal axis shows various steps in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis shows the user's operations and the operation of the main components such as the display unit.

In FIG. 68, the operation content of A21 in item A (user operation) is to first select the left heating unit 17HL and press the input key 43L1 to cook fried chicken. This starts the preheating process (see G21 in FIG. 68).

The operation of A22 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113. At this stage, induction heating (preheating) has already started in the left heating section 17HL.
The operation of A23 is called "pressing the start button" and is performed by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By the operation of A23, the "range grill driving unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. Note that the "range grill driving unit" refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating unit 17HL is completed, the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" in the heating chamber 113 is started.
In this way, since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately even if the oven heating source 188 is energized, the time to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is determined taking into account the time required to raise the temperature.

The operation A24 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating process B23 by the "range grill driving unit" is completed. This allows the food to be removed from the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, before the door 114 is opened and the food to be cooked (food) is removed from the heating chamber 113, the cooking utensil for deep-fried chicken (food to be heated N such as a dedicated pan) is heated in the left heating section 17HL (cooking step G22) (no cooking oil is poured in this case). Therefore, when the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 is placed on the preheated food to be cooked N, the cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9 is started (cooking oil, seasonings, etc. may be added at this point).
.

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M3 called the time button in order to perform the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" again.
The operation A26 is to press the input key 43MS to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation A27 is to press the input key 43MT to end the grill heating process B23 at any time during the process, thereby canceling the cooperative cooking mode.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 68, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is an IH preheating step, which is a step of preheating with the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and then waits for the operation A23 to start heating.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is cooking process 2 in which heating is performed by the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user in the IH heating process.

Next, item C (left IH display unit) will be described with reference to FIG.
The display C21 indicates that preheating is being performed by the left heating section 17HL.
Displays C21a to C21d are displayed in sequence during the period of display C21, with C21a being progress display 1, C21b being progress display 2, C21c being progress display 3, and C21d being progress display 4.
The display C22 indicates completion of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL (cooking process).

In FIG. 68, item E (center display portion) will be described.
The display E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the preheating operation is being performed by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 104(A)).
E22 is a grill door opening/closing operation guidance display, which prompts the user to open the door 114 and place the food to be cooked (food) into the heating chamber 113 to perform the grill heating step B23 (see Figure 104 (B)).

E23 alternates between a heat level change indication and a start prompt indication, and indicates that when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit," the heat level can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing input key 43MS (see FIG. 105 (A)).

E24 is a range heating display, which indicates that the cooking heat can be changed when driving the "range grill driving unit", and after cooking has started, displays the remaining time until completion, etc. (see Figure 106).
E25, as shown in Figures 107 (A) and (B), alternates between displaying an extension operation guide and displaying the completion of IH preheating.
After the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit," is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2), and a message is displayed indicating that the heating and cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it is displayed that preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has been completed. That is, these two types of information are displayed alternately in the first specific screen 30SP at intervals of, for example, several seconds.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit," will be performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see Figure 108).

Item F (notification means) will be described with reference to FIG.
The notification F21 is, for example, a voice message such as "Preheating pan to 180° C." that notifies the user of the preheat target temperature and that the preheating process has begun by the left heating unit 17HL.
The notification of F22 is "The left IH will soon reach the set temperature. Please put food inside." This notifies the user that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target temperature (e.g., 180°C) and urges the user to put food or the like into the heating chamber 113 so that range grill cooking can begin in the heating chamber 113.

The notification of F23 is "Press the start button to start heating in the microwave." That is, it notifies the user that microwave grill cooking should be started by pressing the input key 43MS.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "The range is starting to cook at standard temperature." In this case, "standard temperature" means that the heat is at a standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 68 is a notification of the third reference information. In the following explanation, this "third reference information" will be referred to as "reference information 3." Note that the gist of this reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed in the integrated display unit 30 using text or graphics. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 3."

The notification of reference information 3 is made when a predetermined time (third elapsed time TN3) has elapsed since cooking process 1 (B23 in FIG. 65) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by user operation input (A23 in FIG. 68). This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 70.

The F25 notification is related to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, it may say, "Cooking on the range grill has finished. You can extend the cooking time by pressing the time button. Please remove food from the oven and start cooking on the induction heater."

The F26 notification informs you that cooking on the range grill will start again after cooking on the range grill has finished. For example, the notification "Range grill starting for 2 minutes" is made. This means that because the extension time has been set to 2 minutes, cooking on the range grill will start for the next 2 minutes.

FA5 in FIG. 68 is a notification of the fifth reference information. In the following explanation, this "fifth reference information" FA5 will be referred to as "reference information 5." Note that the gist of this reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 using text or graphics. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 5."

Reference information 5 is notified when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed since cooking process 3 (B23 in FIG. 68) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by user operation input (A26 in FIG. 68). This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 70.

In FIG. 68, in item G (left IH drive unit), the preheating process of G21 is a preheating process by the left heating unit 17HL, and indicates the drive period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 68, G22 also indicates the period of heating operation (driving inverter circuit 81L) for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (range grill drive section), the heating step J21 indicates the drive period by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. Note that the combined cooking mode described in FIG. 68 is for cooking "fried chicken," so in reality, only the microwave heating source 189 needs to be driven.

Next, we will explain Figures 69 to 71.
69 to 71 show the process by which the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" are notified when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 69 shows a case where hamburger steak is cooked in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart corresponding to the various steps of the combined cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the cooking step 1 of the hamburger steak is performed, for example, by the left heating unit 17HL, and the cooking step 2 is performed by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, the cooking step 2 uses both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking process 1) is started on the object N that has already been heated to the preheat temperature (e.g., 180°C) by the left heating unit 17HL, and as explained in FIG. 67, a voice notification F12 is issued saying, "The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please begin cooking." Note that this "set temperature" refers to the preheat temperature set by the user. The default value is 180°C. Also, this cooking process 1 does not begin from the point in time when the IH coil 17L begins induction heating. The start point is when the object N that has reached the preheat temperature is placed on the object (in this case, a hamburger steak) and heating begins.

In the next step SA2, measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
The elapsed time TN1 is measured by a clock circuit 96.

At Step SA3, it is judged whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded.
When grilling a hamburger steak, three things are important: the amount (weight) of the hamburger steak, the grilling time, and the grilling heat. If the standard time for cooking a given amount of hamburger steak (e.g., 300 g) at a standard heat level (e.g., 1000 W) is "7 minutes," then the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

If the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know the approximate timing for turning the hamburger steak upside down (flipping it over) halfway through, in the above example, the notification FA1 at the point when five minutes have elapsed will let the user know the timing for turning it upside down. The actual notification content is, for example, "Five minutes have elapsed since heating began. Heating will be completed in two minutes."

In the case of other linked cooking modes, the notification will also let you know when to add water, seasonings, or cooking liquid during cooking, for example.

If the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed, step SA3 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SA4, where the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1.
In synchronization with this, reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed on the left display section 31L.

After step SA4, a decision is made as to whether the user wants to stop the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if a stop command is given, the process proceeds to step SA6.

In step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As described in FIG. 67, a voice notification F13 is issued to the effect that "The pot is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself when placing food inside the oven."

The user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, a hamburger steak) into the heating chamber 113. In this case, if the metal pot used for induction heating is not to be used, tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a dedicated tray 145 (not shown) is used instead. The hamburger steak is placed in such tableware or tray and then placed in the heating chamber 113.

The object N used for induction heating may be placed directly in the heating chamber 113 for cooking. However, this is limited to objects N that can be cooked using microwaves (radio wave transparent or open type).

When the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is closed, in the next step SA7, as explained in FIG. 67, a voice notification F14 is issued to the effect that "Press the start button to begin heating the range grill."

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes "Yes", and range grill cooking is started as cooking process 2.
As explained in FIG. 67, a voice notification F15 saying "Standard oven grill finish setting is about to begin" is issued (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189 that serves as the heat source for the range grill is driven at a standard heating power. For example, as described above, operation is started at an output of 500 W.
Additionally, upper heater 163A of oven heating source 188, which serves as the heat source for the range grill, begins to be energized at 1000 W.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the point in time of step SA10 is started (SA11). Then, when it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has been exceeded (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, where the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the second reference information (reference information 2). In synchronization with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 2 (FA2).

The notification content of reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has passed since the start of cooking process 2. If the standard time for cooking process 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, by setting the elapsed time TN2 to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the end of cooking process 2 can be known 30 seconds before the end of cooking process 2.

It is generally said that once ingredients are heated to a certain degree, the degree of heating of the ingredients progresses rapidly. In particular, if the user is not accustomed to cooking with that ingredient, there is a concern that the ingredient may be overheated. Therefore, in cooking process 1, reference information 1 (FA1) is notified before the end of the process.

Similarly, in cooking step 2, reference information 2 (FA2) is notified before the end of the cooking step. This makes it possible to prompt the user to pay attention to the end of cooking and to prepare for the next step.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After this, the notification of F16 shown in Fig. 67 is made. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3). Furthermore, by operating the cancel button (input key 43MT), all cooking steps of "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode are terminated.

Next, we will explain FIG. 70.
70, "fried chicken" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and cooking process 1 is performed using the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). Cooking process 2 is performed using the left heating unit 17HL, for example.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 70, there is also a cooking process 3, which is performed in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).
FIG. 70 is a flowchart corresponding to the various steps of the collaborative cooking mode shown in FIG.

As explained in FIG. 68, when cooking step 1 is started (A23), a voice notification F24 is issued, for example, "Microwave, starting standard finish." In this case, "standard finish" means that the heat is at a standard level. For example, a heating operation is started with a microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

In the next step SB2, measurement of the temperatures of the heating chamber 113 and the food to be cooked is started. That is, measurement of the temperature rise TN3 of the basic ingredient (chicken meat) of the "fried chicken" cooking is started.
The temperature TN3 is measured by a temperature detection circuit 93.

At the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When the chicken meat that is the ingredient of "fried chicken" is heated with microwaves, the temperature rises, and it is determined whether the measurement result of this temperature has reached a predetermined rise in temperature TN3.

The rate at which the temperature TN3 rises varies depending on three factors: the amount (weight) of fried chicken, the cooking time, and the heat. The temperature rise pattern when a given amount (e.g., 300 g) of fried chicken ingredients is cooked using standard heat (e.g., microwaves with an output of 500 W) is stored as control data by the integrated control device MC based on the results of prior experiments, etc.

In other words, the integrated control device MC has data that shows that when finishing with standard microwave output (500 W), it is best to heat up to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the integrated control device MC notifies the user when the temperature has risen to that elevated temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can be notified in advance that the time to end the (microwave) heating of the fried chicken is approaching by the audio notification of reference information 3 (FA3). In addition, the user can also be notified in synchronization with this by reference display 3 on the integrated display unit 30.

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to the cooking time exceeding). The user may also stop it midway. For example, if the control program is such that one minute after the temperature has risen to TN3, the integrated control device MC stops the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating operation may be stopped at the user's discretion before one minute has elapsed after receiving a notification of reference information 3 indicating that the temperature has risen to TN3.

Then proceed to cooking step 2, which uses the induction heating unit 17H. To do this, the user must move the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15. This will be explained in Figure 71.

In FIG. 70, step SB7 is a notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in cooking process 2. This is determined based on the elapsed time TN4 or the increased temperature TN4 from the point when the user places the food to be cooked on the food to be heated N, which has been heated to a high temperature by preheating, after preheating is completed by induction heating unit 17H.

In this step SB8, the user does not perform any input operation on the input operation unit 40. The food to be cooked is simply moved. Therefore, the starting point of the elapsed time TN4 is the information that detects the timing when the temperature of the food to be heated N drops. Since the temperature of the food to be heated N drops sharply once the food to be cooked is placed or inserted, this point in time is detected by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the elapsed time from this detection time can be counted.

The next step SB8 is a step for determining whether or not to issue a command to carry out cooking process 3 in the heating chamber 113 after cooking process 2 has been completed. The user performs the operation A26 shown in Fig. 68. To do this, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before step SB7, the user must return the food that has been induction heated (cooking step 2) on top plate 15 back into heating chamber 113. This will be described with reference to FIG.

In the next step SB9, cooking step 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification F26 is for informing the user that cooking on the range grill will be started again after cooking on the range grill has finished. For example, a notification such as "Range grill will start for 2 minutes" is made.

In the next step SB10, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start of the cooking process 3 is started.
The elapsed time TN5 is measured by a clock circuit 96.

In next step SB11, it is determined whether or not an elapsed time TN5 has elapsed.
For example, if the cooking time for the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to 2 minutes before the start of cooking step 3 (before step SB8), the elapsed time is set to 1 minute 30 seconds, for example. In other words, it is set to 30 seconds before the end of cooking step 3.

If the elapsed time TN5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SB12.
In step SB12, reference information 5 (FA5) is notified by voice. Reference information 5 includes, for example, guidance such as "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." Since the user knows that the final cooking process is about to end, the user can start preparations for removing the "fried chicken" from heating chamber 113 from the point in time when reference information 5 is notified. Synchronously with this, reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SB13, the cooking process 3 is automatically stopped.
A notification F25 shown in Fig. 68 is also made. This notification is related to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, it may say "Cooking on the range grill is finished. You can extend cooking by pressing the time button. Please remove food from the oven." Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped by opening the door 114 without the user having to operate the input operation unit 40.

Next, we will explain Figure 71.
Fig. 71 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Fig. 71 is a time chart corresponding to Figs. 68 and 70.
In Fig. 71, #1 to #9 indicate user operations and state changes of the cooking appliance 1. The other symbols correspond to Fig. 68 and Fig. 70.

In FIG. 71, before starting cooking step 1 to cook "fried chicken," the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1 (operation A21 in FIG. 68). Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 begins. In this case, the object to be heated N is a metal pan for deep frying, with a certain amount of cooking oil added.

Meanwhile, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and places ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
After closing the door 114, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This operation is performed by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 70, reference information 3 is notified (SB4 in FIG. 70).

During this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left induction heating unit 17HL is also completed (for example, the heated unit N is heated to the standard preheating temperature of 180°C). The completion of preheating is notified to the user by the notification unit AN through voice and text (#2).

The user can stop microwave cooking at any time during cooking step 1. To stop cooking, the user simply opens door 114. Note that pressing input key 40MT on central operation unit 40M will cancel the selection of "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode.

By opening door 114, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and cooking step 1 ends (#3).
Next, the user moves the food material that has been heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N that is being preheated on the top plate 15 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started in the left heating section 17HL (#5).
In cooking process 2, the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed first before starting preheating, and at that point a command to start induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC.

To start cooking process 2 (#5), the user does not need to operate the input operation unit 40 in any particular way.
The cooking process 2 starts when the food to be cooked is placed on the preheated food N and is ready to be heated.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user operating the left operating unit 40L.

The user then moves the food again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
Reference information 5 (FA5) is notified when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed from the time when cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by user input (A26 in Figure 67).

The reference information 5 (FA5) includes information such as, for example, "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." In addition, since the user knows that the final cooking process is about to finish, the user can start preparing to remove the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the point in time when the reference information 5 is notified. In synchronization with this, the integrated display unit 30 also displays the reference information 5 (FA5).

Thereafter, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and cooking step 3 is completed (#7). Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately if the user opens door 114.
Then, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object N that is being preheated on the top plate 15 (#8). In this case, since the object N is maintained in a heated state by induction heating, it may be further heated by induction (cooking step 4) (#9). In this case, if the object N is already in a preheated state, it is sufficient to simply move the object to be cooked to the object N on the top plate 15.

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 40L. In other words, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L that corresponds to the left heating unit 17HL.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 71 can shorten the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1.
That is, cooking step 1 is started by placing ingredients (food to be cooked) in heating chamber 113 before the completion of preheating of induction heating source 9 or notification of the completion of preheating.

Because the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the completion of cooking process 1, the food to be cooked can be transferred immediately to the food to be heated N on the top plate 15 after the end of cooking process 1, and cooking process 2 can be started.

Note that cooking step 3 and cooking step 4 are not necessarily required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the user's wishes, it is sufficient to finish with the necessary cooking steps.

In addition, in FIG. 71, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the induction heating source 9 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time by the left side operation unit 40L after cooking step 2 is completed. Specifically, pressing the input key 43L1 on the left side operation unit 40L stops the overheating operation of the left heating unit 17HL. However, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 67, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figure 72.
Fig. 72 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, similar to Fig. 71. Fig. 72 is a time chart corresponding to Figs. 68 and 70.
In Fig. 72, #1 to #9 indicate user operations and state changes of the cooking appliance 1, as explained in Fig. 71. The other symbols correspond to Figs. 68 and 70.

The difference between FIG. 72 and FIG. 71 will now be described.
FIG. 72 shows a case where cooking step 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after the induction heating source 9 has completed preheating the object N to be heated and a notification of this (#2) has been received.

When the completion of preheating of the object N by the induction heating source 9 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L, 31R, and is also notified by voice via the voice synthesis device 95, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and places the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
After closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 70, reference information 3 is notified (SB4 in FIG. 70). After this, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 71.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 72, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1 is longer than that in FIG.
However, since heating of the ingredients (food to be cooked) in the heating chamber 113 starts after the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed or a notification of the completion of the preheating is received, there is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately when the food to be cooked is moved at the end of cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the linked preheating cooking mode KM4.

In addition, in FIG. 72, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the induction heating source 9 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time after cooking step 2 is completed using the left side operation unit 40L. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 72, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figures 73 to 75.
Fig. 73 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device before switching to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 74 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until switching to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions and the determination results before switching to the coordinated cooking mode.

Now, reference will be made to Fig. 73. Steps ST2 to ST4 have been explained with reference to Fig. 38, so they will be explained briefly here.
In step ST2, the IH control unit 90 determines whether or not there is an abnormality. The heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are also diagnosed by the integrated control device MC.

At step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the integrated control device MC also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 40 regarding the upper limit of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide a notification and voice guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
In step ST4, the initial standby screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B) is displayed on the integrated display section 30, and warning information is also displayed (see FIG. 52).

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than the input key 43MC (e.g., 43M1) has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. In step STR1, it is checked whether the "permission conditions" are met. For example, the usage state of the heat source used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
The permission conditions and the determination results will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG.

In step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether individual heating cooking was selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are the individual operation units, before the input key 43MC is pressed, and it is also determined whether the composite cooking mode KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 40M.

When the input key 43MC is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), the "combined cooking mode KM3" starts to be displayed as described above.
On the other hand, if the input key 43MC is not operated and the input key 43M1 is touched, the result of step STC is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 73, steps STR1 and STR2 are judgment steps of the "permission conditions" that determine whether or not cooking in the combined cooking mode KM3 is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step for judging "permission condition 1."
Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more;
(2) If a power reduction command signal is received from an external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the power reduction command is 5000 W or more.
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step STR1 is "Yes."

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) In the case where a central heating section is provided in the induction heating source 9, the central heating section is not in heating operation.
(2) Either or both of the oven heating means 188 and the microwave heating means 189 are not in heating operation.
(3) Neither the right heating section nor the left heating section of the induction heating source 9 is in heating operation (or only one of them is in heating operation).

If the above three conditions are met, the determination in step STR2 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 74).
If the determinations in steps STR1 and STR2 are "No", the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 inform the user that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning of the requirement of "5000 W or more" in "Permission Condition 1" above. For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the upper cooling fan 60.

The reason why the required demand (pre-securing of power demand) for implementing the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is 5,000 W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power of each heating source during operation when the collaborative cooking mode is executed is as follows:
(1) When operating the range (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) Oven operation: 2000W (upper heater: 1000W, lower heater: 10
00W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500W (microwave heating source 189: 500W, upper heater: 1000W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for the automatic control menu of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (two types: deep frying and suitable temperature) is 1500W.
Therefore, in the collaborative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate simultaneously.
In other words, the maximum power is 3500 W in total, which is the sum of the "1000 W" of the microwave heating source 189, the "1000 W" of the oven heating source 188 (2000 W is alternately energized by 1000 W each), and the "1500 W" of the induction heating source 9.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating section 17HR is performing heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When coordinated cooking mode KM3 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) and coordinated cooking can be started.

If the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food (requiring a maximum of 1500W) in the right heating section 17HR, the remaining demand is 2500W.
When coordinated cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the power required for coordinated cooking of 3500 W, so it is necessary to reduce the heat power of the right heating unit 17HR. However, if the heat power is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heat power for the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the necessary heat for the automatically controlled menus (two types: deep frying and optimum temperature).

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the coordinated cooking mode, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (pre-securing of power demand) of 5000 W, which is the sum of the power required for coordinated cooking (3500 W) and the power required for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (1500 W).

Next, we will explain Figure 74.
In the coordinated cooking mode of this embodiment 1, there is a pattern (first coordinated cooking mode) (see Figure 61) in which the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven.
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in which the order is reversed.

The steps in FIG. 74 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and information on the coordinated cooking mode is displayed. As shown in Fig. 60, the "name of the food to be cooked" (e.g., "hamburger steak") 330 is displayed as a type of identification information to select a cooking menu for each coordinated cooking mode.

In the next step STR4, it is determined whether input key 43M1 has been operated. As explained in FIG. 60, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of identification information 330 indicating the name of the food that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) changes by sequentially moving upwards or downwards. In this embodiment 1, since there are a total of eight types of food, for example, operating the left input key 43M1 once in the state shown in FIG. 60 switches identification information 330 from "hamburger steak" to "gratin."

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), step STR5 is judged as "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step for selecting one of the two heating unit specifying parts 333R and 333L displayed on the first specifying screen. When the user operates the pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select one of the heating unit specifying parts 333R and 333L.

The right heating unit 17HR may be set as the default, and the heating unit specification section 333R may be displayed first on the first specification screen 30SP, and the process may proceed directly to step STR7. In the example described in FIG. 60, when making hamburger steak using coordinated cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set as the default, and the heating unit specification section 333L is displayed so that the left heating unit 17HL is selected preferentially.

The next step STR6 determines whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the collaborative cooking mode. If the input key 43MT has been operated, the result is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the result is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation proceeds to step STR8 according to the operation program.
In step STR8, the control conditions such as the finally selected heating unit (e.g., the right heating unit 17HR) and the microwave heating output value of 500 W are displayed in the first specific screen 30SP, and the process proceeds to the next step STR9, where the process moves to the linked cooking mode. In other words, after this, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the process automatically proceeds to cooking in the linked cooking mode.

The display content of the first specific screen 30SP for step STR8 is that the first cooking step 1 uses the right heating unit 17HR, and the next cooking step 2 uses the microwave heating source 189. This information is displayed in the step display section 332. The content and transitions of these display screens will be explained in detail later.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered, induction heating cooking starts from the moment the input key 43R1 on the right operation unit 40R is pressed. As explained in FIG. 39, induction heating does not start immediately. Step STR9 and onwards is step MS4 shown in FIG. 39.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, the result is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If steps STR3 to STR7 are still cycling through, for example, 30 minutes after the input key 43MC is operated, the main power may be automatically turned off or the process may return to step ST4 (see Figures 73 and 76).

Next, we will explain Figure 75.
FIG. 75 shows the determination processes in steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG.
Step STX1 is the stage where the input key 43MC is operated.
The next step STX2 is a stage in which the integrated control device MC checks the latest state of the cooking appliance with respect to the above-mentioned permission conditions 1 and 2.

The next step STX3 is a judgment process stage that corresponds to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 73. In this step STX3, the integrated control device MC compares the latest state of the cooking device with the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above, and judges whether the state satisfies permission conditions 1 and 2.

In step STX3 of FIG. 75, notifications 1 to 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the voice synthesizer 95.
Moreover, Display 1 to Display 4 indicate the contents displayed on the integrated display section 30. Note that Display 1 to Display 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP that is displayed from step STR3 in Fig. 74 onwards, but are displayed on the integrated display section 30 where the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the prerequisites for switching to the coordinated cooking mode (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met.

Next, we will explain Figure 76.
The control mode in Fig. 76 is for a (second) coordinated cooking mode different from the (first) coordinated cooking mode in Fig. 74. There are two heating sources used in the coordinated cooking mode in Fig. 76, the first to be used is the microwave heating source 189, and the second to be used is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9. The control mode in Fig. 76 differs greatly from that in Fig. 74 in step STR11.

In the "warm" (automatic range) setting of the range grill cooking (combined cooking) menu mentioned above, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops microwave oscillation when the "target temperature" is reached. Therefore, if heat from a previous cooking session remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the start, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. Note that the default value for the "target temperature" here is 80°C, but this can be set higher or lower using the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (e.g., 70°C), there is a concern that the temperature measuring unit 158 may detect the high temperature too early, causing microwave heating to stop before cooking is complete.

In the control shown in FIG. 76, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L display the fact that the coordinated cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time (STR12). Furthermore, this may also be displayed on the integrated display unit 30. It is more reliable to notify by voice using the voice synthesis device 95. Note that the reason that this is displayed on the left and right display units 31L and 31R is because at this stage the user has not yet selected either the left or right heating unit 17HL, 17HR.

In addition, the first specific screen 30SP, which is displayed when permission conditions 1 and 2 are met, is not displayed at this stage, so in addition to or instead of displaying it on the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in Figures 73 and 75, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determined whether or not to transition to the collaborative cooking mode, but step STR11 in Figure 76 can be said to correspond to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, the user can be notified that the heating source to be used first (in this case, microwave heating source 189) is unavailable during the collaborative cooking mode selection stage.

In addition, when displaying or informing the user in step STR12 that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, the device may also convey useful information to the user, such as that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 will drop more quickly if the door 114 is opened.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used during execution of the coordinated cooking mode, regardless of the coordinated cooking.
In this embodiment 1 of Figure 77, the heating source used first in the coordinated cooking mode is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and the next heating sources used are the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

When the cooking process in the above-mentioned linked cooking mode has already progressed to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the user wishes to use the left heating unit 17HL to perform another cooking operation, and operates the left operating unit 40L, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, just like the "permission condition 1" described above, it is determined that the usage will not exceed the total power regulation value of 5000 W, for example.

If the determination in step SH2 is "No", the process proceeds to step SH8, where, for example, the maximum heat value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the sum of the maximum amount of power when the left heating unit 17HL is used and the amount of power of the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) during coordinated cooking does not exceed the regulated value of the power control unit 72, and the notification unit AN notifies the user of the limited value.

On the other hand, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being performed with the heating source, if lowering the power (induction heating power) used by the left heating unit 17HL would still exceed the total permitted power amount, then in step SH8, the left heating unit 17HL is not permitted to be used. Specifically, a message is displayed on the left display unit 31L indicating that it cannot be used, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice. The voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user of the reason for the inability to use it.

In the next step SH3, the user's input operation result is analyzed to determine whether it is an "allowed control menu" that does not fall under a prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as a "prohibited control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance taking into consideration the amount of electricity to be used (required for cooking). For example, two items are specified: "(automatic) deep frying" as described in Figure 51, and rice cooking.
Both the (automatic) deep frying and rice cooking employ control methods that anticipate situations in which a large amount of electricity will be used during the cooking process, and so there is a concern that in order to secure that electricity, there may be disruptions to the power supply to the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) while the linked cooking mode KM3 is running.

For the above reasons, in step SH3, a determination is made as to whether the item corresponds to an "authorized control menu." For example, a check is made to see whether the item corresponds to "water boiler," which is one of the authorized control menus.

In step SH3, if it is determined that the device does not fall under the "permission control menu," the above-mentioned denial process is performed, and a notification is given that the device cannot be used.

If the answer in step SH3 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SH4, where the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the heating power value set by the user or the heating power value selected by the IH control unit 90 is determined. After this, if the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the inverter circuit 81L starts to be driven, and induction heating cooking begins (SH5). After this, monitoring is performed to see if a stop command from the user is input by the input key 43L1 (SH6), and if a stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the left display unit 31L displays the end of cooking. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice that cooking is complete (SH7).

In step SH8, if a change to the permitted conditions (for example, lowering the heat) is possible, the change is made and notified.
If there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL desired to be used cannot be permitted to be used, a notification of denial is made. If the change processing has been completed, the process returns to step SH2.

Figure 78 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed after the heating source that was initially used has finished heating in one cooking process of the linked cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 78 is for cooking in the coordinated cooking mode, in which the second microwave heating source 189 is driven for a time period set by the user (e.g., 5 minutes). For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 is omitted.

In the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 78, the heat source used in cooking step 1 of the coordinated cooking mode is the right heating unit 17HR, which is set by default, as described in FIG. 74. The heat sources used in the following cooking step 2 are the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

A situation will be described in which a user uses the microwave heating source 189 to perform cooking step 2 in one of the integrated cooking modes KM3 described in FIG.
After the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR is completed, when the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is next operated, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, the inverter circuit 121A starts to be driven (SJ2), and measurement of the set time for timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) starts (SJ3).
The microwave heating output value remains at the default value (500 W), but the user can change the heat output by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the heating chamber control unit 159 starts energizing the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188.
In this embodiment 1, the energization of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B starts simultaneously with the start of the oscillation operation of magnetron 122 of microwave heating source 189 .

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized while the magnetron 122 is oscillating. In other words, the food to be cooked is heated simultaneously by microwaves and electrical radiation heat (cooking process 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period, so in the following explanation, only the microwave heating time will be explained, and the explanation of the heating time of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B will be omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT for commanding the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
If the input key 43MT for commanding to stop heating is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeated within the set time of the timer cooking. If the set time of the timer cooking has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is displayed to allow the user to decide whether or not to continue the microwave cooking that was temporarily stopped for an additional predetermined time or for a time specified by the user. Specifically, the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays text such as "Do you want to extend the cooking time? If you want to extend the cooking time, press the time key."

The reason for allowing such an extension is that if the user determines after checking the cooking condition of the food that it is still not heated enough, they can quickly resume heating (in this case microwave heating and radiant heating) to cook the food in a better condition.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that an operation signal has been received, and if an operation signal has been received, a "Yes" determination is made.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. Alternatively, the program may be set so that if the input key 43M3 is operated once before pressing the input key 43MS, the cooking time is extended by a fixed time (e.g., 3 minutes), or so that pressing the input key 43M3 once extends the cooking time by 3 minutes and pressing it twice in succession extends the cooking time by 5 minutes. Even if cooking is started again, the heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press it within the "hold time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11, and the operation of the final cooking step of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 ends. Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays this fact, and the voice synthesizer 95 also performs an announcing operation (SJ11). Note that if the door 114 has not been opened even once since step SJ8 and the hold time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may sound an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC automatically stores in the memory device MM in chronological order the control conditions under which the microwave heating source 9, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source 188 operated (when storing, the end date and time of the cooking process is recorded at the same time).

After that, when a specified command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the previous stored coordinated cooking mode and control conditions are called up from the memory device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the function is such that they are used to implement the next coordinated cooking mode KM3. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that not only the previous coordinated cooking mode is called up, but also all cooking history (including information on the date and time when cooking was performed) from the past few times or over a certain period (for example, one month), and the user can select the desired one from among them. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to "function mode", the user can set various aspects of the repeatability of the cooking history.

As described above, the start of the RG cooking process also starts the flow of electricity to the oven heating source 189, so the integrated display unit 30 does not display information on whether or not to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. However, if the sequence is to operate the microwave heating source 189 first and then the oven heating source 188, or if they are operated in the reverse order, it is possible to set the microwave heating time extension and the oven heating source 188 time extension separately.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 79 and 80.
Fig. 79 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. Fig. 80 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Figure 79 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular the steps of the assistance operation when the user makes an input error or is unsure of how to operate.

The steps in FIG. 79 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 (step SL1).

The first specific screen 30SP displays identification information 330, 330A, and 330B for selecting a coordinated cooking menu as information for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 60) (step SL2).

In the next step SL3, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described in FIG. 74, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) changes by sequentially moving upward or downward, and the identification information 330 corresponding to another food is displayed in the center of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In this Figure 79, the step of selecting one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described in Figure 60 is omitted from the illustration.

In the next step SL4, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 43MT has been operated, it is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. 76. In other words, the process returns to the initial standby screen state.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the result is "Yes", and the process proceeds to next step SL5.
Next, if an input key on the central operation unit 40M that is not necessary for setting the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is operated, step SL5 is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, "input keys that are not necessary for setting the collaborative cooking mode KM3" are, for example, input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Also, input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

As explained in FIG. 62, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 43MC, the right heating unit 17HR is occupied, and input using the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R is invalid. However, it is possible that the user may not notice this.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the erroneous operation immediately when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated. Note that when the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and the integrated control device MC is controlled so that it cannot detect whether the input keys of the right operation unit 40R are touched or not, the erroneous operation of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, when the input itself from the input key 43R1 etc. is enabled and the integrated control device MC processes it so that it does not consider it to be a valid signal, the erroneous operation can be detected.

In step SL11, it is notified that the operation is incorrect, and then the process proceeds to step SL12. In step SL12, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the correct operation and the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, the process returns to step SL3, and it is recommended that the user redo the operation.

If it is determined in step SL5 that no erroneous input key has been operated, the determination in step SL5 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL6.
In this step SL6, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to the step SL13, where detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, an outline of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL7 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8, which starts cooking step 1, in accordance with the program of the coordinated operation. Note that a preheating step may be started before cooking step 1 to start the preheating operation. Note that if the input key 43MS has not been operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, we will explain Figure 80.
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 80 shows input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular shows steps of assistance operations when the user makes an input error or is unsure of how to operate.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display section 30.
Furthermore, the second specific screen 30SP displays a control menu for cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 (see FIG. 55) (step SL21).

In the next step SL22, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated again. As described in Figs. 55 to 59, by operating the pair of left and right input keys 43M1, the display of the specific text 30J indicating the names (including abbreviations) of the control menus that can be used in the composite cooking mode KM2 changes by sequentially moving upward or downward, and the specific text 30J of another control menu is displayed in the center of the first area 30L.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated in step SL22, the display of the specific text 30J of the control menu "Warm" that is defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

If the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL28.
In step SL28, as described above, a specific text 30J indicating the name (including the abbreviation) of another control menu that can be used in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to next step SL23.

In the next step SL23, it is determined whether the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control conditions such as the heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M can be changed to other control conditions (see FIG. 58).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 is judged as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL29. In step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

In the next step SL25, if an input key on the central operation unit 40M that is not necessary for setting the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the result is determined to be "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, "input keys that are not necessary for setting the composite cooking mode KM2" are, for example, input keys 43KP and 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. Also, input keys 43R1 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R.

In step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies the user that the operation is incorrect. For example, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the incorrect operation as soon as the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

In step SL31, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the correct operation and the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, the process returns to step SL22, and it is recommended that the user redo the operation.

If no erroneous input key operation is found in step SL24, step SL24 will be judged as "Yes" and the process will proceed to step SL25.

In step SL25, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, where detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27, which starts cooking process 1, in accordance with the operation program of the composite cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation section in collaborative cooking mode)
Next, we will explain Figures 81 to 108.
These figures show the control operations of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 and left display unit 31L) when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 81 is a plan view showing the control operations of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 and left display unit 31L) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the symbol FG denotes the user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 81. The three pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the collaborative cooking menu correspond to the three items to be cooked: "hamburger steak," "gratin," and "roast beef." These pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B are displayed simultaneously.

In FIG. 81 and the next FIG. 82, the process display section 332 is omitted from the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330. In the examples of Figures 81 and 82, the additional information 331 displays "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL."

The individual light emitting portion 27M6 adjacent to the input key 43MS flashes as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG. 81, guiding the user to operate the input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source to be used first in the coordinated cooking mode is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light-emitting display sections 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG.

Then, operating the input key 43MS switches to the linked cooking mode KM3. At that time, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, so when this input key 43L1 is pressed, cooking is performed using the left heating unit 17HL.

At the same time, the heat power indicators 67L, which indicate the heat power levels during induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, are lit (the number of lit heat power indicators is determined by a default value).
Even if the left heating unit 17HL is used individually (irrespective of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) during the cooperative cooking mode, if the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited by the integrated control device MC as described above (occupied state), the light-emitting indicator 27L3 will not emit light as shown in Fig. 78. The heat power indicator 67L will also not be lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if an operation is performed to temporarily use the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the coordinated cooking mode KM3 during cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the fact that the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used is displayed as reference information on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. For example, a message such as "Left IH cannot be used because coordinated cooking is in progress" or "Left IH and heating chamber are currently unavailable because coordinated cooking is in progress" is displayed.

As is clear from the above explanation, the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is located in the center of the top surface of the top plate 15, so the user's gaze naturally focuses on the center. Furthermore, the selection of the coordinated cooking mode and the guidance display leading up to the start of cooking are also concentrated on the integrated display unit 30 in the center.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 40M also has an input key 43MS for proceeding to the next heat source when cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heat source, has been completed.
In other words, the main input operations, such as selecting the coordinated cooking mode, starting the first cooking step 1, and starting the next cooking step 2, can all be performed centrally at the front left/right center of the cooking appliance 1 (central operation unit 40M).

Next, we will explain Figure 82.
FIG. 82 is a plan view showing the operations of central operation unit 40M and left operation unit 40L and the display contents of first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of cooking appliance 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the three identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the collaborative cooking menu are simultaneously displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (display screen 8A), as shown in FIG. 82 (B).

Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 82, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL."

When the left input key 43M1 is pressed once more, the identification information 330 of the food to be cooked (named "Hamburger") that was displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 moves backwards, and the identification information 330B of "Roast beef" that was displayed in the front is displayed in the center instead (display screen 8B).

Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 is updated one by one in a fixed order.

When the right input key 43M1 is pressed, each time it is pressed, the display screen is selected in the reverse order, for example, from the display screen 8D in FIG. 82(B) to the display screen 8C.
Although only four coordinated cooking menus are shown in Fig. 82, as described above, there are a total of eight coordinated cooking menus. These display screens 8A to 8D are all first specific screens 30SP.

Next, we will explain Figure 83.
FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of coordinated cooking menus available when the coordinated cooking mode of the cooking appliance is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 83, the eight coordinated cooking menus are displayed in sequence (forward or backward) on the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43M1.

Next, we will explain Figure 84.
FIG. 84 is a table showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Immediately before the start of the cooking process, the process display section 332 has several types as shown in FIG. 84 according to the cooking menu (eight types from hamburger steak to gratin).

The additional information 331 is consistent throughout the entire cooperative cooking mode, as shown by additional information A and additional information B. The additional information A and additional information B are displayed alternately for a fixed period of time (for example, every 5 seconds).
Furthermore, in the additional information B, the heating section of the induction heating source 9 to be used is indicated as "changeable" because there are two heating sections, the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR.

Next, the cooking process will be briefly explained for the eight types of food shown in FIG.
Part 1: Cooking menu (4 types) for range grill cooking using induction heating source 9
Hamburger steak: Preheat to the appropriate temperature → Cook at the appropriate temperature → Cook on the grill in the microwave
"Preheating to the right temperature" refers to preheating the object to be heated, such as a frying pan, to the right temperature (e.g. 18
0℃). At that temperature, cooking process 1 is done by heating at the appropriate temperature (
The induction heating source 9 is used. No edible oil is placed in the object to be heated N.
The range that the user can set as the "optimum temperature" for the induction heating source 9 is 140
°C to 220 °C in 20 °C increments.
When cooking with a microwave grill, the cooking time is set to 10 seconds after the start of cooking.
The heat can be changed to change the final result.
Roast beef, paella, gratin: Same as hamburger above.

Part 2: Cooking menus (4 types) using induction heating source 9 from range grill cooking
Fried chicken: Preheat the frying pan → Heat the microwave grill → Cook the fried food
"Preheating fried food" refers to pouring a specified amount of cooking oil (2
00g or about 220cc or more) and set it to the induction heating source 9
Preheat to a temperature of
The range that the user can set for the "deep frying preheat" with the induction heating source 9 is 1
The temperature ranges from 40°C to 200°C in 10°C increments.
When cooking with a microwave grill, the cooking time is set to 10 seconds after the start of cooking.
The heat can be changed to change the final result.
Tonkatsu, Tempura: Same as "Karaage" above.
Stir-fried vegetables: Preheat to the appropriate temperature → Microwave → Cook at the appropriate temperature
"Preheating to the appropriate temperature" refers to preheating the object to be heated N, such as a frying pan, to the appropriate temperature.
The optimum temperature state is achieved by an induction heating source 9 .
Thereafter, as cooking step 1, microwave cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113.
The range that the user can set as the "optimum temperature" for the induction heating source 9 is 140
°C to 220 °C in 20 °C increments.

The next figure 85 is a plan view showing the control operations and display contents of the input operation unit 40, integrated display unit 30, and left display unit 31L when the linked cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as shown in FIGS.
The first specific screen 30SP displays identification information 330 of the three coordinated cooking modes. That is, as shown in Fig. 85, the identification information 330 of "Hamburger" is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30. At the same time, additional information 331 and a cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in a list state on the first specific screen 30SP.

When the identification information 330 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the user can select either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L.

The example in Figure 85 shows a case where the left heating unit 17HL is set as the default recommendation. As shown in Figure 85, the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which is displayed with the word "Left" written in white, is always displayed on the initial first specific screen 30SP.

A pair of left and right input keys 43M2 can be used to select either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L. For example, by pressing the left input key 43M2, the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected, and as shown in FIG. 85, the mark is changed to a white character to indicate that it has been selected.
Conversely, in the state shown in FIG. 85, by pressing the right input key 43M2, the right heating unit selection mark 334R can be selected.

When the identification information 330 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (by pressing the input key 43MC) (see FIG. 62) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 63), the left heating unit 17HL is occupied to execute the coordinated cooking mode. Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is in a state in which it cannot accept settings for other control menus (by the integrated control device MC).

Therefore, the user places an object to be heated N, such as a frying pan, above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then, induction heating starts automatically. Note that the operation of pressing the input key 44R may be omitted, and the induction heating in the left heating unit 17HL may be automatically started after a certain time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed.
As described above, when the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL is started, the right heating unit 17HR is released from its occupied state, and therefore the input of the single cooking mode in the right operation unit 40R can be started immediately.

It is also possible to cancel the occupation of the right heating section 17HR when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected using the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. However, because the selection of the heating section using the input keys 43M2 can be easily changed, the occupation of the right heating section 17HR is not canceled when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected, as described above.

The "optimum temperature 180°C" means that the temperature to preheat the heated object N, such as a metal pot or frying pan that is the container for the "hamburger steak" to be cooked in this case, is 180°C. In other words, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the heat level so that the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N becomes 180°C through the action of the inverter circuit 81L and the temperature detection circuit 93, etc.

As the preheat temperature rises, the heat display unit 67L, which shows the heat level during induction cooking, does not display the heat level, but rather displays the degree of rise in the preheat temperature and the degree of approach to the target preheat temperature.

In Figure 85, the dashed circle shown in the heat display unit 67L indicates the current temperature range, and as the temperature rises, the dashed circle gradually moves to the right. In other words, the state of temperature rise can be seen from the illumination state of the heat display unit 67L. Details will be explained in Figure 86.

Additional information 331 displays "You will be notified when the set temperature is reached" as shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed in text in a strip shape that crosses horizontally across the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display section 30.

As can be seen from the cooking process display section 332 in FIG. 85, when cooking hamburger steaks in a coordinated manner, the preheating process is started first by the induction heating source 9, followed by cooking process 1, and finally cooking process 2, which involves range grill heating (RG heating).

As shown in FIG. 85, until the moment the collaborative cooking mode is started, the user's fingertips FG and line of sight are on the front right of the integrated display unit 30, in other words, the central operation unit 40M, in order to operate the input keys 43MS.
After that, the user's line of sight moves to the left heating section 17HL as shown by the arrow. That is, when the object N containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating section 17HL, the user's line of sight moves leftward.

After starting the collaborative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body will move from the center to the left, as shown by the large horizontal arrow in Figure 85. However, this movement to the left is not large, and will not place a burden on the user.

Next, we will explain Figure 86.
FIG. 86 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is selected, and displays the change in preheating temperature in chronological order.

Figure 86 (A) shows the left heat power indicator 67L. The dashed circle in Figure 86 (A) indicates the current temperature range. For example, if the target preheat temperature is 180°C, the four heat power indicators 67L are illuminated from the beginning of the induction heating cooking process. The leftmost light-emitting element is flashing, as shown by the dashed circle. This flashing state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheat temperature rises, the current temperature also rises, so the position of the "flashing part" mentioned above moves gradually to the right. When the preheat temperature is reached, the flashing part stops.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86(B), at the beginning of the induction heating preheating process, the target value of the preheating temperature can be changed by operating either input key 43L2 or 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L.

For example, the preheat temperature can be lowered by one step each time the left input key 43L2 is pressed. Conversely, the preheat temperature can be raised by one step each time the right input key 43L3 is pressed. In this way, the process of changing the preheat temperature is displayed on the left display unit 31L each time, as shown in Figure 86 (C), so the user can easily check the displayed contents.

Next, we will explain Figure 87.
FIG. 87 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

When the object N placed on the left heating section 17HL reaches the set preheat temperature, the heat power display section 67L stops flashing.
When the heating temperature reaches the preheating temperature in this manner, the integrated display section 30 displays "preheating completed" using additional information 331, as shown in FIG.

The display content of the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 changes. Specifically, the display of "IH preheating" is replaced by the display of "IH heating" of the next cooking process 1 in white letters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage has come where induction heating can be fully implemented. In other words, the user can understand that the temperature of the heated object N, such as a frying pan, placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object.

The pair of input keys 43L2, 43L3 on the left operation section 40L has the function of specifying the heating power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. Therefore, when moving from the preheating process to the actual heating process (cooking process 1), each time these input keys 43L2, 43L3 are touched once, a specific heating power level one step higher or one step lower can be selected from the data table of prescribed heating power values. This allows the user to freely raise or lower the temperature of the heated object when induction heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 88.
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the change in the display content of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected.
88(A), when the preheating process is completed, the integrated display unit 30 informs the user that cooking process 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Moreover, cooking process 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L.

The display of (A) and (B) in FIG. 88 is automatically switched repeatedly at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after full-scale induction heating cooking process 1 has begun, only FIG. 88 (C) is displayed. The heat at this point is shown to be "slightly weak." It also shows that the user can adjust this heat level (information indicating the output level, 30V; in this case, the heat of induction heating). FIG. 88 (D) is an example showing the situation immediately after cooking process 1 (induction heating) has been completed.

Next, FIG. 89 is a plan view showing the display content of the integrated display unit 30 when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected. The display content has been slightly changed from that of FIG. 88, and the preheating temperature value (e.g., 180°C) is included in the additional information 331. The display content shown in FIG. 88(B) may be changed as shown in FIG. 89.

FIG. 89 shows a stage where induction heating cooking process 1 has not yet started when the combined cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting portion 27M6 is in a flashing state as indicated by the dashed circle.

To clarify the timing when the preheating process has ended and the next cooking process 1 has begun, if the user is required to press the input key 43MS again, a step of pressing the input key 43MS may be added as shown in FIG. 89. In that case, as shown in FIG. 89, a notification may be given by the individual light-emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS. FIG. 89 shows an example in which the individual light-emitting element 27M6 is flashed as shown by the dashed circle to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS.

In the state of Figures 88 and 89, even if the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 cannot display the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2, including "manual range" and "automatic range". To stop the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, pressing the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L only ends cooking step 1 of the left heating unit 17HL that is used first, and does not cancel (cancel) all settings of the linked cooking mode KM3.

Next, we will explain Figure 90.
90 shows a scene where the user ends the induction heating cooking process 1 using the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already ended, the heat power display unit 67L does not emit any light.

Meanwhile, the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process has progressed to cooking process 2, i.e., "range grill cooking" (RG cooking), based on the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332. Specifically, the progress from the white display of IH heating to the final cooking process 2, RG cooking, is displayed in white letters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage has come to carry out cooking step 2, which combines microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188.

The command to start cooking step 2 in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 must also be given using the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 90, the individual light-emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS flashes, as indicated by the dashed circle, to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS.

On the other hand, the stage in FIG. 90 is after the user has ended induction heating cooking step 1 using input key 43L1 of left operation unit 40L, so the left heating unit 17HL is no longer occupied. Therefore, by operating input key 43L1 of left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be used to start cooking in independent cooking mode KM1, which is separate from cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, if you input using the left operation unit 17HL, you can start another cooking menu using the induction heating source 189. However, because the linked cooking mode KM3 has not yet been released, you cannot perform another cooking operation that uses the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2). The left heating unit 17HL has simply been released from occupation.

Next, we will explain Figure 91.
FIG. 91 shows that when the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected, the microwave heating output level can be adjusted when proceeding to the "range grill cooking" (RG cooking) stage of cooking process 2.

Specifically, the microwave heating output level is displayed in five stages, such as "slightly weak" and "weak" in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30. This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating microwave output level" described in FIG. 88. Therefore, the user can select the microwave heating output level by operating a pair of input keys 43M2.

Next, we will explain Figure 92.
FIG. 92, like FIG. 91, shows that when the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected, the microwave heating output level can be adjusted when proceeding to cooking process 2.

92(B), the microwave heating output level is displayed in a total of five stages from "strong" to "weak" in the second area 30M. The user can select such microwave output level by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the microwave heating intensity depending on the finished state of the food to be cooked. Note that, as described above, the heating intensity can be adjusted in this manner only within a certain period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) after entering cooking step 2.

In the final cooking step 2 described in FIG. 92, the user's operations and line of sight are concentrated in the range of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. This allows the user to stay in the center of the front of the cooking appliance 1 and concentrate on completing cooking step 2.

During cooking step 2, if the user wishes to remove the food inside heating chamber 113 from inside heating chamber 113 and check it directly, the user can simply open door 114 at any time. When door 114 is opened, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 instantly stops the microwave transmission and also stops the power supply to upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B.

If the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating will start instantly again. Note that if the door 114 is opened in the middle of cooking step 2 as described above, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 will continue to operate.

Next, we will explain Figure 93.
FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing the operations in the final stage after cooking process 2 in FIG. 92 and the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user wishes to end the final heating and cooking process (cooking process 2), the input key 43MT is operated once. Pressing this ends the cooking process in the linked cooking mode KM3. However, at this point the series of control sequences has not been cancelled. Therefore, after such a temporary stop, to resume microwave heating or oven heating, another input operation is required on the central operation unit 40M.

In this embodiment 1, in order to make it easy to perform additional heating, when RG cooking is ended, microwave heating is started again within a certain time by setting the time again with input key 43MS (note that the additional time may be controlled so that pressing input key 43M2 or 43M3 once sets it to 1 minute, pressing it twice sets it to 2 minutes, etc.).

To allow the user to know the timing to end the RG cooking process, which is the final process of heating and cooking (cooking process 2), as shown in FIG. 93(B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the display screen 10B displayed after the display screen 10A. It is configured to display that cooking process 2 will soon end. Display screen 10B in FIG. 93(B) displays that cooking process 2 in the heating chamber 113 will end in 12 seconds.

This display screen 10B is displayed as a result of the process in which the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, determines the load of the food being cooked, etc., and the integrated control device MC predicts the time it will take to complete the process.

In addition, instead of detecting the temperature rise of the food or the heating chamber 113 to predict when cooking will be completed, the user may set a timer in advance and end cooking step 2 by time control. In this case, the load judgment described above is not necessary.

As described above, if the user sets the timer in advance and ends cooking step 2 by time control, reference information 2 can be notified (step SA13, FA2) as described in FIG. 69. That is, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on display screen 10B after display screen 10A, and displays information that matches reference information 2 as part of the notification (FA2).

Display screen 10C in Figure 93 (B) is an example showing that heating can be started again within a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds, but 15 seconds if door 114 is opened) immediately after cooking process 2 is completed.
The "time button" on the display screen 10C refers to the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature due to cooking immediately prior to this, additional information 331 such as "Caution: Grill is too hot" is displayed to enhance user safety.

As shown in Figures 87 and 88, the user can stop the cooking process (induction heating) of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 at any time even during cooking process 1 (induction heating), and to do so, it is sufficient to press the input key 43MT once. However, to cancel the collaborative cooking mode KM3 and not proceed to cooking process 2, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT once more.

In contrast, as shown in Figures 93(A) to (C), when the user is at cooking step 2 (in this case, the range grill) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, all he or she needs to do to stop cooking step 2 at any time is press the input key 43MT once. Also, in this case (assuming there is no cooking step 3), there is no cooking step to proceed to next, so there is no need to press the input key 43MT once more. Note that pressing the input key 43MT a second time will not initiate any undesirable operation.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, changes to the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 during the period leading up to the start of the transition to the coordinated cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 66 will be described in detail.

Figures 94 to 96 show the correspondence between the contents of displays E1 to E5 described in the "Central Display Section" of item E and the input operation section in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes and operations described in Figure 66.

The state in Figure 94 shows the stage of "E1: Initial screen for collaborative cooking" and shows the relationship between the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M.
95(A) shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of "E2: Change Menu" and the central operation unit 40M. This is the stage at which the input key 43M1 is operated to select one desired food item from the linked cooking modes, and to select the cooking menu of the corresponding linked cooking mode KM3.

Figure 95 (B) shows the stage of "E3: Change selected heating source (select right IH)." This shows the stage where the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made using the input key 43M2.

Next, Figure 96 (A) shows the stage of "E4: Guidance displayed for pressing input button for right IH." This is the stage where the first specific screen 30SP displays a message indicating that the input key 43R1 located on the right operation unit 40R needs to be operated in order to start coordinated cooking. In other words, the user is being recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start cooking step 1 of coordinated cooking.

Figure 96 (B) shows the "E5: IH preheating display" stage. At this stage, the first specific screen 30SP shows that the preheating operation has begun in the right heating section 17HR. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180°C is reached. In response to this, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress", "Preheating completed", and "Notification that the temperature has reached the set temperature" is displayed within the first specific screen 30SP.

Next, Figs. 97 to 103 show the correspondence between the contents of displays E11 to E17 in the "center display section" of item E and the input operation section in explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations of cooking "hamburger steak" (linked cooking mode) described in Fig. 67.

Figure 97 (A) shows the stage of "E11: IH preheating display" explained in item E (center display section) of Figure 67. The first specific screen 30SP displays a message (additional information 331) indicating that preheating has started by the right heating section 17HR and that the set temperature will be reached.

Figure 97 (B) is the stage of "E12: IH heating display" also explained in Figure 67. At this stage, preheating has been completed, and the additional information 331 indicates that heating is now possible with the right heating unit 17HR. In other words, this indicates that it is time to proceed to the induction heating (IH heating) process.

The stage in Figure 98 shows the display content that is displayed a certain time (e.g., one minute) after the display in Figure 97 appears. The display in Figure 98 is not shown in item E in Figure 67.

At the stage shown in FIG. 98, it is shown that in order for the user to end the currently running cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

The next figure, Figure 99, is the stage of "E13: Grill door opening and closing operation guidance display" described in Figure 67. At this stage, induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed, so additional information 331 prompts the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (to carry out cooking process 2).

The next figures 100 (A) to (C) show the stage of "E14: Alternating display of heat power change display and start guidance display" explained in Figure 67. At this stage, it is displayed that the heat power of range grill cooking (combined cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, it is displayed that grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS).

In FIG. 100(C), the input key 43MS is in a flashing state as indicated by the dashed circle, indicating that it is waiting for a user operation. Note that the displays of FIG. 100(A) and FIG. 100(B) are alternated, for example, every 5 seconds.

The following Figures 101(A) to (C) show the "E15: Grill Heating Indication" stage described in Figure 67. Here, it shows that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2).

Figure 101 (A) shows that the heat can be adjusted, and Figure 101 (B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously for combined heating. Figure 101 (C) shows that this RG cooking process (cooking process 2) will end in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

The next figures 102 (A) and (B) show the stage of "E16: Alternating display of extension operation guide and end operation display" explained in Figure 67. Here, the RG heating process has ended, so it is displayed that the time can be extended using the time button (input key 43M3) and grill heating can be performed again.

If the user does not wish to perform extended heating, the display indicates that the user can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) once to end the linked cooking mode without performing extended heating. Note that the first specific screen 30SP with the contents of FIG. 102(A) and FIG. 102(B) are displayed alternately, for example, at intervals of a few seconds.

The next figure 103 shows the "E17: Time setting display" stage. Here, the heating and cooking time can be extended using input key 43M3, and by pressing input key 43MS, heating and cooking can be continued again inside heating chamber 113 for the extended time.

Figure 103 shows the result of setting the extension time (extension time is 2 minutes 30 seconds). After this time setting display, the aforementioned "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternating display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, we will explain Figures 104 to 108.
Figures 104 to 108 show the contents of displays E21 to E26 described in the "central display section" of item E and the state of the input operation section in explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations of cooking "fried chicken" using the collaborative cooking mode KM3 described in Figure 68 (collaborative cooking mode).

Fig. 104(A) shows the stage of "E21: IH preheating display". Here, it can be seen that the left heating section 17HL is performing preheating. In other words, induction heating has already started for the object N placed on the left heating section 17HL.
Fig. 104(B) shows the stage of "E22: Grill door opening/closing operation guidance display". Here, the display prompts the user to open the door 114 and place the food to be cooked (food) in the heating chamber 113 to carry out the grill heating step B23 (see Fig. 68).

The next figures 105 (A) to (C) show the stage "E23: Alternating display of heat level change indication and start guidance indication." Here, when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill driving unit," it is displayed that the heat level can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing input key 43MS.

The displays of FIG. 105(A) and FIG. 105(B) are alternated, for example, every five seconds.
Furthermore, if the door 114 is left open, the display in Fig. 105(C) is displayed. Note that even if the input key 43MS is pressed while the door 114 is left open, the heating operation will not start. If the door 114 is left open, even if a command signal from the input key 43MS reaches the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC will not issue a heating start command unless the door 114 is closed.

Next, Figures 106(A) and (B) show the stage of "E24: Microwave heating display".
Fig. 106(A) shows that the heat of cooking can be changed when the "range grill driving unit" is driven. Note that the period during which the heat can be adjusted is limited to a certain time (e.g., 20 seconds) after the start of cooking step 1 (range heating).

Figure 106 (B) shows the content that is displayed after cooking has started, and is an example of displaying the time remaining until cooking is completed. This is the stage at which cooking process 1 has started.

107(A) and (B) show the stage of "E25: Alternating display of extension operation guide and IH preheat completion display." Here, it is displayed that after the cooking process B24 (see FIG. 68) performed by driving the "range grill driving unit" is completed, the heating cooking time can be extended by extending the time with the time button (input key 43M2).
The display screen of FIG. 107(A) and the display screen of FIG. 107(B) are displayed alternately as a first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

Figure 108 shows the stage "E26: Time setting display". Here, it is displayed that the cooking process B24 will be extended for an additional period of time, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "Range Grill (RG)" heating is completed at this stage in Figure 108, the user can then proceed to cooking process 2 in the left heating section 17HL, which has already been preheated.

(Home appliance operation management system)
Next, Fig. 109 to Fig. 118 will be described. Fig. 109 to Fig. 118 relate to an operation management system for a home appliance that uses a cooking appliance 1 that is the subject of the present disclosure.

Figure 109 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1 during cooking in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 109 shows the control operation on the cooker 1 side. Figure 110 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooker 1 in the example shown in Figure 109.

FIG. 111 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the exchange of information among the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking appliance 1 in the example shown in FIG.
Fig. 112 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after start-up in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 114 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after start-up in the cooking appliance 1.

Figure 115 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 116 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup. Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in Figure 1. Figure 118 is a flowchart showing the exchange of information between the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 when the linked cooking mode is implemented.

Referring to Figure 109 .
The operational steps shown in FIG. 109 are defined in a control program for executing the coordinated cooking mode of the integrated control device MC.
The stock inquiry signal RQ1 is sent at a point prior to this first step SD1, that is, at the stage of step ST2 in FIG.

The operational steps shown in FIG. 109 show what happens after the user's operation (A23) shown in FIG. 71. In step SD1, when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and cooking process 1 is started, the ingredients start to be heated by microwaves.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in Figure 70. At this stage, a voice message is issued saying "Range, starting standard finish," as in notification F24 in Figure 68.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN3 from step SD1 begins (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG. 70. Note that while step SB2 in FIG. 70 measures the temperature rise, step SD2 in FIG. 109 measures the elapsed time TN1.

In the next step SD3, the contents of the started integrated cooking mode KM3 are verified. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and the integrated control device MC can verify that cooking of "fried chicken" is being performed.
It is also clear at this point that cooking process 1 of the fried chicken will use heating chamber 113. In other words, it is clear that once cooking process 1 is completed, heating chamber 113 will no longer be used.

In addition, step SD3 may be omitted and dedicated programs may be prepared for each of the linked cooking modes (e.g., fried chicken, hamburger steak, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not the current mode is a specific coordinated cooking mode. This "specific coordinated cooking mode" is, for example, one of the following:
(1) Foods that can generally be classified as side dishes, such as fried chicken, hamburger steaks, and gyoza dumplings.
(2) The items cooked in each coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) and items that are usually eaten at the same time (e.g., soup, French fries).

If the answer is "No" at step SD4, the operation of FIG. 109 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether cooking step 1 is being performed in heating chamber 113. If "No" in this step SD5, the operation of Fig. 109 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", proceed to the next step SD6. In step SD6, a query signal RQ3 (see FIG. 110) is sent to the home gateway 411 to inquire about the inventory information of ingredients stored in the refrigerator 401.

At the time when the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 as described with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment 1, the conditions are further narrowed down, and at the stage where it is determined that there is a high possibility that stock information is required (step SD6 in FIG. 109), a stock inquiry signal RQ3 is sent.

In the next step SD7, food inventory information is obtained from the home gateway 411. The integrated control device MC then temporarily stores this information in the memory device MM.

In the next step SD8, the received ingredient inventory information is analyzed.
In this step SD8, a search is made for the presence or absence of ingredients highly related to the cooking being performed in the linked cooking mode (in this case, fried chicken). The "relatedness" referred to here typically refers to ingredients (e.g., frozen vegetables) that are often eaten together with the side dish of fried chicken, or rice as a staple food. Therefore, in the following explanation, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted in this step SD8.

If step SD7 returns a "No" result, the process in FIG. 109 ends and the user is not notified of anything.

In the next step SD9, it is determined whether the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed. Then, in the next step SD10, a notification is given that cooking step 1 will soon end. Note that this notification is not shown in FIG. 67. Also, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after the end of cooking step 1, a different cooking menu that effectively utilizes heating chamber 113 that will not be used for cooking fried chicken is notified.
As described above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether the user has performed an operation to stop cooking process 1. If the user has performed a stop operation in this step SD12, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, the end of cooking step 1 is notified (F25: see FIG. 65).
Then, the user takes out the food to be cooked (fried chicken ingredients) from the heating chamber 113 and places it in the food to be heated (frying pan, etc.) N, which has already been preheated to a high temperature, and cooking process 2 begins. At this stage, the cooking oil placed in the food to be heated N has already reached an appropriate temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, in step SD8, which is a stage before the cooking process 1 is completed, the user can know the recommended cooking menu.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use heating chamber 113 to cook another dish prior to cooking step 2.

As described above, for the cooking menu of the "fried chicken" linked cooking mode KM3, the rice, which is the staple food, can be defrosted and the heated food (rice) can be prepared simultaneously, so the actual total time from starting to finishing the linked cooking can be shortened. This can improve user convenience.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed cooking step 1 in the integrated cooking mode is used within a short period of time after the end of cooking step 1, it is expected that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 will be high.
As described above, in the "warm" (automatic range) control menu that uses microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops the microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if high heat remains in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, when using the heating chamber 113 after completing cooking step 1 in the coordinated cooking mode, the user can select the "manual range" control menu (single heating cooking). In other words, the user can set the microwave heating time.

As explained in FIG. 62, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 to perform coordinated cooking, the left heating unit 17HL becomes unusable, but no processing (by the integrated control device MC) is performed to keep the heating chamber 113 occupied until after cooking process 1 is completed. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Furthermore, if a control method is adopted in which the heating chamber 113 continues to be occupied even after cooking step 1 of the coordinated cooking has been completed in the heating chamber 113 (after cooking step 2), the control program may exceptionally release the heating chamber 113 from its occupied state only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8 above.

Next, we will explain Figures 110 and 111.
110 and 111 are diagrams for explaining, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on.
The following will be described with reference to FIG. 110, assuming that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time they are installed in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in "at-home mode" (step SE1 in FIG. 110). "At-home mode" refers to an operation pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. When all the residents are away from home, the mode is switched to "home sitting mode."

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 110). Then, cooking begins in response to the user's input operation.

As explained in FIG. 109, in the cooking device 1, an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the start of cooking process 1 (step SD1). This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives detection information from the human detection unit 413H, which detects the presence and movement of people in the kitchen KT, and determines that it is time to cook, and switches to mutually linked operation with the cooking appliance 1 (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401.
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 to a wireless communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401. Other signals are also transmitted and received via wireless communication between communication unit 446 and the communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401.

Refrigerator 401 searches for the inventory of food stored in refrigerator compartment 401B and multiple freezer compartments 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own memory (step: SE4). Food stored in the refrigerator comes in various forms, such as food that has been partially processed at home or bagged food purchased outside. Many methods have already been proposed for identifying and searching this inventory information, including the use of images taken with a camera, RF tags, and two-dimensional codes.

Additionally, various methods have been proposed, such as a method of manually inputting data such as the name and attributes of food when putting food into refrigerator 401, or a method of automatically reading information about food, etc. optically or magnetically and storing inventory information.
In the present embodiment, since there are no restrictions on identifying the food when it is placed in refrigerator 401 or after it has been placed therein, either method may be used.

Refrigerator 401 transmits the collected inventory information data all at once to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as a reply signal RS1.
Home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data transmitted in reply signal RS1 in storage device 450 (SE5). Note that "temporarily" here refers to the period from when the inventory information data is transmitted again from refrigerator 401 until it is received, and does not mean that the data is stored continuously for a long period of time. The inventory data in storage device 450 is always overwritten with the latest data and saved.

As explained in FIG. 109, when cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113 of the cooking appliance 1, an inventory inquiry signal RQ3 is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 109) (SE6).

The home gateway 411 transmits the latest inventory data stored in the memory device 450 as an inventory data signal RS2 from the communication unit 446 to the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking appliance 1.

In the cooking appliance 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the memory device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of Fig. 109, the integrated control device MC notifies the user of another cooking menu (such as the names of ingredients or dishes) that is directly related to one of the cooking menus in the active cooperative cooking mode from the inventory data (SE8).
In the example of Figure 109, only "fried chicken" has been described as the coordinated cooking mode in which cooking process 1 is performed in heating chamber 113, but as shown in Figure 84, "stir-fried vegetables,""porkcutlet,""tempura," etc. may also be used.

Next, we will explain Figure 111.
FIG. 111 is a diagram explaining the operations after step SE8 in FIG.
When the cooking appliance 1 has completed all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode (SE9), it transmits main data indicating the contents of the coordinated cooking (hereinafter referred to as "cooking execution data") to the home gateway 411 as a signal BS1.

Here, the "cooking execution data" refers to at least one of the following pieces of information:
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the name of the food to be cooked (including abbreviations), such as "fried chicken" or "stir-fried vegetables."
(2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked; (3) Information indicating the control conditions for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 (e.g., microwave output of 500 W, heat of 1500 W during induction heating, or “medium heat”); (4) Information indicating the time required from cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2; (5) Information indicating the end time of cooking process 2 (or the final cooking process); (6) Information indicating the time required from the start of the preheating process to the end of all cooking processes 2; (7) Information identifying the heating source that performed the heating/cooking operation (e.g., left heating unit 17HL); (8) Information regarding restrictions the user will be subject to during the next heating/cooking operation (e.g., that microwave (automatic) heating cannot be performed because the heating chamber 113 is too hot).
(9) Information related to the safety of the user, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113

The "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food being cooked" is, for example, information such as "fried chicken: 300 g." This can be estimated by the integrated control device MC from the rate of temperature rise of the food being cooked (fried chicken) in cooking step 1.

The “cooking execution data” can be useful information for the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 .
In addition, the “cooking execution data” can also be useful information for the alarm device 445.

For example, among the "cooking implementation data," "(4) information indicating the time required to complete cooking process 2," "(5) information indicating the end time," and "(6) information indicating the time required to complete all cooking processes 2" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411. By accumulating this data, it becomes possible to estimate the time periods during which cooking is concentrated in the kitchen KT.

Furthermore, among the "cooking implementation data," "(9) information related to the user's safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can also be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440. This is because it can tell the "deviation" between the current temperature on the cooking device 1 side and the temperature optically measured and estimated by the temperature monitoring device 440 side.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the refrigerator 401. For example, the "cooking execution data" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate periods of time when cooking is concentrated, and it can then be used to predict when food will be stored in the refrigerator 401.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information indicating the state of the external environment from an external electrical device (e.g., an air conditioner or a cooking device) and controls the operating state of each part, such as a cooling device, has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-211153. However, in the conventional proposals, the environmental information provided by the cooking device 1 was often vague and was not necessarily useful from the refrigerator's perspective. In contrast, the "cooking execution data" in this embodiment 1 is based on a specific control menu and is highly useful.

The home gateway 411 converts the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 into a signal BS2 including the "cooking execution data" and transmits it to the refrigerator 401. The contents of the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 and the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS2 may basically be the same, but may also be different. The "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 includes information useful to the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445, but since this information is not necessary for the refrigerator 401, it may be deleted by the home gateway 411 before being transmitted to the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 analyzes the contents of the "cooking execution data" and collects and analyzes data that is useful for the operation of the refrigerator 401 (SE10).
Next, the refrigerator 401 changes the operating conditions of the refrigerator 401 based on the analysis result of the "cooking execution data" (SE12).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 stores the "cooking execution data" in the storage device 450. It also updates the "cooking history data" in the schedule management unit 451. This records the execution date and time of this one heating cooking (linked cooking), the time period, the cooking menu (e.g., the name of the cooking process "fried chicken"), and other related information (e.g., estimated fried chicken weight "300g").

Furthermore, if specific ingredients or cooking menus such as "frozen rice" are recommended based on the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 (see step SD8 in FIG. 109), the schedule management unit 451 may also include the fact of the recommendation in the "cooking history data" recorded. If such daily cooking activities are accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 that utilizes artificial intelligence or the like will have improved "learning and prediction" capabilities, and the value of providing information to the user will gradually increase.

After all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 have been completed, the cooking appliance 1 transmits an operation end notice signal BS3 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
Thereafter, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end notice signal BS3, it ends the "interconnected operation mode". It then switches the alarm device 445 to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). This allows the temperature change in the interior space of the kitchen KT to be monitored regardless of whether the user is in the kitchen KT.

(Display example 1 of inventory information)
FIG. 112 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M of the cooking appliance 1 and the surrounding area of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 112 shows the scene of step SD11 in FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 112 is the stage where "fried chicken," one of the cooking menus in the collaborative cooking mode, is being performed.
While cooking step 1 is being performed in heating chamber 113, integrated display section 30 displays the presence of "frozen rice" as inventory information. The voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user by voice.

112, if the input key 43MT is pressed once, the microwave cooking in cooking step 1 will be stopped. The collaborative cooking mode setting will not be cancelled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is removed from the heating chamber 113, and the food to be cooked is placed on the food to be cooked N placed on the left heating section 17HL, induction heating cooking (cooking step 2) can be started from that point. Note that, as shown in the integrated display section 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is pressed at the initial preheating start stage as explained in Figure 68 (see operation A21 in Figure 68), so there is no need to operate the left operation section 40L again.

As explained in FIG. 89, the user may be asked to press the input key 43MS once when transitioning to cooking process 1 so that the integrated control device MC can clearly grasp the data indicating the timing of transition from the preheating process to cooking process 1.

(Inventory information display example 2)
FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display section 30 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 113 shows an example in which the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in FIG. 112 are changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 113(A), time-saving information 333 indicating that time can be saved and cooking recommendation information 338 for "warming" are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the larger display surface is used to display "Can be heated and defrosted in the heating chamber." In other words, it indicates that "heating" and "defrosting" can be performed using the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 113(A), symbols 335U and 335D indicate that there is more information available, and pressing one of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right keys) corresponding to this symbol will display the next information.

In FIG. 113(A), symbols 336 and 336D indicate that there is more information available, and by pressing one of the input keys 43M3 (a pair of left and right keys) that correspond to this symbol, the next information is displayed.

In FIG. 113(A), if the user operates either input key 43M2 or 43M3, the next information is displayed, reducing the number of situations in which the user becomes confused about how to operate the device.

In another example shown in FIG. 113(B), refrigerator information 334 is displayed in text form in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30.
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the resulting larger display surface is used to display information 339 on two types of individual ingredients, "frozen rice" and "oden." In other words, the user is informed that the ingredients in the refrigerator 401 are "frozen rice" and "oden."

The individual ingredient information is information that identifies one food item. The "ingredient information" of the refrigerator 401 refers to a collection of the individual ingredient information 339.

The display of FIG. 113(A) and FIG. 113(B) may be alternated, for example, every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In either case, the user can understand that, in the middle of cooking step 1, another dish can be prepared in the heating chamber 113 using the ingredient information stored in the refrigerator 401.

FIG. 114 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 114 shows an example in which the display contents of FIG. 52 have been improved.

In this FIG. 114, display screen 1, display screen 2A and display screen 2B are the same as those explained in FIG. 52, so the explanation will be omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen that is displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. The display screen 2C prompts the user to perform an input operation to select a heating source by using a recommendation sentence 30R1.

Next, FIG. 115 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 115 shows yet another example in which the display contents of FIG. 52 are improved.
In this FIG. 115, the display screen 2D is a screen that is displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

The display screen 2C in FIG. 115 informs the user that the cooking appliance 1 is automatically checking the food ingredient information in the refrigerator 401. In other words, it notifies the user that the inventory information acquisition operation is in progress.

In step ST2 shown in FIG. 38, we explained that the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent. The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D in FIG. 115.

Next, FIG. 116 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
After display screen 2D shown in Fig. 115, display screen 2E informs the user that the ingredient information has been acquired. Immediately thereafter, display screen 2E informs the user that the specific ingredients are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "gyoza". Note that the heating source can be freely selected before display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in Fig. 38) immediately after display screen 2C appears, display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed.

(Example of Home Gateway Operation)
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway.
The home gateway determines whether the schedule management unit 451 has entered the "cooking time slot" during the period when the alarm device 445 is operating in the "home mode" as described with reference to FIG.

The "cooking time slot" may be manually input by the resident using the input unit 449 (see FIG. 4). For example, the cooking time slot may be set to be from 6:30 to 7:30 a.m. on weekdays.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operating time periods of the cooking appliance 1 for the past 30 days, for example, and determines that the average time period is between 6:20 and 7:30 a.m.

In the above-mentioned situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether the current time is within the cooking time slot.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, then as described above, it is within the average time period (6:20 to 7:30 a.m.), so the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human detection sensors 452, 453 of the human detection unit 413H have detected a human.
For example, if a resident moves through the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1, or stands still in front of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking appliance 1, such human movement is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to the next step SF3.
In step SF3, it is determined whether or not the door (not shown) of refrigerator 401 has been opened based on operation information from refrigerator 401. If it is detected that the door has been opened and then closed (SF4), the latest status of the foods stored in refrigerator 401 is confirmed in the next step SF5.

The confirmation of inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described in FIG. 110.

Refrigerator 401 transmits the collected inventory information data collectively as a reply signal RS1 to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as described in FIG.
Main control unit 447 of home gateway 411 then compares the latest collected inventory information data with the inventory information data previously sent from refrigerator 401, and if there is no change, ends the process in step SF6.

In step SF6, if there is a change from the previous inventory information data, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with the new data (SF7).

Then, the process prepares for an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 from the cooking appliance 1 to arrive.
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires inventory information of the refrigerator 401 even before the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on, and operates to provide the inventory information quickly when an inquiry is made from the cooking appliance 1.

It is believed that a certain amount of time is required to investigate the inventory of food stored in refrigerator 401 in detail, and there is also a concern that if the door of refrigerator 401 is left open, light from external lighting will become disturbance light and interfere with optical detection, image analysis, etc. For these reasons, the inventory information is quickly obtained immediately after the door of refrigerator 401 is closed.

The above configuration makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the inventory data collection reply signal RS1 described in FIG. 110 is delayed from the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, the system allows the cooking appliance 1 to obtain the latest inventory information.

(Displaying information on individual ingredients during the heating pause period)
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing another operation program for acquiring individual ingredient information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 of the cooker 1.

In the operation program of FIG. 109, inventory information is automatically acquired midway through cooking process 1 in heating chamber 113, and a recommended cooking menu is notified.
In contrast, the example shown in Figure 118 notifies the user that another cooking process can be performed during the "heating pause period" between cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 in the coordinated cooking mode, and can notify the user in response to commands.
Therefore, there is no contradiction between the operation according to the operation program of Fig. 109 and the notification method according to the operation program shown in Fig. 118. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (used together).

The cooking device 1 described up to FIG.
(1) Operate the induction heating source 9 (IH) Single cooking mode KM1
(2) Operate the microwave heating source 189 (range) in the single cooking mode KM1
(3) Operate the oven heating source 188 (oven) Single cooking mode KM1
(4) A coordinated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source are operated sequentially through a transition period TR whose start and end timings are determined depending on a user's input operation.
The above function is executed in response to user input operations.

Furthermore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking process 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR,
The integrated control device MC was configured to notify, during the cooking process 1, at least one of a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 and individual ingredient information of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu after the cooking process 1 is completed, via the notification unit AN.

In contrast, the example shown in FIG. 118 notifies the user that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with cooking process 2) even during the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in FIG. 62 to FIG. 64) after cooking process 1 is completed, and can notify the user in response to a command.

In FIG. 118, step SG1 is the stage at which the collaborative cooking mode is selected and the user selects the cooking menu desired by the user (e.g., fried chicken) from the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, similar to step SD5 in FIG. 109, it is determined whether cooking process 1 of the selected combined cooking mode KM3 is to be performed in the heating chamber 113.
If the answer is "Yes" at step SG2, the process proceeds to next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, an inquiry is made to the home gateway 411 about inventory information. In this step SG3, the inventory information, particularly information about frozen foods and reheated foods, is obtained. Note that in this Figure 118, the step of receiving inventory information and temporarily storing it, such as step SD7 in Figure 109, is omitted, but the operating program in this Figure 118 also performs similar processing.

The next step SG4 is to determine whether cooking process 1 being performed in heating chamber 113 has ended.

If cooking process 1 has ended at step SG4, the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in Figures 62 to 64) begins from that point. In other words, the heating operation of the coordinated cooking is paused, and the device is waiting for a command from the user to start cooking process 2.

During such a transition period TR, step SG5 determines whether another cooking operation can be performed. This corresponds to step SD8 in FIG. 109.

If step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, where the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that there are suggestions for other cooking options that can be prepared in the heating chamber 113. If the determination result of step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

In the subsequent step SG6, if a specific input key on the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) is operated, the result is determined to be "Yes."

In step SG7, one or more other cooking menus that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (for example, "warming gyoza") are displayed. The display may be on the integrated display unit 30 that displays the cooking steps in the linked cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8, where the process waits for a command to start cooking step 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
Fig. 119 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 120 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. Fig. 121 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.

Figure 119 shows an example of the display of the integrated display section 30 in the scene of step SG6 in Figure 118. As is clear from this Figure 119, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see Figure 21) of the integrated display section 30 are combined into one, forming a horizontally long display area.

In FIG. 119, reference numeral 338 denotes recommended information indicating in text that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and reference numeral 337 denotes a display guide section that explains the operation of the input key 43M2 to display the suggested cooking menu of the recommended information.

In the state shown in FIG. 119, the individual light-emitting element 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 flashes as indicated by a dotted circle to prompt the user to perform an input operation. In this state, by pressing one of the (two) input keys 43M2, individual ingredient information 339 such as a specific recipe recommendation (e.g., "frozen rice") can be displayed on this first specific screen 30SP.

In Fig. 119, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the display screen is switched to that of Fig. 120. The recommended information 338 shown in Fig. 119 changes to the content shown in Fig. 120.
In Fig. 120, 339 denotes individual ingredient information indicating in text another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 119. In the example shown in Fig. 120, the weight and freezing temperature of refrigerated "gyoza" and frozen "rice" are displayed. In other words, the individual ingredient information includes the name and weight of each ingredient, as well as the refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.). Note that it may also include related information such as expiration date information and the start date (date) of storage in the refrigerator 401.

Next, Fig. 121 shows the display contents that will automatically switch if the display contents shown in Fig. 119 remain unchanged for a few seconds. In other words, after the state shown in Fig. 119 is reached, if a few seconds pass without the input key 43M2 being pressed, the display will switch to the display screen shown in Fig. 121. Also, if a few seconds pass in this state of Fig. 121, it will automatically return to the display of Fig. 119.

As is clear from Figures 119 to 121, the integrated control device MC is configured to notify, during cooking process 1, at least one of the cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 and the refrigerator inventory information related to the cooking menu after the cooking process 1 is completed, by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the example shown in Figures 118 to 121, after cooking step 1 is completed, during the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in Figures 62 to 64), a notification is given that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with cooking step 2), and information about the ingredients to be used in the "another cooking" can be given in response to a user's command.

For this reason, for example, when one cooking A (e.g. fried chicken) in the linked cooking mode has entered cooking step 2 in the left heating section 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, another cooking B (thawing and warming frozen rice) can be carried out simultaneously in the heating chamber 113. In other words, when cooking A and cooking B are to be eaten in one meal, cooking can be done in parallel, rather than starting cooking B after cooking A is finished. This shortens the overall cooking time and improves user convenience.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed above the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
An alarm unit AN (including the integrated control device 30 and the voice synthesizer 95) that provides information about cooking;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a common operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the heating units,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is for executing a cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) receiving an input from the common operation unit 40M and selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended in response to commands from the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
(3) During the cooking process 1, a part or all of the input functions for the second heating means in the common operation unit 40M are disabled,
(4) when the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the common operation unit 40M is restored;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are performed according to instructions from the common operation unit 40M.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, after selecting a cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 in the central operation unit 40M and switching to the linked cooking mode, the start and end of the heating operation for cooking process 1 can be determined by the first individual operation unit 40R or the second individual operation unit 40L corresponding to the heating unit, and since some or all of the input functions for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M are disabled during this period of cooking process 1 (from start to finish), even if the user mistakenly operates the central operation unit 40M, the heating operation for cooking process 1 will not be stopped unintentionally. In other words, it is possible to prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

Furthermore, when cooking step 1 is subsequently completed, the input function for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M can be restored, and cooking step 2 using the heating chamber 113 can be controlled by the central operation unit 40M. This improves user operability, making it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The second heating means HM2 is composed of a plurality of heating sources (a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188) using different heating principles,
The integrated control device MC further has a single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, and a composite cooking mode KM2 combining a plurality of the heating sources of the second heating means and automatically proceeding with cooking,
The integrated control device MC selects one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2 in response to an input from the common operation unit 40M.
The configuration was disclosed.

This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods to suit a variety of foods.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the common operation unit 40M and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units,
The integrated control device MC displays cooking process information 332 including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display unit 30 before the start of the cooking process 1, and continues the display until the end of the cooking process 2.
The configuration was disclosed.

As a result, the user can easily view information about the cooking process on the integrated display unit 30, making it possible to provide a highly operable cooking device, despite being a combined cooking device.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The heating chamber 113 further includes a door 114 for closing the opening of the heating chamber 113 in an openable and closable manner.
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door,
When the integrated control device MC detects that the cooking process 1 is completed and that the door 114 is closed after the completion of the cooking process, the integrated control device MC restores an input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M.
The configuration was disclosed.

As a result, the heating operation will not be started while the heating chamber 113 is open, making it possible to provide a highly safe heating cooker.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
Before the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the integrated control device MC displays an initial standby screen (see FIG. 52) on the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN, and when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, displays a first specific screen 30SP instead of the initial standby screen.
A cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) to which the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be applied is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
The configuration was disclosed.

This allows the user to easily recognize the desired cooking menu in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, providing a cooking device with high operability.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
When the composite cooking mode is selected, the integrated control device MC displays a second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display unit 30 instead of the standby initial screen;
The second specific screen 30SC displays a control menu (e.g., a "range grill menu") to which the composite cooking mode KM2 can be applied.
The configuration was disclosed.

This allows the user to easily recognize the desired control menu in the combined cooking mode KM2, providing a cooking device with high operability.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The integrated control device MC displays an initial standby screen on the integrated display unit 30 before the single cooking mode KM1 is selected, and when the single cooking mode KM1 is selected, displays a third specific screen 30ST instead of the initial standby screen.
The third specific screen 30ST displays a control menu (e.g., "boil water") to which the single cooking mode KM1 can be applied.
The configuration was disclosed.

This allows the user to easily recognize the desired control menu (e.g., "boil water") in the single cooking mode KM1, providing a cooking device that is easy to operate.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The heating unit 17 includes a first heating unit 17HR (on the right side) and a second heating unit 17HL (on the left side) that are separated in the left-right direction,
The individual operation units 40L and 40R include a first individual operation unit 40R corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit 40L corresponding to the second heating unit 17HL.
The configuration was disclosed.

As a result, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, two heating elements 17HR and 17HL can be used, expanding the range of cooking locations available to the user, providing a highly convenient cooking appliance.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The common operation unit 40MC includes an input key 43M1 for selecting a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode, and an input key 43M2 for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected by the input key 43M1,
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking process 1, the input functions of the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 are disabled.
The configuration was disclosed.

Therefore, during the period of cooking process 1 (from start to finish), even if the input key 43M1 for selecting the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43M2 for setting control conditions are mistakenly operated on the central operation unit 40M, the heating operation of cooking process 1 will not be stopped unintentionally. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that prevents user operation errors and cooking failures.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment has
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the common operation unit 40M and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
The first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30,
The first specific screen 30SP displays at least one of the following information: identification information 330 of the cooking menu; information (331) indicating the heating source used in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2; information (332) indicating the progress of cooking; and information regarding the control conditions applied to the cooking menu (see FIG. 88 , 30V).
The configuration was disclosed.

This allows the user to know various information about cooking steps 1 and 2, eliminating the user's sense of anxiety and preventing the user from misunderstanding or operating incorrectly, providing a highly convenient cooking device.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The common operation unit 40M further includes an input key 43MC for selecting the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
When the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input key 43MC, the input function of the common operation unit 40M for a new cooking using the second heating means is restricted.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 62).

Therefore, even if the input key 43M1 and the input key 43M2 for setting control conditions on the central operation unit 40M are operated erroneously, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 will not be stopped unintentionally. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
When the start unit 43MS determines that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is to be started, the common operation unit 40M is restricted in its input function for a new cooking operation using the second heating means.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 63).

Therefore, even if the input key 43M1 and the input key 43M2 for setting control conditions on the central operation unit 40M are operated erroneously, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 will not be stopped unintentionally. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The common operation unit 40M includes a selection unit 43M1 for displaying a second specific screen 30SC for selecting a control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2, a start unit 43MS for transitioning to an operation of the composite cooking mode KM3, and a termination unit 43MT for canceling the operation of the composite cooking mode KM2.
The start section 43MS and the end section 43MT are shared for starting and canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 21).

This has the advantage that necessary input keys can be installed in the required size in the central operation unit 40M, where installation space is limited, and also improves user operability by sharing input keys.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
When the end unit 43MT is operated once during the cooking process 2, the cooking process 2 ends, and when the end unit 43MT is operated once more, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled.
The configuration was disclosed.

Therefore, depending on the number of times the input key 43MT of the end section is operated, it is possible to end the cooking process 2 or cancel the operation of the combined cooking mode KM2.
This makes it possible to provide a cooking device with good operability by utilizing one input key (end portion) 43MT.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment has
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
Upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are disposed in the upper space 300A, which introduce outside air without passing through the lower space 300B and pass cooling air through the upper space 300A.
Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are disposed in the lower space 300B to introduce outside air without passing through the upper space 300A and pass cooling air through the lower space 300B.
The integrated control device MC is cooled by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61.
The configuration was disclosed.

Due to this configuration, the operation and cooling of the induction heating source 9 in the upper space 300A and the cooling of the microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188, heating chamber 113, etc. in the lower space 300B can be carried out independently without affecting (interfering with) each other.
Furthermore, the integrated control device MC is also cooled by the cooling air flowing inside the upper space 300A, which prevents overheating of the internal components of the cooking device 1 and ensures stable operation.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment has
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key (start unit) 43MS for switching to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is started by the start input key 43MS.
The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is terminated by the termination input key 43MT.
The configuration was disclosed.

As a result, the start and end of the heating operation for cooking process 2 can be performed centrally at the central operation unit 40M, so the user can start and end cooking process 2 by operating the central operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object placed above the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
A notification unit AN for providing information about cooking;
a control unit MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the control unit MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a common operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The control unit MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are integrated with each other,
The cooperative cooking mode is a mode in which a cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1.
The control unit MC is
(1) receiving an input from the common operation unit 40M and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended in response to a command from the common operation unit 40M.
(3) During the cooking process 1, some or all of the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R are disabled,
(4) when the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation units 40L and 40R is restored;
(5) The cooking process 2 is started and ended according to instructions from the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, after selecting a cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 in the central operation unit 40M and switching to the linked cooking mode, the start and end of the heating operation for cooking process 1 can be determined by the shared operation 40M, and during the period (from start to finish) of this cooking process 1, some or all of the input functions for the first heating means HM2 (induction heating source) in the individual operation units 40L, 40R are disabled, so that even if the user mistakenly operates the individual operation units 40L, 40R, the heating operation for cooking process 1 will not be stopped unintentionally. In other words, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

In this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed above the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit AN (including an integrated display unit 30 and a voice synthesizer 95) for providing information about cooking;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a common operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the heating units 17HL and 17HR,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes at least two cooking steps, namely, a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2,
a first coordinated cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 is used in the cooking process 1 and the second heating means HM2 is used in the cooking process 2, and a second coordinated cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is used in the cooking process 1 and the first heating means HM1 is used in the cooking process 2,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 in which a preheating process by either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2 is executed in addition to the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2,
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) When the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units.
(2) Displaying a plurality of cooking menu options (e.g., “hamburger steak” and “fried chicken”) on the first specific screen 30SP,
(3) When one of the cooking menu candidates is selected, automatically determining either the first cooperative cooking mode or the second cooperative cooking mode;
(4) requesting input of control conditions to be applied to the selected cooking menu from the common operation unit 40M;
(5) restricting input functions of the individual operation unit and the shared operation unit 40M during the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2;
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, with one cooking device 1, the combined cooking mode KM3, which has different heating locations and heating means, can be selected, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, when the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected, the user can check the desired cooking menu options on a dedicated display screen (first specific screen 30SP) and then switch to operation in the linked cooking mode.

Furthermore, during the preheating process, cooking process 1, and cooking process 2, the input functions of the individual operation units 40L, 40R and the common operation unit 40M are restricted, thereby preventing user operation errors and cooking failures, and providing a highly convenient heating cooker.

In this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN for providing information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2, and has a “first cooperative cooking mode” of a type in which the first heating means is used for the cooking process 1, and a “second cooperative cooking mode” of a type in which the second heating means is used for the cooking process 1,
In either the "first cooperative cooking mode" or the "second cooperative cooking mode",
(1) The common operation unit 40M selects the cooperative cooking mode and determines to start the cooking process 1;
(2) The end of the cooking process 2 is performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R when the cooking process 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1, and is performed by the shared operation unit 40M when the cooking process 2 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, with one cooking device 1, the combined cooking mode KM3, which has different heating locations and heating means, can be selected, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in both the first and second coordinated cooking modes, the common operation unit 40M selects the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and decides to start the cooking process, and the cooking process 2 is ended by the individual operation unit 40L, 40R or the common operation unit 40M corresponding to the heating means in charge, so that the operation rules are simple and it is expected that user operation errors and confusion will be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability, even though it has two or more heating sources and input operation units 40 (two or more locations).

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The common operation unit 40M is provided with a termination unit 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2 at the stage of the cooking process 1.

Therefore, if for some reason it is desired to cancel the operation of the coordinated cooking mode, the operation of the coordinated cooking mode can be easily cancelled at any time by using the end section (input key) 43MT of the common operation section 40M, regardless of the stage of the cooking process, so that the user can easily cancel the coordinated cooking mode, resulting in good operability.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1 was configured to include an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation when the common operation unit 40MC is operated, and individual display units 31L, 31R that perform a display operation when the individual operation units are operated.

As a result, the user can obtain information that is helpful for operation both when operating the shared operation unit 40M and when operating the individual operation units 40L and 40R, thereby improving operability.

Further, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of this embodiment 1, the notification unit AN includes an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation when the common operation unit 40M is operated, and individual display units 31L and 31R that perform a display operation when the individual operation units are operated,
The integrated display unit 30 is configured to display information showing the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 during the period from the start to the end of the cooperative cooking mode.

This allows the user to see the display on the integrated display unit 30 and understand the progress of the cooking process, improving peace of mind and convenience.

Further, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, the ending unit 43MT has a ending function that allows a user to end the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 at any time,
When the termination unit 43MT is operated once, the termination function is exercised, and when the termination unit 43MT is operated twice in succession, the function of canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is provided.

As a result, cooking can be stopped and the linked cooking mode can be cancelled depending on the number of times the termination section 43MT of the shared operation section 40M is operated, improving the operability of the shared operation section 40MC.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, when the common operation unit 40M is performing an operation to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and start the cooking process, some or all of the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R are restricted.

Therefore, even if the individual operation units 40L and 40R are operated by mistake while the common operation unit 40M is being used to select the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and move to cooking step 1, the input of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 will not be cancelled all the way to the beginning, which is expected to improve the user's sense of security and operability.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of this embodiment 1, when the individual operation units 40L, 40R start the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the coordinated cooking mode, the common operation unit 40M is configured to limit the input function for a new cooking operation that uses the second heating means.

Therefore, when cooking in one coordinated cooking mode KM3 is being performed using the individual operation units 40L and 40R, even if the shared operation unit 40M is operated by mistake, it does not affect the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, which is expected to improve the user's sense of security and operability.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, when the common operation unit 40M is used to select the linked cooking mode and perform an operation to start the cooking process, the integrated display unit 30 is configured to display a first specific screen 30SP on which identification information of the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode is displayed.

This allows the user to proceed with the transition to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 while referring to the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, thereby improving operability for the user.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, the integrated control device MC is configured to notify "information for assisting user operation" such as the end of cooking process 1 or a prompt to prepare for the next cooking process 2 by the notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30 and voice synthesis device 95) at or before the end of cooking process 1 in each of the first and second coordinated cooking modes, and to transition to a standby period TR in which to wait for instructions from the user.

This allows cooking in the collaborative cooking mode to proceed more efficiently and improves user operability.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, the second heating means HM2 was configured to include a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113.

As a result, in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to heat the food to be cooked using a combination of microwaves and radiant heat, etc., and it is expected that various foods can be heated effectively and efficiently using two heating sources with different heating principles. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1 that can handle various foods.

Further, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the inside of the main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B,
The upper space 300A includes upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air without passing through the lower space 300B in order to cool the interior of the upper space,
The lower space 300B includes lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air without passing through the upper space 300A in order to cool the inside of the lower space 300B.
The upper cooling fans 60, 61 are configured to be operated during a period in which at least one of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is driven.

Therefore, regardless of whether the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2 is driven, the upper space 300A is cooled by outside air through the upper cooling fans 60, 61. This makes it possible to maintain the cooling effect of important electrical components related to the overall function of the cooking appliance 1, such as the microcomputer, which is the core part of the integrated control device MC housed in the upper space 300A, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, etc. This is expected to have the effect of preventing quality deterioration and operational malfunctions due to overheating.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, an abnormality detection unit EM is further provided inside the main body 110, and the abnormality detection unit EM has a function of detecting an abnormality in the temperature of the upper space 300A, and if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC cancels the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and stops the driving of all heating means that are in heating operation, and even after the driving is stopped, the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are configured to perform heat dissipation operation.

As a result, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit EM, all heating sources automatically stop operating, ensuring high safety. Even in this case, the upper space 300A is cooled by outside air via the upper cooling fans 60, 61, so the cooling effect of important electrical components related to the overall function of the cooking appliance 1, such as the integrated control device MC, power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, etc. housed in the upper space 300A, can be maintained. This is expected to have the effect of preventing quality deterioration and operational malfunctions due to overheating.

Further, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the abnormality detection unit EM further has a function of detecting an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 (an “abnormality 4” detection function),
If the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 while the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is being performed, the integrated control device MC is configured to cancel the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, stop the driving of all heating means that are in heating operation, and immediately stop the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61.

Therefore, if an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 is detected, all heating sources automatically stop operating, ensuring high safety. In addition, since the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are stopped immediately, if the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are broken, the situation can be prevented from becoming more serious.

Further, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the heating chamber 113 has a door 114 that can open and close the front opening,
The common operation unit 40M has an input key 43MS for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and deciding to start the cooking process 1,
The control unit MC has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door 114 during the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, and if the opening of the door 114 is detected while the second heating means HM2 is performing the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, the operation of the second heating means HM2 is stopped, and if the closing of the door 114 is subsequently detected, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is resumed only if an operation to resume the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed in the shared operation unit 40M.

Due to this configuration, when cooking is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2, if the door 114 is opened during the cooking process to check the food to be cooked, etc., and then the door 114 is closed, simply closing the door 114 will not resume cooking.
Therefore, if the door 114 is accidentally closed, the so-called "empty cooking" state in which the heating operation starts when no food to be cooked is placed inside the heating chamber 113 can be avoided, making this a highly safe configuration.

In this embodiment 1, the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110, the opening of which is closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating objects N placed above heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at two positions on the left and right of the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information about cooking;
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 which start operating when the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven, respectively;
Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
An abnormality detection unit EM;
An input operation unit 40 for inputting a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) Notifying that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled;
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues until stop condition A is satisfied.
A cooking device 1 was disclosed (see Figures 45 to 47 and Figures 48 to 50).

Therefore, by utilizing the combined cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods.
Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 that cool the first heating means HM1, which is the heat source of cooking process 1, continues in cooling operation for only the necessary period of time, thereby preventing overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1.

In other words, the upper space 300A houses the integrated control device MC, power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional components of the cooking appliance 1, and the temperatures of these components can be maintained at normal levels, preventing malfunctions or deterioration in quality.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues until a stop condition A is satisfied.
The stop condition A depends on the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51), or depends on the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51).

For example, the first cooling fan 60 is configured to perform "heat dissipation operation" for up to 10 minutes from the time when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 ends or until the temperature of the top plate 15 drops below the reference temperature (see heat dissipation operation time Th1).

As a result, even after an abnormality is detected during the linked cooking mode KM3 and the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped, sufficient cooling operation continues, preventing overheating of the main body 110 of the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The integrated control device MC has a function of restricting the heating means to be used in the cooking process 2 from being used by other cooking during the cooking process 1, and this function is released when the operation of the linked cooking mode is canceled.
The configuration was disclosed (see Figures 61 to 63).

As a result, heating means up to cooking step 2 of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be secured in advance, which makes it possible to avoid situations where the desired heating means is not available at the second cooking step, thereby providing a highly convenient heating cooker that avoids confusion and inconvenience for the user.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key (decision unit) 43MS for deciding the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a first individual operation unit 40R for commanding the start and stop of the cooking process 1, and an operation unit 40M for commanding the stop of the cooking process 2,
The input operation unit 40 is provided with an input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The configuration was disclosed (see Figures 60 to 65).

As a result, the start and end of the heating operation for cooking process 2 can be performed centrally at the central operation unit 40M, so the user can start and end cooking process 2 by operating the central operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The central operation unit 40M is disposed in the left-right central portion of the main body 110 so as to be operable from above,
The input key (decision section) 43MS and the input key (end section) 43MT are arranged on the central operation section 40M.
The configuration was disclosed (see Figures 20, 21, and 60 to 65).

As a result, the central operation unit 40M can be operated from above the main body 110, and the start and end of the coordinated cooking mode can be performed centrally, providing a heating cooker with good operability.

In this embodiment 1, the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110, the opening of which is closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating objects N placed above heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at two positions on the left and right of the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information about cooking;
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 which start operating when the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven, respectively;
Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
An abnormality detection unit EM;
An input operation unit 40 for inputting a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 2;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) The notification unit EM notifies the user that the operation of the combined cooking mode KM3 has been canceled.
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped,
(5) The operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 continues until stop condition B is satisfied.
A cooking device 1 was disclosed (see Figures 45 to 47 and Figures 48 to 50).

Therefore, by utilizing the combined cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods.
Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 that cool the first heating means HM1, which is the heat source for cooking process 1, continues in cooling operation for only the necessary period of time, thereby preventing overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1.

In other words, the upper space 300A houses the integrated control device MC, power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional components of the cooking appliance 1, and the temperatures of these components can be maintained at normal levels, preventing malfunctions or deterioration in quality.

As described above, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment is
The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues until the “stop condition A” is satisfied.
The "stop condition A" depends on the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51). Alternatively, the "stop condition A" depends on the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51).
Furthermore, when the induction heating source 9 is not driven, it continues to operate at least until the driving of the other heating sources is stopped (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

On the other hand, the "stop condition B" is as follows.
48 to 50, the lower cooling fan 129 performs a "heat radiation operation" for three minutes from the time when the microwave heating operation ends. In other words, the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at three minutes.

48 to 50, the lower (third) cooling fan 128 performs a "heat radiation operation" for three minutes from the time when the microwave heating operation ends. In other words, this "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at three minutes.
On the other hand, in the case of oven cooking, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is finished, and the oven is operated until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 falls below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.

In this way, even after an abnormality is detected, the cooling operation of the heating chamber 113, microwave source 122, etc. in the lower space 300B continues, so that their temperatures can be maintained at normal levels, preventing malfunctions, deterioration in quality, etc.

In this embodiment 1, the cooking device 1 according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110, the opening of which is closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating objects N placed above heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at two positions on the left and right of the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information about cooking;
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 which start operating when the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven, respectively;
Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
An abnormality detection unit EM;
An input operation unit 40 for inputting a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) The notification unit EM notifies the user that the operation of the combined cooking mode KM3 has been canceled.
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped,
(5) The operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 continues until stop condition B is satisfied.
The disclosure of the cooking device 1 having the above configuration (see Figs. 45 to 47 and Figs. 48 to 50).

Therefore, by utilizing the combined cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods.
Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 that cool the first heating means HM1, which is the heat source for cooking process 1, continues in cooling operation for only the necessary period of time, thereby preventing overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1.

In addition, the lower cooling fans 128, 129 continue to operate until the temperature of the lower space 300B, which includes the heating chamber 113, etc., drops, preventing the main body 110 of the cooking device 1 from overheating.

The upper space 300A contains the integrated control device MC, power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, integrated display unit 30, and other important functional components of the cooking device 1, and can maintain the normal temperatures of these components, preventing malfunctions and deterioration of quality.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The stop condition B of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is determined by the temperature of the heating chamber 113 or the second heating means HM2.
The configuration was disclosed.

As described in the first embodiment, the "stop condition B" is as follows.
First, the lower (fourth) cooling fan 129 performs a "heat radiation operation" for three minutes from the time when the microwave heating operation ends as described in Figures 48 to 50. In other words, the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at three minutes.

48 to 50, the lower (third) cooling fan 128 performs a "heat radiation operation" for three minutes from the time when the microwave heating operation ends. In other words, this "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at three minutes.
On the other hand, in the case of oven cooking, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is finished, and the oven is operated until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 falls below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.

As a result, if the lower cooling fans 128, 129 are operating, and an abnormality is detected and the second heating means HM2 is stopped in an emergency, the operation of the lower cooling fans 128, 129 will continue until the temperature of the lower space 300B including the heating chamber 113 etc. drops. This makes it possible to prevent the main body 110 of the cooking appliance 1 from overheating.

In this embodiment 1, the cooking device 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110, the opening of which is closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating objects N placed above heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at two positions on the left and right of the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information about cooking;
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 which start operating when the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven, respectively;
Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
An abnormality detection unit EM;
An input operation unit 40 for inputting a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 2;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) The notification unit EM notifies the user that the operation of the combined cooking mode KM3 has been canceled.
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues until stop condition A is satisfied.
The disclosure of the cooking device 1 having the above configuration (see Figs. 45 to 47 and Figs. 48 to 50).

Therefore, by utilizing the combined cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods.
Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 continues in cooling operation for the necessary period until stop condition A is satisfied, thereby preventing overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1.

In the first embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed;
An abnormality detection unit EM of the top plate 15;
An alarm unit AN;
The top plate 15 is disposed at the top, and a main body 110 having the abnormality detection unit EM and the notification unit AN therein is provided.
The inside of the body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S.
The IH coil installation space CK partitioned within the upper space 300A includes an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated, and upper cooling fans (first cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61) that cool a heat-generating electronic component (heat sink 82) of the induction heating source 9.
The lower space 300B includes a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is freely opened and closed by a door 114, a microwave heating source 189 which supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, an oven heating source 188 which heats the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113, and lower cooling fans (third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan) 129 which cool heat-generating electronic components (heat dissipation section 122H, inverter circuit board 121, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 with cooling air and exhaust the cooling air via the outside of the IH coil installation space CK,
an integrated control device MC disposed in the upper space 300A for controlling the operation of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129;
When at least one of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 is driven, the integrated control device MC drives the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 to introduce outside air into the upper space 300A,
The integrated control device MC has a function of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that executes, for one food item, a preheating process of preheating the food item on the top plate 15 using the induction heating source 9 and a cooking process of heating the food item using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 during the same time period;
When the integrated control device MC receives an abnormality occurrence signal from the abnormality detection unit EM during cooking by driving at least one of the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the integrated control device MC issues an alarm via the alarm unit AN, and performs an emergency stop of the induction heating source 9, and the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower cooling fans 128, 129 continue to operate under the same conditions as before receiving the abnormality occurrence signal.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 having the above-mentioned configuration.

Because of this configuration, even if the induction heating source 9 is shut down in an emergency due to an abnormality, the temperatures of the important functional components of the cooking device 1, such as the integrated control device MC, power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, and integrated display unit 30, can be maintained at normal levels, preventing malfunctions or deterioration in quality.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that cooperates at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 with the induction heating source 9,
The combined cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9 and a cooking process 2 performed in the heating chamber 113,
When the induction heating source is stopped in an emergency during the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC cancels the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and ends cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the cooperative pre-heating cooking mode KM4.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 having the above structure.

Therefore, if the induction heating source 9 is forced to shut down due to an abnormality, cooking can be performed by effectively utilizing other heating sources regardless of the constraints (occupation of heating sources) of the linked cooking mode KM3 or the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, which is expected to improve user convenience.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, outside air is introduced directly into the IH coil installation space CK by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the lower space 300B, and an upper air passage AH is formed to exhaust the outside air to the outside of the IH coil installation space CK,
The integrated control device MC and the inverter circuit board 80 of the induction heating source 9 are disposed inside the upper air passage AH.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 having the above structure.

This configuration allows the integrated control device MC and inverter circuit board 80, which are important functional components of the cooking device 1, to be cooled by fresh outside air without passing through the lower space 300B, preventing malfunctions or deterioration in quality due to overheating, thereby providing a highly reliable cooking device 1.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH through which outside air is introduced by the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 from an air intake port located at the bottom of the main body,
The lower air passage UH was configured to include a first lower air passage that accommodated an inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 9, and a second lower air passage in which a heat dissipation portion 122H of the microwave heating source 9 was arranged.

With this configuration, fresh outside air is introduced into the lower space 300B without passing through the upper space 300A, so the heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave heating source 9 can be effectively cooled, providing a highly reliable cooking device 1 that does not suffer from malfunctions or deterioration in quality due to overheating.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) During a period in which one control menu is being executed with only the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189, the lower cooling fans 128, 129 and the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are both operating.
(2) In a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are automatically driven in sequence, during a period in which one control menu is being continuously executed, the lower cooling fans 128, 129 and the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are both operated.
(3) During a period in which one control menu is being executed using only the induction heating source 9, the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are operated, and the lower cooling fans 128, 129 are not operated (see FIG. 44).

With this configuration, the temperature of the upper space 300A housing the integrated control device MC etc. is kept low by the upper cooling fans 60, 61, and when only heating is performed by the induction heating source 9, the cooling fan in the lower space 300B is not operated, so the power consumption of the cooling fans as a whole can be reduced.

In addition, when only the oven heating source 188 is operated for heating, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated, resulting in energy-saving operation.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment,
The integrated display unit 30 constituting the notification unit AN is configured to display unique identification information 330 for identifying the applicable cooked food (e.g., "hamburger steak") when the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected (display of the first identification screen 30SP).

This configuration allows the user to look at the first specific screen 30SP and directly select the food they want to cook, simplifying the user's operation procedure and improving convenience.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
A left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R as a first operation unit for setting heating conditions (e.g., heating power level, heating power value, heating time, etc.) of the induction heating source 9 and for issuing commands to start and stop a heating operation;
A central operation unit 40M as a second operation unit that sets the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 189 and commands the start and stop of the heating operation,
The cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected by the second operation unit (central operation unit 40M),
The preheating step is terminated by the first operation unit (left operation unit 40L, right operation unit 40R).

With this configuration, the user can select the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 using the central operation unit 40M, and then start and stop the heating operation using the first operation units (left operation unit 40L, right operation unit 40R) that correspond to the heating units 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9. This reduces the user's confusion about how to start and stop the cooking process that uses the induction heating source 9 in the linked cooking mode KM3, improving operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC disclosed a configuration having the function of executing a single cooking mode KM1 in which the induction heating source 9 is operated alone, and a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are automatically combined to automatically proceed with one cooking process.

With this configuration, the user can use the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in addition to the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4, allowing them to use a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated display unit 30 constituting the notification unit AN further includes a display screen 30D.
When the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected, a first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display screen 30D.
When the combination cooking mode KM2 is selected, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the display screen 30D.

This configuration allows the user to easily select the desired food to be cooked and the control menu using the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC that are displayed, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body 110 further includes an input operation unit 40 as an input means,
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means (input keys 43KP) for changing the functions of the integrated control device MC,
At least one of the display method of each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the display method of each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.
For example, the input key 43KP can be used to set the priority of each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 when displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Because of this configuration, when the function mode is selected, the user can change the display method of the control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2 and the display method and display priority of the linked cooking menu KM3, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body 110 further includes an input operation unit 40 as an input means,
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means (input keys 43KP) for changing the functions of the integrated control device MC,
The function setting input means 43KP can set the display priority of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
When the door 114 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON to start up the integrated display unit 30, the integrated control device MC is configured to preferentially display the first specific screen 30SP for the collaborative cooking mode KM4 on the integrated display unit 30 if the permission conditions (e.g., maximum power consumption, i.e., upper limit of total power consumption) preset by the function setting input means (input key 43KP) are satisfied.

Because of this configuration, when the function mode is selected, after the door 114 is opened, the second specific screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode KM2 or the first specific screen 30SP for the linked cooking mode KM3 can be automatically displayed according to the user's wishes, improving usability for the user.

As is apparent from the above description, in the first embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N containing an object to be cooked on a top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
an input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated preheating cooking mode KM4 having a preheating process of preheating the object N by using the first heating means HM1, a cooking process 1 of heating the object (e.g., "fried chicken") by the second heating means HM1 after the preheating process, and a cooking process 2 of using the first heating means HM1 after the cooking process 1.
The present inventors have disclosed a cooking device 1 characterized by the above features (see Figs. 68, 71 and 72).

This configuration allows for a coordinated cooking menu in which an object to be cooked N, such as a frying pan or pot, placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, while the object to be cooked (e.g., fried chicken) is heated and cooked in the heating chamber 113 by the second heating means (cooking step 1), and then heated and cooked by the induction heating source 9 (cooking step 2). This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

As another cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, a cooking device 1 was also disclosed that has the function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that includes a preheating step of preheating the object N using the first heating means HM1, a cooking step 1 of placing an object (e.g., a hamburger steak) on the object N (e.g., a frying pan) preheated by the first heating means HM1 after the preheating step and heating the object, and a cooking step 2 of moving the object into the heating chamber 113 and heating it by the second heating means HM2 after the cooking step 1 (see Figs. 60 and 67).

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the notification unit AN includes a display unit (integrated display unit) 30 that displays identification information 330 of the applicable food to be cooked (e.g., “hamburger steak”) when the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 60).

This configuration makes it possible to provide a highly operable cooking device that allows the user to easily select a specific food to be cooked (e.g., "hamburger steak") to which the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4 is to be applied using the identification information 330.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body case HC further includes an integrated display unit 30 as a display means.
The integrated display unit 30 displays the selection result of the first selection unit 43MC and the selection result of the second selection unit 43M1,
The configuration was disclosed.

This configuration allows the user to easily distinguish between the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Other features disclosed in embodiment 1:
The following characteristic configurations were disclosed:

(1) Part 1:
A main body 110;
A heating chamber 113 inside the body;
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed above the main body;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
two upper cooling fans 60 and 61 which start operating when the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven;
two lower cooling fans 128, 129 that start cooling the second heating means HM2 when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
An abnormality detection unit EM;
An input operation unit 40 for inputting a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
The upper space 300A accommodates the first heating means HM1 and the integrated control device MC.
The lower space 300B accommodates the second heating means HM2 and the heating chamber 113.
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are disposed in an upper air passage AH that introduces outside air from a vent hole 64 that communicates with the outside of the lower space 300B without passing through the lower space 300B.
The lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are disposed in a lower air passage UH that introduces outside air from intake ports 152F and 152B located in the lower portion of the lower space 300B.
The upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH communicate with the outside through an exhaust port 20 provided in the upper part of the main body 110 without crossing each other midway.
The upper cooling fans 60, 61 are composed of two adjacent cooling fans 60, 61, and cooperate to supply cooling air to the first heating means HM1.
The input operation unit 40 includes an operation unit (central operation unit 40M) for the second heating means HM2 and an operation unit (individual operation units 40R and 40L) for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the control unit MC
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in which the heating operation was being performed;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues from the time when the heating operation of the heating means of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 that was performing the heating operation is stopped until a stop condition A is satisfied.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

Due to this configuration, if an abnormality is detected in either cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, all of the heating means that were being driven are stopped, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and then the upper cooling fan that was cooling the inside of the upper space 300A is stopped, so that a highly safe and convenient heating cooker can be provided that can handle a wide range of cooking using the linked cooking mode.

(2) Part 2:
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting a degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and automatically notifies at least one of the first reference information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 related to the cooking process 2 by the notification unit AN during the cooking process 1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, it has a function to detect and determine the degree of progress of cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, for example, by the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and automatically notifies the user of reference information midway through cooking step 1 or cooking step 2. Therefore, even if the number of types of heating sources increases, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to alleviate anxiety, and mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking can be avoided by pausing the heating operation midway to check. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(3) Part 3:
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, and a cooking process 2 using the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device MC automatically performs the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 in response to a command from a user, and after the cooking process 1 is ended, starts the cooking process 2 in response to a start command from the user, and automatically performs the cooking process 2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting a degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and automatically notifies at least one of the first reference information FA1 for the cooking process 1 or the second reference information FA2 for the cooking process 2 by the notification unit AN during the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, it has a function to detect and determine the degree of progress of cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, for example, by the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and automatically notifies the user of reference information midway through cooking step 1 or cooking step 2. Therefore, even if the number of types of heating sources increases, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to alleviate anxiety, and mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking can be avoided by pausing the heating operation midway to check. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(4) No. 4:
A cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation,
When the linked cooking mode is set, it is possible to reserve a cooking step 1 in which the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113 is heated, and a cooking step 2 in which the food to be cooked is induction-heated by the induction heating source on the food to be cooked N placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking step 1 is completed.
When a reservation for cooking using the linked cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking process 1 to start the preheating process,
(2) During the preheating step, cooking step 1 can be started in the heating chamber 113 by the microwave heating source 189;
(3) After the microwave heating source 9 is stopped and the cooking process 1 is completed, the cooking process 2 can be started on the object N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) A cooking device has been disclosed that is characterized in that, in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, information showing the progress of the cooking step is notified by the notification unit AN.

This configuration allows the induction heating source 9 and microwave heating source 189 to be used in combination. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, cooking process 1 can be started while the preheating process using the induction heating source 9 is still in progress prior to cooking process 1, and then the food to be cooked can be moved toward the preheated food N to perform cooking process 2.

In addition, reference information is automatically provided to the user midway through cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, so even if the number of types of heating sources is increasing, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking, eliminating anxiety, and the heating operation can be temporarily stopped midway to check, preventing mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) an IH only cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated alone; (2) a range only cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated alone; (3) an oven only cooking mode in which the oven heating source 188 is operated alone; (4) a coordinated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are operated sequentially through a transition period TR whose start and end timings are determined depending on a user's input operation;
The operating program includes:
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed before the transition period using the heating chamber 113, and a cooking process 2 performed after the transition period at a location other than the heating chamber 113,
During the transition period TR, the integrated control device MC causes the notification unit AN to notify reference information regarding the cooking process 2 or information indicating that cooking other than the cooking in the integrated cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking using the linked cooking mode, during the transition period TR when the heating operation is stopped (preheating operation may continue), it is possible to notify the user that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 that has completed cooking step 1.
This will reduce the time the user spends on cooking, enabling cooking to be done more quickly than before, and is expected to reduce the burden on the user and improve usability.

(6) No. 6:
The integrated control device MC controls a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 to start driving with a time lag;
A composite cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are started to be driven simultaneously or with a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven;
It has the function of performing
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking process 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode, and notifies the user through the notification unit AN that, before the cooking process 1 is completed, cooking other than the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed using either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking using the linked cooking mode, once cooking step 1 occupying the heating chamber 113 has finished, the user can be notified in advance that another cooking step can be performed using the heating chamber 113. This reduces the time the user spends on cooking, enabling cooking to be performed more quickly than before, and is expected to reduce the burden on the user and improve usability.

(7) No. 7:
A heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object N to be heated;
a transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 for transmitting and receiving information to and from an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
An alarm unit AN;
an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are cooperatively used to perform cooking,
The cooperative cooking mode is a mode in which a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started in response to a command from a user after the cooking process 1 is completed are executed,
The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to the cooking to which the collaborative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transceiver unit 49.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking with heat in the linked cooking mode, information on ingredients in the refrigerator 401 can be obtained as reference information related to cooking to which the linked cooking mode is applied, which is expected to reduce the cooking burden on the user and improve usability.

(8) No. 8:
A heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object N to be heated;
a transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 for transmitting and receiving information to and from an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
An alarm unit AN;
an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are cooperatively operated by a cooperative cooking program to perform cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period TR during which no heating operation is performed,
The integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to the cooking performed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device 411 via the transmission/reception unit 49.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking is performed in the linked cooking mode, data on the cooking process is provided to an external information processing device (home gateway) 411, which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401. The use of such information can ultimately contribute to improving the convenience and safety of users, as well as maintaining and improving a comfortable space.

(9) Number 9:
When the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, it is configured to display a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, as an example, display either the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC, thereby allowing the user to easily identify the cooking mode.

This configuration allows the provision of a cooking device that can use two heating sources, such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189, and can easily switch between the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.

Furthermore, the configuration was provided with an input operation unit 40 for inputting to select either the linked cooking mode or the composite cooking mode, and an integrated display unit 30 for alternatively displaying the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC.
Therefore, either the cooperative cooking mode or the composite cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display section 30, which is convenient.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 was common to the first and second heating means, and had an operation unit 98 of a main power switch 97 that supplies power to the integrated control device MC, and an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) that commands the start of individual cooking in the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, operations from turning on the main power to issuing a command to start heating can be performed using the input operation unit 40, providing good operability.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT which serves as a cooking mode canceling means for deciding the end of each cooking step of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Therefore, both the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be cancelled by the input key 43MT, providing good operability.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC is configured to accept input of any one of the composite cooking mode KM2, the linked cooking mode KM3, and the single cooking mode KM1 at the input operation unit 40, and to display a specific screen (first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, and third specific screen 30ST) corresponding to the cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30.

Moreover, for each cooking menu item in the linked cooking mode, such as "hamburger steak" or "fried chicken," the heat sources for cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and useful information for the user, such as the first reference information FA1 and the second reference information FA2, is also displayed, thereby reducing cooking mistakes by the user and providing a heating cooker with improved convenience.

In addition, after the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC is configured to display the initial standby screen (common screen 30Z) on the integrated display unit 30, and then to display the first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, etc. on the integrated display unit 30 in accordance with the input from the input operation unit 40.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 can be used effectively.

The specific screens are a first specific screen 30SP for the collaborative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode, and the first specific screen and the second specific screen are configured to be displayed alternatively on the integrated display unit 30.
This eliminates the risk of confusion between the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, making it easy for users to use.
.

(10) Number 10:
Furthermore, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, it displays cooking process information 332 for one linked cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") and one or more "control condition" information applied to the menu (including one or more combinations of heat, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
The integrated control device MC is configured to display additional information 331 such as guidance to encourage the user to perform an operation, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, it starts the execution of the collaborative cooking mode (see Figure 54).

According to this embodiment 1, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by three types of heat sources, the display screen 30D can display at least three pieces of information at once, such as the heat source according to one control menu selected from the group of coordinated cooking modes, the cooking process, and the user's input operation, so that even a combined heat cooker with three heat sources can be made to be a heat cooker that is easy to use.

(11) Part 11:
In order to detect the progress of cooking process 1 or cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or temperature rise from the start of cooking process 1 or cooking process 2, and reports the first reference information FA1 or the second reference information FA2.
Therefore, the notification of the reference information can be ensured.

(12) No. 12:
The input operation unit 40 includes:
(1) IH only cooking mode selection means 43L, 43R for operating the induction heating source alone;
(2) a range-only cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the microwave heating source alone;
(3) a means 43M1 for selecting an oven-only cooking mode for operating the oven heat source alone;
(4) a composite cooking mode selection means 43M1 for automatically switching between the microwave heating source and the oven heating source simultaneously or with a time lag;
(5) The integrated cooking mode selection means 43MC is provided.
This has the advantage that each heat source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space for the means for selecting the three heat sources (input keys, etc.).

(13) No. 13:
The input operation unit 40 has a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L as two individual operation units dedicated to the induction heating source 9,
Further, a common operation unit (central operation unit) 40M for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is provided,
The common operation unit 40M includes a first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1), a first specific screen (30SP) for inputting information about cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed,
When an input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC), a second specific screen 30SC for input related to cooking in the composite cooking mode is displayed.
Therefore, the first operation to select the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is valid. Moreover, since separate specific screens are displayed, there is no risk of an erroneous operation when selecting between the two cooking modes.

(14) No. 14:
In the cooking steps 1 and 2, at least one of the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated control device MC. For example, in "manual range" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from 100 W, 200 W, and 500 W, but the default value is 500 W. In other words, unless otherwise specified, the output is set to 500 W.
This reduces the number of input operations required by the user, improving usability.

(15) No. 15:
The end of cooking process 1 and the end of cooking process 2 using the induction heating source 9 were determined by input operations to the dedicated operation units (right operation unit 40R and left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the start and stop timings of the induction heating operation were determined by input keys 43L1 and 43R1.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user can stand in front of either the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L and concentrate on starting and ending induction heating. In other words, since there is no need to use both the central operation unit 40M and the left and right operation units 40L, 40R to start and end cooking process 1, there is no confusion in the user's operation.

(16) No. 16:
In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heating conditions of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 were configured to be determined by the user operating the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R).
This allows the heating conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.) to be set according to the food to be cooked, the heating method, and the heating source, resulting in excellent cooking results.

(17) No. 17:
The notification unit AN had a first display unit (31L, 31R) that performs a display operation during the execution of the IH only cooking mode KM1, and an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode.
Therefore, particularly when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 using multiple heating sources, the cooking processes, heating conditions, etc. are displayed in a concentrated manner on a single integrated display unit 30, allowing the user to focus attention on the integrated display unit 30.

(18) No. 18:
In the collaborative cooking mode KM3, identification information 330 identifying multiple cooked foods is displayed in a fixed order on the first identification screen 30SP, and each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the identification information 330 becomes selectable in sequence.
Therefore, when a desired cooking operation (e.g., hamburger steak) is to be performed, the identification information can be displayed in sequence and selected, so that the selection method is simple and the operability for the user can be improved.

(19) No. 19:
The combined cooking mode is classified by a control menu for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see Figs. 34 and 37).
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information for specifying the control menu (for example, specific sentences 30J such as "Warm" and "Microwave Manual" in FIG. 49).
This allows the user to easily select the control menu.

(20) No. 20:
The configuration has been disclosed in which the reference information acquired by the integrated control device MC from the home gateway 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 is information on ingredients that can be cooked with heat.
This eliminates the need to go to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to obtain information about ingredients, thus reducing the user's workload.

(21) No. 21:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the reference information (ingredients information) in the memory device MM until cooking in one of the integrated cooking modes is completed.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations to record reference information each time, or to write it down on paper.

(22) No. 22:
The food ingredient information is information stored in the refrigerator 401. Furthermore, the food ingredient information includes information on the refrigeration temperature or freezing temperature of the food ingredient.
Therefore, when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode with the heating cooker 1, this can be used as a reference when determining the control conditions (including one or more combinations of heat, heating intensity, target temperature, etc.), and better finished cooking can be expected.

(23) No. 23:
The integrated control device MC was configured to transmit a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 103) requesting the provision of the ingredient information from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 before the start of the cooking process 1.
.
This eliminates the need to go to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to obtain information about ingredients, thus reducing the user's workload.

(24) No. 24:
Before the start of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 requesting the provision of the reference information, and further notifies the user of the integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units AN, that reference information is requested (see Figure 112).
Therefore, the user can refrain from moving to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to check, thereby reducing the user's effort.

(25) No. 25:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the cooking execution data in the memory device MM after the cooking process 2 is completed.
Therefore, the user does not need to perform any special operations or write down on paper in order to record the cooking execution data.

(26) No. 26:
The cooking execution data is transmitted after the end of the cooking step 2, and includes at least one of the following pieces of information:
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked; (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked; (3) Information indicating the control conditions for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2; (4) Information indicating the time required from cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2; (5) Information indicating the end time of cooking process 2; (6) Information identifying the heat source used for cooking; (7) Information regarding restrictions the user will be subject to during the next cooking process; (8) Information related to the safety of the user, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber. This eliminates the need for users to perform special operations or record cooking execution data accurately and in detail, or to record it on paper.

(27) No. 27:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store, after the cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is completed, information on the time required to complete the cooking in the memory device MM.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations or to write down on paper the information on the time required for cooking each time.

(28) No. 28:
In the home appliance operation management system of embodiment 1, when an information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects the presence of a person in the space in which the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed and receives startup information from the cooking appliance 1, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 determines that it is the cooking time period and issues a command to the refrigerator 401 to collect inventory data (see step SD6 in FIG. 102).
Therefore, when a user (resident) is near the refrigerator 401 or the cooking appliance 1 and is likely to cook, the inventory data collection operation can be performed automatically, and further, the user is not required to perform any special input operations to collect the data when cooking, and useful information can be obtained without much effort, thereby realizing an overall highly convenient operation management system.

Embodiment 2.
122 and 123 show a cooking device according to the second embodiment.
Fig. 122 is a block diagram showing the main control-related parts of a built-in type combined cooking device. Fig. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., in the cooking device of Fig. 122, from the selection to the transition from the cooperative cooking mode, in a chronological order. The same or corresponding parts as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation may be omitted.

The second embodiment differs significantly from the first embodiment in that a steam generator (boiler) 500 that blows superheated steam into the heating chamber 113 is added to the second heating means HM2.

The position and direction from which the steam generator (boiler) 500 blows steam into the heating chamber 113 may be from the side wall of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 122, or it may be blown upward from below tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a dedicated tray 145.

Next, we will explain Figure 123.
123 shows a case where preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and cooking step 1 is performed in parallel with this preheating operation. This is the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4) where cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2, and cooking step 2 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL.

In FIG. 123, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to starting and ending the cooking process are shown in hollow rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, and then 43MS is pressed, the mode transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (the next preheating process starts from this preparation period P1 stage).

Furthermore, when the user selects the left heating unit 17HL (pressing at least input key 43L1), the preheating process (P2) is executed in the left heating unit 17HL. After input key 43L1, at least one of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 may be pressed in succession to actually turn on the heat (a standby state is maintained until 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed).

As shown in FIG. 123, the preheat target temperature may be set by pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L. Also, since the control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed on the left display unit 31L in the default settings, it is not necessary to operate input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 123, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

Meanwhile, in the left heating unit 17HL, the preheating operation continues (preheating process). If the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the "preheating process" of induction heating stops at this stage and the heating cooking period P2 ends. To maintain preheating until cooking process 2, do not press the input key 43L1.

In addition, depending on the size of the object to be heated N and the heat during preheating, it may take several minutes after starting to pass current through the induction heating source 9 to reach the specified (target) preheat temperature, so there is no need to interrupt the preheating operation midway.

Next, when the input key 43MS is pressed again, the cooking process 1 (heating cooking period P3) in the heating chamber 113 begins. Note that the door 114 is opened in advance and the food to be cooked is placed on top 145. If the door 114 is not closed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 will not be sent from the integrated control device MC even if the input key 43MS is pressed.

Similarly, unless the door 114 is closed, steam will not be blown out from the steam supplier 500 (power is supplied to the steam supplier 500 when the input key 43MS is pressed during the preparation period P1).

Inside the heating chamber 113, high-temperature steam surrounds the food to be cooked and microwaves are irradiated, so even frozen foods are thawed in a short time. In addition, the radiant heat from the oven heat source 188 heats up the atmosphere inside the heating chamber 113, further accelerating the cooking (including thawing) of the food to be cooked.

When input key 43MT is pressed once, cooking process 1 ends, and at this stage heating pause period P4 begins. In other words, transition period TR begins. At this stage, of input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS on central operation unit 40M, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 are all enabled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all maintained as valid, so the preheating control conditions can also be changed in the left heating unit 17HL.

When the user presses the input key 43MT once to enter the transition period TR, the food item that is in the middle of cooking is moved from the heating chamber 113 onto the food item N that has already been heated by the left heating unit 17HL. In this case, since the frying pan, pot, etc. are preheated by the induction heating source 9, the plate or container that was used in the heating chamber 113 is not moved onto the left heating unit 17HL.

If the door 114 is opened during cooking step 1 without pressing the input key 43MT even once, cooking in the heating chamber 113 will stop at that point, and the food to be cooked can be moved from the heating chamber 113 to the food to be heated N on the left heating section 17HL.

Next, when the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is touched, cooking step 2 of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is started in the left heating unit 17HL. That is, the food to be cooked is heated and cooked on the food to be cooked N that has already been heated to a high temperature in the preheating step.
Then, by pressing the input key 43L1, the cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released at the same time as cooking process 2 ends (FIG. 123 shows the linked cooking mode KM3 being released by pressing input key 43MT, but it is also possible to press input key 43MT in this way).

Therefore, if you want to perform additional heating again using the left heating unit 17HL immediately after the end of cooking process 2, you can press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L again and operate the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. to perform heating and cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 (this is not part of the collaborative cooking mode KM3, but is a cooking process in the single heating mode KM1).

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (e.g., within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode, and the process may wait for the user's input (operation of the input key 43M1).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can check the doneness of the food and immediately touch the input key 43L1 if the food is not heated enough. This method also improves the usability for the user.

In this second embodiment, if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, the heating source and the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped and an alert is issued, as described in the first embodiment (particularly Figures 45 and 46).

Modifications of embodiments 1 and 2.
The cooking device 1 disclosed in the first and second embodiments may be modified as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 (main body case HC) having a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated N is placed;
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 arranged in the main body 110 and heating the object to be heated N;
A heating chamber 113 disposed inside the body 110;
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are disposed inside the main body 110 and serve as a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed inside the heating chamber 113;
First operation units 40R and 40L for setting heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and for issuing commands to start and stop a heating operation;
A second operation unit 40M (input keys 43MS, 43MT) that is disposed in the main body 110 separately from the first operation units 40R, 40L and sets heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commands the start and stop of a heating operation;
A main operation unit (operation unit for a main power switch 97) 98 that is disposed in the main body 110 and that collectively stops heating by the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on heating conditions set by the first operation unit 40R and the second operation unit 40M,
The integrated control device MC has a function of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 in which a preheating process of preheating the object N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process of heating the object N using the second heating means HM2 are performed in the same time period for one object to be cooked,
In the process of executing the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4, when the first heating means HM1 is executing the preheating step and the second heating means HM2 is executing the cooking step 1,
(1) a first stop function that stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 and cancels the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 when a stop command is received from the main operation unit 98;
(2) a second stop function in which, when a stop command is received from the first operation unit 40R, 40L, the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1 is stopped, the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is maintained, and the cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is continued;
The cooking device 1 is equipped with the above-mentioned components.

With this configuration, when cooking is finished, all power sources can be shut off at once using the main operating unit 98.

In addition, in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, to stop only the preheating operation, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operating units 40R, 40L of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that performs the preheating operation.

Even if the preheating operation is stopped in this way, the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 remains in effect. Therefore, the execution of cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, and cooking process 1 is not adversely affected.

Because of this configuration, if the object to be heated N is temporarily lifted or moved above the top plate 15, even if the preheating operation is stopped, cooking in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 can be resumed, providing a cooker that is highly convenient for the user.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of this modified example, the main body 110 further includes an abnormality detection unit EM that detects an abnormal state caused by the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and emergency stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1.
When the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 is urgently stopped by the abnormality detection unit EM, the setting information of the preheating target temperature as a setting condition of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 may be configured to be stored (maintained) in a memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.

This configuration eliminates the need to reset the preheat target temperature once it has been set and restart the preheat process, which is expected to improve usability for users.

Other variations of embodiments 1 and 2.
In the first embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated N is placed;
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 arranged in the main body 110 and heating the object to be heated N;
A heating chamber 113 disposed within the body 110;
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are disposed in the main body 110 and serve as a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113;
First operation units 40R, 40L are disposed on the top plate 15 and set heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and issue commands to start and stop a heating operation;
A second operation unit 40M that is disposed in the main body 110 separately from the first operation units 40L and 40R and sets heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commands the start and stop of a heating operation;
A main operation unit (main power switch operation unit) 98 that is disposed in the main body 110 and that collectively stops heating by the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on heating conditions set by the first operation units 40R, 40L and the second operation unit 40M;
The integrated control device MC has a function of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 in which a preheating process of preheating the object N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process of heating the object N using the second heating means HM2 are performed in the same time period for one object to be cooked,
In the process of executing the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4, when the first heating means HM1 is executing the preheating step and the second heating means HM2 is executing the cooking step 1,
(1) a first stop function that stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 and cancels the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 when a stop command is received from the main operation unit 98;
(2) a second stop function that, when receiving a stop command from the first operation unit 40R, stops the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1, maintains the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, and continues the cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2;
(3) a third stop function that, upon receiving a cancel command from the second operation unit 40M, cancels the setting of the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 and stops the heating operation by the first heating means HM1 and the heating operation by the second heating means HM2,
The document discloses a cooking device 1 equipped with the above-mentioned components.

Therefore, when heating cooking is finished and all the power sources are to be cut off at once, the power sources can be cut off at once by the main operation unit 98. Also, in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, when only the preheating operation is to be stopped, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operation units 40R, 40L of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that performs the preheating operation.
Furthermore, by operating the second operation section 40M (the input key 43MT of the central operation section), the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 itself can be cancelled.
As described above, the user can select the appropriate stopping method depending on the purpose. Furthermore, by operating the first operating units 40L and 40R, the execution of cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, so it is possible to stop only the preheating operation without adversely affecting the cooking of cooking process 1, which is expected to improve user convenience.

Summary of embodiment 2.
In this second embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
An information unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) for providing information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for an integrated preheat cooking mode KM4 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a predetermined order,
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N by the first heating means HM1, a cooking step 1 of heating the object N by the second heating means HM2 inside the heating chamber 113 simultaneously with the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of transferring the object N from the heating chamber 113 to the object N preheated in the preheating step after the cooking step 1 is completed, and further heating the object N.
The linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the common operation unit 40M, the selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and the decision to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) are performed;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended by the common operation unit 40M (by input keys 43MS and 43MT),
(3) The end of the preheating process and the end of the cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (input key 43L1),
The document discloses a cooking device 1 having the following characteristics.

With this configuration, a single cooking device can select a coordinated preheat cooking mode, which is a type of coordinated cooking mode in which the heating location and heating means are different, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Moreover, in the coordinated preheating cooking mode, the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected and a decision to start the cooking process is made on the shared operation unit 40M, and the start and end of cooking process 1 can be performed on the shared operation unit 40M, while the start and end of cooking process 2 and the end of the preheating process are all performed on the individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the induction heating source 9. This makes the operation rules simple, and is expected to prevent user operation errors and confusion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability, even though it is a cooker with two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Embodiment 3.
Fig. 124 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device 1 of embodiment 3. Fig. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking steps in the cooking device of Fig. 124 in chronological order from the selection to the transition of the cooperative cooking mode. The same reference numerals are used for the same or corresponding parts to those of embodiment 1, and the explanation may be omitted.

In this embodiment 3, as in embodiment 2, the preheating process is performed using the induction heating source 9, but considering that the heated object N, such as a large-diameter frying pan used during preheating, can interfere with the operation of the individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the induction heating source 9, the start and end of preheating, cooking process 1, and cooking process 2 can all be performed using the shared operation unit 40M, which is a major difference from embodiments 1 and 2.

Next, we will explain Figure 124.
Reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, and includes three sections: a left operation section 40L, a central operation section 40M, and a right operation section 40R (not shown).
The left operation unit 40L is used for inputting operations for the induction heating source 9 only, and may be called an "individual operation unit."
In contrast, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "shared operation unit" because it is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperative operation unit" 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode.

A total of five touch-type input keys 43L1-43L4, 44L are arranged on the left operation section 40L. As explained in the first embodiment, these input keys 43R1-43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions, and have the same functions as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the functions of the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, 43MT, etc. arranged on the central operation unit 40M are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The object to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL is a frying pan with a relatively large diameter, for example, about 300 mm in diameter. NH is a handle that is detachably attached to the rim of the object to be heated N (frying pan). In other words, it is a handle (grip) that can be removed at the user's discretion.

The object to be heated N has a size that allows it to be inserted into the heating chamber 113 from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 and the door 114 to be closed. In this case, however, the handle NH must be removed. FG indicates the user's fingertips.
In addition, the handle NH is shown to extend horizontally in Fig. 124, but in reality, some handles are inclined diagonally upward. Also, some handles rise vertically halfway and are L-shaped when viewed from the side.

Next, we will explain Figure 125.
In Fig. 125, preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and after this preheating operation, cooking process 1 is performed directly. The subsequent cooking process 2 is the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the second heating means HM2.

In Figure 125, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to starting and ending the cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, and then 43MS is pressed, the mode transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (the next preheating process starts from this preparation period P1 stage).

Furthermore, when the user selects the left heating unit 17HL (at least pressing the input key 43L1), the preheating step (P2) is executed in the left heating unit 17HL.
As shown in Fig. 125, the preheat target temperature may be set by pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L. In addition, since the control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed on the left display unit 31L in the default settings, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 125, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

Meanwhile, in the left heating unit 17HL, the preheating operation continues (preheating process). If the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the "preheating process" of induction heating stops at this stage and the heating cooking period P2 ends. To maintain preheating until cooking process 2, do not press the input key 43L1.

When the object N reaches the (target) preheat temperature set by the user or the default setting temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice that preheating is complete. The first specific screen 30SP also displays that preheating is complete.

Therefore, the user places the food to be cooked on the food to be cooked (frying pan) maintained at a high temperature and cooks it (cooking step 1).
During cooking step 1, no other cooking can be performed in heating chamber 113. Since the input functions of input keys 43MC and 43M1 are disabled, heating chamber 113 is occupied.

By pressing the input key 43MT on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can end cooking process 1 at any time.

Next, while the handle NH of the object N is still attached (locked), the user lifts the object N from the left heating section 17HL and moves it to the heating chamber 113 with the door 114 open. Finally, the user removes the handle NH.

In this way, the food to be cooked is placed on top of the food to be heated N and is contained in the heating chamber 113.
If the door 114 is not closed, even if the input key 43MS is pressed, no drive signal is sent from the integrated control device MC to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.
Then, when the input key 43MS is pressed next, the cooking process 2 in the heating chamber 113 (heating cooking period P5) starts.

In addition, in cooking step 2, high-temperature steam may be supplied from the steam supplier 500 as shown in embodiment 2.

As described above, the food to be cooked is heated and cooked inside the heating chamber 113, so pressing the input key 43MT once will end cooking step 2, and if the input key 43MT is pressed once more at this stage, all linked cooking modes KM3 (linked preheat cooking modes KM4) will be cancelled.

Note that at the cooking step 2 stage, the left heating section 17HL is released from occupation, so other food items can be cooked in the left heating section 17HL.

Note that cooking step 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released at the same time as cooking step 2 ends (FIG. 125 shows the linked cooking mode KM3 being released by pressing input key 43MT, but it is also possible to press input key 43MT in this manner).

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (e.g., within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode, and the process may wait for the user's input (operation of the input key 43M1).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can check the doneness of the food and immediately touch the input key 43MS if the food is not cooked enough. This method also improves the usability for the user.

In this third embodiment, if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, the heating source and the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped and an alert is issued, as described in the first embodiment (particularly Figures 45 and 46).

Summary of embodiment 3.
As is apparent from the above description, the cooking device 1 of the third embodiment has the following configuration.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
An information unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) for providing information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for an integrated preheat cooking mode KM4 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a predetermined order,
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N by the first heating means HM1, a cooking step 1 of heating and cooking the object N by the first heating means HM1 following the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of moving the object N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 to the heating chamber 113 after the cooking step 1 is completed, thereby transferring the object to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 and further heating the object to be cooked.
The linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the common operation unit 40M, the selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and the decision to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) are performed;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended by the common operation unit 40M (by input keys 43MS and 43MT),
(3) The preheating step and the cooking step 2 are ended by the common operation unit 40M (input key 43MT),
The document discloses a cooking device 1 having the following characteristics.

With this configuration, a single cooking device can select a coordinated preheat cooking mode, which is a type of coordinated cooking mode in which the heating location and heating means are different, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the cooperative preheat cooking mode allows the shared operation unit 40M to determine a series of operations from the start to the end of the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4, so the operation rules are simple, and it is expected that user operation errors and confusion will be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability, even though it is a cooker with two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Furthermore, when using an object to be heated N such as a frying pan with a relatively large diameter as in this embodiment 3, as shown in FIG. 124, the position of the handle NH may be directly above or cross the vicinity of the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R, and there is a concern that the fingertips FG may come close to the handle NH when operating the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R to stop the heating operation. In particular, when trying to move the object to be heated N in a hurry, the fingertips may unintentionally touch the handle NH.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment 3, in consideration of the fact that a large-diameter frying pan is used to cook a large amount of dumplings and the like using the coordinated cooking mode KM3, all heating control operations in the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4 can be performed using the shared operation unit 40M. Therefore, even if there is an intersection between the individual operation units 40L, 40R and the handle NH as described above, control commands such as stopping heating can be given accurately using the shared operation unit 40M. In other words, a cooking appliance 1 with improved safety can be provided.

Embodiment 4.
126 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking steps, etc., in time series from the selection to the transition of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 4. The same or corresponding parts as those in embodiment 1 are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The fourth embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that a preheating step is performed in the heating chamber 113 .
The following describes Figure 126.
In the fourth embodiment, preheating is performed by the second heating means HM2, and after this preheating operation, cooking process 1 is performed directly in the heating chamber 113. The subsequent cooking process 1 is the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 126, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to starting and ending the cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS on the central operation unit 40M (shared operation unit 40M) are all valid. Press the input key 43MC to display the first specific screen 30SP. From the cooking menu displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, select the identification information 330 of the desired food to be cooked and press the input key 43MS.
Then, the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is entered (the next preheating step is entered from this preparation period P1 stage).

When the integrated control device MC displays the identification information 330 on the first specific screen 30SP, it specifies that the preheating process is to be performed in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188. Therefore, the user can understand that the preheating operation will be performed in the heating chamber 113 before pressing the input key 43MS.

Even if the user does not operate the common operation unit 40M, if the door 114 is closed, power will be supplied to the oven heating source 188 and the heating cooking period P2 (preheating process) will be executed.

On the other hand, when the heating cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 are disabled in the left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL to be used in cooking process 2 in the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 126, the disabled input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation section (individual operation section) 40L are indicated by dashed frames.
During this heating cooking period P2, the input function of the right operation unit 40L remains valid, so the right heating unit 17HR can be used for another cooking operation (however, the linked cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2 cannot be set).

When the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 reaches the (target) preheating temperature set by the user (e.g., 200°C) or the default set temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice that preheating is complete. The first specific screen 30SP also displays that preheating is complete.

The user then opens the door 114 and places the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113. At that time, with the next cooking step 2 in mind, the food to be cooked may be placed on the food to be cooked (frying pan) as shown in FIG. 124. Even if the food to be cooked N is made of metal, it can be cooked using microwave heating if it has an open top like a frying pan. Alternatively, the food to be cooked may be placed on a cooking plate made of heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass.

During the heating and cooking period P3, not only the oven heating source 188 is operated, but also the microwave heating source 189 may be driven to heat the food to be cooked by the synergistic effect of radiant heat and microwaves.

Between preheating step 1 and cooking step 1, no other cooking can be done in the heating chamber 113. The input functions of input keys 43MC and 43M1 are enabled, but no other cooking modes can be set unless the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, which includes the preheating step, is cancelled (by pressing input key 43MT twice).

By pressing the input key 43MT on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can end cooking process 1 at any time.

The integrated control device MC may provide the user with progress information as needed using additional information 331 (see FIG. 60 in the first embodiment, etc.) to help the user complete cooking process 1. In addition, the integrated control device MC may provide third reference information (see FIG. 68 and FIG. 70 in the first embodiment) FA3 or the like to inform the user that a predetermined time (TN3) has passed since cooking process 1 was started.

When the input key 43MT is pressed, cooking process 1 ends and heating pause period P4 begins.
The user can terminate the program at any time.
When the heating pause period P4 begins, the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the common operation unit 40M are restored, so that cooking of another food item in the heating chamber 113 can be started.

On the other hand, when the heating pause period P4 begins in the individual operation unit 40L, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 are restored, so induction heating cooking can be started at any time by placing the object to be heated N on the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, during heating pause period P4, the user opens door 114 and removes the food to be cooked from heating chamber 113.
At that time, if the object N (frying pan) from which the handle NH has been removed as described above is being used, the handle NH is attached, and the object N with the object placed thereon is removed from the heating chamber 113. Then, the object N is moved above the left heating unit 17HL.

In this way, the food to be cooked remains on top of the food to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL, so when input key 43M1 is pressed next, cooking step 2 (heating cooking period P5) will begin. Note that the heat can also be adjusted by pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

In the above manner, the food to be cooked is heated and cooked in the left heating section 17HL, and cooking step 2 is completed by pressing the input key 43L1 on the left individual operation section 40L once.
At this stage, if the input key 43MT of the common operation unit 40MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative pre-heating cooking mode KM4) is completely cancelled.

Note that at the stage of cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is no longer occupied, so other food items can be cooked in the heating chamber 113.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released at the same time as cooking process 2 ends (FIG. 126 shows the linked cooking mode KM3 being released by pressing input key 43MT, but it is also possible to press input key 43MT in this way).

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43L2 or input key 43L3) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode is to be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the process may wait for the user to input to resume cooking (operate the input key 43L1).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can check the doneness of the food and, if it is not heated enough, immediately touch the input key 43L2 or 43L3. This method also improves the usability for the user.

In this fourth embodiment, if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, the heating source and the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped and an alert is issued, as described in the first embodiment (particularly Figures 45 and 46).

Summary of embodiment 4.

As is clear from the above description, in this fourth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
An information unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) for providing information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for an integrated preheat cooking mode KM4 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a predetermined order,
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N by the second heating means HM2, a cooking step 1 of heating and cooking the object N by the second heating means HM2 after the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of further heating the object N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 by moving the object N (frying pan) onto the heating section 17HL (or 17HR) of the induction heating source 9 after the cooking step 1 is completed.
The linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the common operation unit 40M, the selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and the decision to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) are performed;
(2) The end of the preheating process and the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the common operation unit 40M (input key 43MT),
(3) The cooking process 1 is started and ended by the common operation unit 40M (by the input keys 43MS and 43MT),
(4) The start and end of cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (by the input key 43L1).
The document discloses a cooking device 1 having the above features.

With this configuration, a single cooking device can select a coordinated preheat cooking mode, which is a type of coordinated cooking mode in which the heating location and heating means are different, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the cooperative preheat cooking mode allows the shared operation unit 40M to determine a series of operations from the start to the end of the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4, and subsequently determines the start and end of cooking process 1, so that the operation rules are simple and it is expected that user operation errors and confusion will be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability, even though it is a cooker with two or more heat sources and input operation units.

Other embodiments.
In the first embodiment, for the induction heating source 9 used first in the (first) coordinated cooking mode (see FIG. 61), the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR are prohibited or restricted from operating in any mode other than the coordinated cooking mode KM3 by the input operation unit 40, but further induction heating units may also be included as targets.

Furthermore, in the second coordinated cooking mode (see FIG. 61), the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, are driven simultaneously to start the cooking process, so in this case, it is possible to prohibit or restrict the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, from operating in a cooking mode other than the coordinated cooking mode KM3. In both the first and second coordinated cooking modes, by prioritizing the securing of the heat source required for the cooking process, a wide range of cooking can be performed using multiple heating means in the coordinated cooking mode.

In the description of embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC is configured to display, as a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, or a second display screen 30SC dedicated to the composite cooking mode KM2, on the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, etc.
Instead of switching the entire screen in this manner, the basic configurations of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC may be unified and a design may be used that clearly distinguishes between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3.

For example, the first display screen 30SP may clearly indicate in text that it is displaying the coordinated cooking mode KM3, while the second display screen 30SC may clearly indicate in text that it is displaying the composite cooking mode KM2. This makes it even easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Furthermore, a light-emitting display unit such as the light-emitting display unit 27L described in embodiment 1 may be provided on each of the display units for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, so that when either one is emitting light, it is possible to know that the cooking mode that is emitting light is being used.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, if the integrated control device MC performs a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, a configuration may be provided in which such a cooking mode display unit (light-emitting unit) is provided.

The linked cooking mode is not limited to being composed of two cooking steps, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2. For example, cooking step 1 may be performed using the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, cooking step 2 may be performed using the microwave heating source 189, and the food may then be returned to the top plate 15 at the end, and cooking step 3 may be provided for the purpose of compensating for insufficient heating, making adjustments, adding seasonings or other cooking liquids, etc. This cooking step 3 is performed using the induction heating source 9. Note that in this case, it is not necessary to unify cooking steps 1 and 3 into the same heating sections 17HL and 17HR.

In one example, the final cooking process is carried out on the right heating section 17HR while being visually checked directly. In other words, the food that is almost finished in cooking step 2 is moved onto the right heating section 17HR and heated weakly for a long period of time to increase the degree of maturity of the meat, vegetables, and other ingredients, as well as the broth.

In the above explanation, the collaborative cooking mode automatically determines the heating sources to be used and their order when one cooking menu item (e.g., hamburger steak) is specified, but this can be changed to give priority to the user's wishes.

For example, the cooperative cooking modes "Cooked item X" and "Cooked item Y" are used relatively frequently by users, and cooking step 1 for both of these modes is performed using the right heating unit 17HR, so it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking using the right heating unit 17HR.

If the user subsequently selects "food Z," one of the collaborative cooking modes, and the left heating unit 17HL is selected, it is expected that the user will be confused as to how to operate it since they are not accustomed to using it.

Therefore, if the integrated control device MC determines that either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is acceptable, when the integrated cooking mode is first selected, the first specific screen 30SP may preferentially display the right heating unit 17HR, which the user is accustomed to using. In other words, for example, when selecting a heating unit, the "right heating unit" may always be displayed, and the user may then input to specify the left heating unit 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot properly heat the food due to constraints such as the heat value for cooking the food or the induction heating current control pattern, the cooking can be performed only with the heating unit specified (default setting) in the operation program on the integrated control device MC, preventing misuse or misunderstanding by the user. For example, if a heating unit with a relatively weak heat such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, when the user selects it, the cooking device 1 can notify the user and guide them to correct the situation (move the heated food, such as a pan, to another heating unit).

In the first embodiment, there are two paths: an internal path that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an external path that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. However, these paths may be interchanged and modified as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path that cools the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air drawn in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air intake 152F, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and leads to the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: A path that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 using outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake 152B, guides the cooling air to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally reaches the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is structured such that multiple heat dissipation plates (heat dissipation fins) are stacked together and cooling air passes through the narrow spaces between the heat dissipation plates to exchange heat (dissipate heat), resulting in a large pressure loss of the cooling air, or in other words, a large airflow resistance.
Therefore, the cooling air that passes through heat dissipation section 122H of magnetron 122 is exhausted without entering heating chamber 113 (the length of the air path is also shortened), thereby improving the balance between the internal and external paths. This is effective when third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. In other words, as explained in the first embodiment, this is a promising idea for realizing low procurement costs during manufacturing by aligning third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 with exactly the same structure, shape, and rated specifications.

In addition, after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 may be eliminated, and the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 may be discharged directly to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 via the duct 307, simplifying the cooling air path inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air path resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has the advantage of being more cost-effective.

For users who do not require both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as shown in the first to fourth embodiments, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are sold separately and installed separately on the kitchen furniture 2. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, convenience at the time of sale can be maintained by setting a separate packaging form for the set sale of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and a separate packaging form for the sale of only the upper unit 100.

As shown in the first to fourth embodiments, the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 to be configured as separate housings. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured as a single housing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are formed from thin metal plates. However, either the upper case 16 or the lower case 101, or both, may be formed from a plastic material. For example, they may be formed from a thermoplastic plastic material. Examples of materials include PET, PA, PP, and ABS. "PET" stands for polyethylene terephthalate. "PA" stands for polyamide, and "PP" stands for polypropylene. The materials can be determined taking into consideration the heat resistance temperature and durability as a structure. Also, only a portion of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be formed from plastic, with the remaining portions formed from metal plates.

The induction heating circuit may use various drive methods, such as a half-bridge circuit or a full-bridge circuit, depending on the shape and number of IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, a full-bridge circuit is proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 617h23.

In addition, the IH coil is not limited to a doughnut-shaped configuration, and may be an induction heating unit that includes a circular main heating coil and flat first and second sub-heating coils that are arranged close to both sides of the main heating coil and have a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil, as shown in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5538546.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when induction heating is started, the induction heating operation starts under default conditions (heat value or heat level) without the need to set the heat, and the user then decides the desired heat. However, other methods are also acceptable. For example, an operation method may be adopted in which the desired induction heating source and heat value (watts) or heat level (one of a range of heat such as "high" to "low") are always decided after the main power is turned on, and then a start command is issued using a specified input key, etc., and such a method does not affect the effect and essential effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, there are two lower air passages during microwave heating: an air passage (internal path) for the cooling air that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an air passage (external path) for the cooling air that cools the inverter circuit board 121. These two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then discharged to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 via a common exhaust port 20.

However, it is not necessary to route the exhaust air through one (common) exhaust duct, nor is it necessary to collect the exhaust air at one exhaust port 20. For example, a second exhaust port separate from the exhaust port 20 may be provided at a different position (directly below the exhaust cover 19), and the cooling air from either the internal or external route may be exhausted from the second exhaust port. In particular, in the embodiment in which the rear of the upper unit 100 is divided into front and rear by the partition plate 52 (embodiment 1), it is preferable to have the exhaust port face the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52.

In the first embodiment, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is located on the input operation unit 40 (including the operation key 98) exposed on the top surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. Note that the operation key 98 is sometimes called an operation button, but it is basically the same structure.

However, the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to such a form of the input operation unit 40. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be constantly exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. Known storage forms include a type that moves horizontally like a drawer and a type that rotates around a single fulcrum.

The method of storing by rotating is called the operating part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-28569, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 3-2h26. The main power switch 97 may also be a seesaw-type switch, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845.

Even though the input operation unit 40 is stored by rotating in this manner, it can be operated from above (the direction of) the main body case HC during use. In other words, the user can turn on the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 while standing near the front of the cooking appliance 1, so there is no problem in realizing the cooking appliance 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the user is not forced into an awkward posture, and operability is good.
The input operation unit 40 that rotates and is stored in this manner may be provided, for example, on the right-side front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

For example, JP 2017-172941 A proposes a cooking device that has a heating section (such as a gas burner) exposed on the top plate and a heating section in the heating chamber (grill compartment), and employs a kangaroo pocket mechanism for the operation section, which rotates and stores the operation section.

In the first to fourth embodiments, a magnetron is used as the microwave generating source 122, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a cooking device using a semiconductor oscillator is proposed in JP-A-2019-509587 and JP-A-51-9562.

In JP2019-509587A, the microwave generator includes a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level, and a solid-state high frequency signal amplifier (solid-state amplifier, one or more) that amplifies the high frequency signal from the small signal generator. The solid-state amplifier amplifies a first high frequency signal having a first low power level to a second high frequency signal having a second high power level, and supplies the second high frequency signal to a heating chamber containing an object to be cooked (food).
When realizing the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generating source configured with such a semiconductor element may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the operation of the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 is performed independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100. In other words, when the induction heating source 9 is used, it has been explained that the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated, but this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are never operated simultaneously.

For example, as explained in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup before selecting the heat source to be used (see step ST2 in FIG. 38), all cooling fans may be test-run for a short period of time, and the integrated control device MC may check whether abnormal currents, voltages, etc. are occurring in the circuit. In this case, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 may be started all at once for a certain short period of time, or they may be started one by one for a short period of time. Doing so does not in any way impair the essential effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, the user needs to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 74, step STR5). That is, first, the user selects either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL by using the input key 43M2.
However, in the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, such a heating unit selection step is not necessarily required.

For example, Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852 state:
The heating device includes a plurality of heating coils regularly arranged adjacent to each other below a top plate on which an object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the heating coils, a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether an object to be heated is placed directly above the heating coils, an input operation unit provided on an upper surface of the main body, and a control device,
The control device displays a number of icons corresponding to the objects to be heated in a display area of the display screen based on a result of the object to be heated placement determination unit determining that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil,
The control device discloses an induction heating cooker that operates to input heating and cooking conditions for a first heated object by detecting that the user has touched a first icon corresponding to the first heated object.

In addition, Japanese Patent No. 5202064 states:
The heating device comprises a top plate on which an object to be heated, such as a pan, is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils distributed under the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, a band-shaped operation and display means continuously arranged in a predetermined area near the top plate, and a control means,
An induction heating cooker is disclosed in which the control means identifies the occupied area on the top plate of the heated object based on the output of the sensor, further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the identified occupied area and its surrounding area to identify the area of the heated object, estimates the center position and size of the identified occupied area, and displays the operation means in a specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result, enabling the operation means and making it accessible by external operation.

In other words, rather than cooking by placing a heated object such as a pot in a specific position on the top plate, a technology has been proposed that allows the heated object to be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate, with the control device detecting the position of the heated part and allowing cooking to begin.

The above-mentioned technology can also be applied to the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure. In other words, it is no longer necessary to display the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which indicates that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side, on the first specific screen 30SP as described in the first embodiment.

In addition, there is no longer any need to first select either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL using the input key 43M2, further improving usability.

In addition, in the cooking appliances 1 of the first to seventh embodiments, in order to provide multiple functions, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, etc. Therefore, there is a concern that a user who is not accustomed to the operation may not be able to easily perform the intended operation.
Therefore, for users who do not want to use all the functions from the beginning, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the input keys themselves is turned off and the input functions of the input keys are disabled when a specific switch is operated, thereby creating a visual effect of reducing the number of input operation units 40. Note that a cooking device that limits the functions that can be used according to such user wishes has already been proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771.

It is also possible to set either the linked cooking mode or the combined cooking mode so that it cannot be used by user operation. In that case, the setting may be made using the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment, or an input key or push button switch or the like may be provided that allows the user to limit and expand functions simply by touching it.

Of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being performed automatically can also be performed manually. Also, all or part of the processes described as being performed manually can be performed automatically using a known method.

In the first to fourth embodiments, there are two induction heating sections 17H, a left heating section 17HL and a right heating section 17HR, and the inverter circuits 81L, 81R are arranged corresponding to each of the two heating sections, but this may be changed to the following form.
(1) When a large object to be heated is placed over two adjacent heating sections, the induction coils of the two adjacent heating sections are driven in a coordinated manner (see Japanese Patent No. 5,188,215 for a typical example).

(2) A system that includes four induction coils of approximately the same shape and size, wound in the same direction, and arranged in close proximity to each other on approximately the same plane below the top plate 15, and two inverter circuits that supply power to the four induction coils, in which the four induction coils are divided into two coil groups, and power is supplied to each of the two induction coil groups from the two inverter circuits (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5299590 as a representative example).

(3) A system having a circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged under the top plate 15 and (multiple) auxiliary IH coils arranged to surround the circular IH coil, a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil, and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coils (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5257542 as a representative example).

(4) A heating device comprising: a main IH coil for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate; a sub-IH coil group consisting of a plurality of sub-IH coils each installed adjacent to the outside of the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group for independently supplying high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils in the sub-IH coil group; a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether the same object to be heated is placed on at least one of the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; and a current control circuit for controlling the output of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group, wherein the sub-IH coil is A plurality of sub-IH coils are provided around the main IH coil with a predetermined insulating space between them, and the outer diameter shape of the sub-IH coil is such that the side edge adjacent to the outer periphery of the main IH coil is curved along the outer periphery of the main IH coil, and the current control circuit controls the output of the main inverter circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuits to a predetermined distribution so that the heating power value set by the user is achieved, and then when the number of sub-IH coils performing the cooperative heating operation increases or decreases, or is switched to another sub-IH coil, the output distribution before the change is maintained (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5642168 as a representative example).

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices shown in the figures are conceptual and functional, and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown. Furthermore, the integrated control device MC, microwave heating control unit 130, heating chamber control unit 159, and display unit drive circuit 63 described in particular in Figures 30 and 122 allow for the distribution and integration of the functions of these devices and circuits, and the specific form is not limited to that shown, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating conditions, etc.

The functions of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 are realized by processing circuits. The processing circuits that realize the functions may be dedicated hardware or may be processors that execute programs stored in memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device MM, which is memory. The processor realizes each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90. The memory device MM is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs of the memory device MM and memory device 90R shown in FIG. 30 may not be stored in the cooking appliance 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking appliance 1 obtains the necessary data and program information by accessing the external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operating programs of the integrated control device MC, microwave heating control unit 130, heating chamber control unit 159, and display unit drive circuit 63 described in particular in FIG. 30 may be updated to appropriately improved versions at the request of the user or the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, for example, a correction program may be obtained via the wireless communication unit 49.

One of the heating parts 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) for cooking on the top plate 15 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Also, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, or the oven heating source 188 may be replaced with a gas-fired burner.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R have all been described as "contact input" operation units in which the user touches input keys to give input commands, but a non-contact method in which input is performed by detecting the movement of the user's fingers or hands in a non-contact manner may also be used. Furthermore, the method may be changed to a voice input method in which the user's voice is recognized and input. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and voice receiving unit for receiving the user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to the input operation unit.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 40 was used as the means for selecting the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP, and the third specific screen 30ST, but it may also be provided in the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 30L and 30R, which are display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes a technique for composite cooking, proposes a technique in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of the composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user selects a menu by touching the menu selection section directly with their finger.

Therefore, the menu of dishes possible in the composite cooking or collaborative cooking mode, the names of the foods to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. may be displayed on the first specific screen 30SC or the second specific screen 30SP, and the user may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with their finger to select the menu of the collaborative cooking mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives command signals transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits each operation signal and command signal L1 to L10 to the outside, but it may also transmit information indicating the progress of cooking step 1, cooking step 2, such as the start and end of cooking step 2. The user can know this progress information on the portable terminal device 418, etc., improving convenience.

In addition, in the first embodiment, command signals, operation signals, etc. are sent and received between the home gateway 411 inside the house HA by the wireless communication unit 49, but power line carrier technology (also called "PLC technology") may also be used.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the home gateway 411 having a function of receiving search result data of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is used as the information management device, but the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 may each be connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 and connected to an external server 417 via the Internet 416. In that case, the external server 417 may store and hold the inventory information of the refrigerator 401.

Furthermore, the external server 417 stores recipe information for various cooking methods that can be used with the cooking appliance 1. The system may then be configured to search for recipe information in response to a request from the cooking appliance 1 or the information and communication terminal device 418, and provide the extracted recipe information to the cooking appliance 1 or the information and communication terminal device 418.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking device disclosed herein can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking appliance 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation opening 2B Front opening 2G Step 2P Upper surface of rim 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame line 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source 10 Main body of upper unit 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Partition plate 13 Partition plate 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bent portion 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C Coil base (coil support frame)
17CH Arm 17CL Coil wire 17H Induction heating section 17HL Left heating section (second heating section)
17HM Center heating section 17HR Right heating section (first heating section)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcement plate 23 Right-side input control device 24 Left-side input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushioning material 27 Light-emitting display section 27L Light-emitting display section 27M Light-emitting display section 27R Light-emitting display section 27L1 to 27L4 Individual light-emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light-emitting sections 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light-emitting sections 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display section (central display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation text 30G Caution text 30H Recommendation text 30J Specific text 30K Heating source display section 30L First area 30M Second area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Text information (additional information)
30R Third area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Information showing output level 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display section
31L Left side display section (individual display section)
31LW Display window 31R Right side display section (individual display section)
31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L Drive circuit 37R Drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation unit 40L Left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal receiving unit 40VS Audio signal analyzing unit 40R Right operation unit (first individual operation unit)
41 Operation board
41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key (guide key)
43KP Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input keys 43M1 to 43R3 Input keys 43MC Input key 43MS Input key (start part)
43MT Input key (end part)
43R1 to 43R4 Input key 43MX Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Capacitor 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 First cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A Air outlet 60C Fan case 60F Rotor 60FL Cooling air 60H Intake port 60M Motor 60P Drive circuit 60T Rotor shaft 61 Second cooling fan 61A Air outlet 61C Fan case 61F Rotor 61M Motor 61P Drive circuit 62 Cooling fan drive circuit 63 Display drive circuit 63CS Display command unit (for second specific screen)
63SP Display command unit (for 1st specific screen)
63ST Display command unit (for 3rd specific screen)
64 Ventilation hole
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Antimagnetic ring 67L Heat power display 67H Keep warm display 67R Heat power display 68 Heat source display 68L Display 68M Display 68R Display 69 High temperature warning 70 Cover 70A Front cutout 70B Hanging wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control section (demand control section)
73 Signal transmission section 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonant capacitor 76m Resonant capacitor 77a Input current detection section 77am Input current detection section 77b Output current detection section 77bm Output current detection section 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing capacitor 78cm Smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c Diode 79cm Diode 79d Diode 79dm Diode 80 Inverter circuit board 80F First inverter circuit board 80M Second inverter circuit board 81 Inverter circuit 81L Inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M Inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R Inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 Heat sink 82B Heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 Heat sink (rear first heat sink)
82B2 Heat sink (rear second heat sink)
82F Heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 Heat sink (front first heat sink)
82F2 Heat sink (front second heat sink)
82FN Heat dissipation fin 82M Heat sink 82MF Heat dissipation fin 82MF1 Heat dissipation fin 82MF2 Heat dissipation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensor 85 Electrical component 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Ventilation hole 87B Drainage hole 88 Inner case 88A Ventilation hole 88B Hole 89 Insertion hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Memory device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power supply conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit (abnormality detection unit)
94L Induction heating circuit 94R Induction heating circuit 95 Voice synthesizer 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Operation button or operation key of main power switch 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined portion 101F Front plate 101H Body portion 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct 102A Internal passage 102B Internal passage 102E End portion 104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A Connection port (connection terminal)
108B Connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal section 109B Output terminal section 109C Output terminal section 110 Main body 111 Inclined section 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Rear wall (rear wall surface)
113T: recess 114: door 115: handle 117: through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power supply circuit section 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator 122H Heat Dissipation Section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna Case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna Drive Motor 126A Rotating Shaft 127 Power Supply Circuit Board 128 Third Cooling Fan (Lower Cooling Fan) (Cooling Fan A)
129 Fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control unit 131 Door open/close detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 Pin 135 Pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closure detection unit 140 Oven heating device 141 Space (ceiling space)
142 Space (side space)
145 Tray 150 Case A
151 Case B
152B Air intake (second air intake)
152F Intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A Lid 154B Body 158 Non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking dish 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Vent (first air intake)
165 Recess (intake duct)
166L Left side partition plate 166R Right side partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 181 Cover 182 Relay 184 Sealing material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 Microwave heating source 190 Frame 191 Cover 192 Inner frame 192W Viewport (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Air direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 226 Leg 264 Ventilation hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right gap (third gap)
301L Left gap (third gap)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 gap 304 support metal fitting 304V vertical portion 304H horizontal portion (flange portion)
305 Vent hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct 308 Vertical portion 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower gap (third gap)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushioning material 330 Identification information 331 Additional information 332 Cooking process information (display section of cooking process)
333 Time-saving information 334 Refrigerator display 335D Symbol 335U Symbol 336D Symbol 336U Symbol 337 Display guide 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual food ingredient information 400 Home appliances 401 Refrigerator 402 Television set 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilator 406 Electric rice cooker (electric rice cooker)
408 Microwave oven 409 Lighting equipment 410 Kitchen 411 Home gateway 412 Main body case 413 Environment detection unit 413A Sensor unit 413H Human detection unit 414 Power meter 415 Power line (main line)
416 Wide area communication circuit network 417 External server 418 Information and communication terminal device 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Intake port 426 Electric fan 429 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 Intake port 433 Air outlet 434 Odor sensor 435 Communication unit 436 Vertical wall surface 440 Temperature monitoring device 441 Temperature detection unit 442 Communication unit 443 Temperature determination circuit 444 Light receiving unit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit (transmitter/receiver)
447 Central control unit 448 Power amount control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environmental sensor AH Upper air duct AL Exposed range of top plate AN Notification unit BL Straight line (reference line)
BH Depth dimension BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum dimension of upper case in front-to-back direction D6 Maximum width dimension in front-to-back direction D7 Distance between opposing sides DP1 Depth (dimension)
EM Abnormality detection unit F1 First air duct F2 Second air duct FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI Inlet FL1 Air outlet line FL2 Air outlet line FO Outlet GD1 Step GP1 Gap GP2 Gap (first gap)
GP5L gap GP5R gap GP6 gap GP7 gap GP8 gap GP9 gap GP10 gap GP11 gap GP12 gap (second gap)
GP13 Distance between the top plate and the cover GP14 Gap with the first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Gap GP18 Gap HC Main body case H1 Maximum height dimension H2 Height dimension H3 Height dimension H4 Height dimension H5 Height dimension H6 Height dimension H7 Height dimension H8 Height dimension HA House HB Reference bottom surface HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selection value signal IP4 Selection value signal IP5 Image signal JC Human detection sensor LA Protrusion dimension LD1 Distance LD2 Distance LF Exhaust port dimension MC Integrated control device MM Memory device N Heated object QC Seismic sensor RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air duct W1 Width dimension of installation port W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension of cooking device W4 Maximum dimension in left-right direction W5 Maximum width dimension in left-right direction of upper case W6 Length of inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum (width) dimension in left-right direction inside of upper case W9 Distance between opposing hanging walls 70B (dimension of space in the front-rear direction)
W10 Distance W11 Diameter W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation interval WB Depth dimension WH Inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB Intersection XF Intersection XG Intersection.

Claims (15)

The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate on the main body ;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a first cooperative cooking mode and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means, which are automatically selected according to a selected cooperative cooking menu , are driven in a predetermined order;
The first integrated cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 performed by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 performed by the second heating means after the cooking step 1 ,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1;
(2) stopping the operation of the first integrated cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until a stop condition A is satisfied.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The stop condition A corresponds to a temperature of an installation space of the first heating means.
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 . The stop condition A corresponds to an elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means.
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 . The control unit restricts the heating means to be used in the cooking process 2 from being used by other cooking during the cooking process 1 , and the restriction is lifted when the operation of the first cooperative cooking mode is stopped due to the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection unit.
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 . The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate on the main body ;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a first cooperative cooking mode and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means, which are automatically selected according to a selected cooperative cooking menu , are driven in a predetermined order;
The first integrated cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 performed by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 performed by the second heating means after the cooking step 1 ,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 2, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 2;
(2) stopping the operation of the first integrated cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped,
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until a stop condition B is satisfied.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The stop condition B corresponds to a temperature of the heating chamber or the second heating means.
6. The cooking device according to claim 5. The stop condition B corresponds to an elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the second heating means.
6. The cooking device according to claim 5. The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate on the main body ;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a first cooperative cooking mode and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means, which are automatically selected according to a selected cooperative cooking menu , are driven in a predetermined order;
The second integrated cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 performed by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 performed by the first heating means after the cooking step 1 ,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1;
(2) stopping the operation of the second integrated cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped,
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until a stop condition B is satisfied.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The stop condition B corresponds to an elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the second heating means.
9. The cooking device according to claim 8. The control unit restricts the heating means to be used in the cooking process 2 from being used by other cooking during the cooking process 1, and the restriction is lifted when the operation of the second cooperative cooking mode is stopped due to the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection unit.
9. The cooking device according to claim 8. The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate on the main body ;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit that provides information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
An abnormality detection unit;
an input operation unit for inputting a command signal to the control unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a first cooperative cooking mode and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means, which are automatically selected according to a selected cooperative cooking menu , are driven in a predetermined order;
The second integrated cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 performed by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 performed after the cooking step 1 by the first heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 2, the control unit
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 2;
(2) stopping the operation of the second integrated cooking mode;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until a stop condition A is satisfied.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The stop condition A corresponds to a temperature of an installation space of the first heating means.
The cooking device according to claim 11 . The stop condition A corresponds to an elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means.
The cooking device according to claim 11 . The control unit restricts the heating means to be used in the cooking process 2 from being used by other cooking during the cooking process 1, and the restriction is lifted when the operation of the second cooperative cooking mode is stopped due to the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection unit.
The cooking device according to claim 11 . The inside of the main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space,
the upper space is provided with an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and passes cooling air through the upper space;
a lower cooling fan is disposed in the lower space, the lower cooling fan introducing outside air without passing through the upper space and passing cooling air therethrough;
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 1 to 14.

Images